Civil PDF

MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS)
B.E CIVIL ENGINEERING

MEPCO –R2015 CBCS
Regulations, Curriculum and Syllabus
CONTENTS
Sl.No. Description Page No.
1. Regulations: Mepco - R2015 1
2. Curriculum 21
3. Syllabus - I Semester 36
4. Syllabus - II Semester 51
5. Syllabus - III Semester 63
6. Syllabus - IV Semester 75
7. Syllabus - V Semester 87
8. Syllabus - VI Semester 95
9. Syllabus - VII Semester 102
10. Syllabus - VIII Semester 147
11. Core Elective – I (V Semester) 107
12. Core Elective – II (VI Semester) 115
13. Core Elective – III (VII Semester) 124
14. Core Elective – IV (VII Semester) 131
15. Core Elective – V (VII Semester) 139
16. Core Elective – VI (VIII Semester) 147
Syllabus Page No.
Sl.No. Course Offering Department Value

Allied Open Special
Added
Elective Elective Course
Course
1. Civil Engineering - 249 393 434
2. Electrical and Electronics Engineering 154 276 395 435
3. Electronics and Communication Engineering 167 291 398 440
4. Computer Science Engineering 180 316 404 445
5. Mechanical Engineering 194 331 408 446
6. Information and Technology 223 353 420 452
7. Bio – Technology 236 366 - 459
8. Mathematics - 379 428 -
9. English - 385 - -
10. Physics - 387 - -
11. Chemistry - 390 - -
12. Master of Business Administration - - - -

AFFILIATED TO ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
Institute Vision Institute Mission

Envisioning a World To Produce Competent,
Lead by our Engineers, Disciplined, Quality
Holding a Beacon of Hope and Engineers & Administrators
Confidence for Generations to come Through Service par Excellence
REGULATIONS: MEPCO-R2015
[Common to all B.E. / B.Tech. Degree
(8 – Semester / 6 - Semester LES) Full-Time Programmes]
(w.e.f. 2015 – 2016)
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

Degree of Bachelor of Engineering / Bachelor of Technology
1. PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATURE
In these Regulations, unless the context otherwise requires:
I). “Programme” means Degree Programme, that is, B.E. / B.Tech. Degree Programme.
II). “Discipline” means Branch or specialization of B.E. / B.Tech. Degree Programme, like Civil
Engineering, Information Technology, etc.
III). “Course” means a theory or a practical subject that is normally studied in a semester, like
Mathematics, Physics, Engineering Graphics, Circuit Theory etc.
IV). “Chairperson, Academic Council” means the authority of the Autonomous Institution who is
responsible for all academic activities of the Institute/Departments for implementation of
relevant Rules and Regulations.
V). “Controller of Examinations” means the authority of the Autonomous Institute who is
responsible for all activities of the End semester Examinations.
VI). “Head of the Institution” means the Principal of the campus.
VII). “Chairperson, BoS” means Chairperson of Board of Studies of each faculty.
VIII). “Head of the Department” means Head of the Department concerned.
IX). “Credit” means a numerical value allocated for each course to describe the student’s workload
required per week.
X). “Grade” means the letter grade assigned to each course based on the range of marks
specified.
XI). “Grade Point” means a numerical value (0 to 10) allocated based on the grade assigned to
each course.
XII). “University” means Anna University, Chennai.
XIII). LES means Lateral Entry Scheme.
1
XIV). CBCS means Choice Based Credit System.
XV). Core Elective (COEL) course means the courses which are applicable only for the concerned
programme students only.
XVI). Open Elective (OPEL) course means the courses which are open to all the UG programme
students.
XVII). Allied Elective (ALEL) a course which can be opted by students of UG programme other than
students of the hosting programme
XVIII). Value Added Course (VAC) means a course that will be offered by the department to bridge
the gap between the curriculum and the requirements of the industry, which could be selected
by any student in the college.
XIX). Special Course (SPC) means a course for the registered students of concerned programme,
to be offered by the expert from reputed industry/institution in India/Abroad.
XX). Audit Course (AUC) means a course which could be audited by the students across any
programme in the college.
2. ADMISSION PROCEDURE
2.1.a) Candidates for admission to the first semester of the eight semesters B.E. / B.Tech.
Degree Programme shall be required to have passed:
 The Higher Secondary Examination of (10 + 2) Curriculum (Regular Academic Stream)

prescribed by the Government of Tamil Nadu with Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry as
three of the four subjects of the study prescribed under part-III or any other examinations of any
University or authority accepted by the Syndicate of the University / Directorate of Technical
Education as equivalent thereto.
(OR)
 Should have passed the Higher Secondary Examination of Vocational Stream
(Vocational groups in Engineering / Technology) as prescribed by the Government of Tamil
Nadu.
2.1.b) Candidates for admission to the second year (LES) of the four year B.E. / B.Tech.
Degree Programme shall be required to have passed:
 The Diploma Examination in Engineering conducted by the State Board of Technical

Education and Training, Tamil Nadu.
(OR)
 An Examination of any University or Authority, accepted by the Syndicate of the Anna

University as equivalent thereto.
(OR)
 Any other examination as notified by the Government of Tamil Nadu.
Candidates who have passed Bachelor of Science conducted by the State Board of
Collegiate Education, are eligible for admission to the Third semester under LES of the B.E. /
B.Tech. Degree Programmes. In addition, any other conditions as notified by the Government
of Tamil Nadu will be followed.
2
2.2. The eligibility criteria such as marks, number of attempts and physical fitness shall be as
prescribed by the Syndicate of the University / DoTE from time to time.
3. PROGRAMMES OFFERED
A candidate may be offered admission to any one of the programmes / disciplines of study
approved by the Academic council of Institution.
Programmes / disciplines offered by the Institute are listed in Annexure.
4. STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMMES

4.1 Every Programme will have a curriculum with syllabi consisting of theory and practical
courses such as:
1. Humanities and Social Sciences (HS), including Management
2. Basic Sciences (BS) including Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry, Biology
3. Engineering Sciences (ES), including Materials, Workshop, Drawing, Basics of

Electrical / Electronics / Mechanical / Chemical / Computer Engineering,
Instrumentation, Bio-Technology
4. Core Courses (CC) - Relevant to the chosen specialization/branch
5. Core Electives (COEL) – Six numbers of Core Electives relevant to the chosen
specialization/ branch are to be selected and will be offered from V semester onwards.
6. Open Electives (OPEL) – Four numbers of Open Elective courses from the list
prescribed in the curriculum which will be offered from V semester onwards, with one
course in each semester. The students have to register for this course.
7. Allied Electives (ALEL) - Two numbers of Allied Elective courses from the list
prescribed in the curriculum which will be offered in V and VI semester. The students
have to register for this course.
8. Project Work, Seminar and/or Internship in reputed organization/Industry.
4.2. Procedure for the enrollment for the OPEL / ALEL:
The students have to register for the Open and Allied Elective courses through appropriate
course registration form. Prior permission of the Course Instructor and the Heads of the
Respective Department is required.
4.3. New courses may be introduced by the department / institution at any time depending upon the
requirement after getting approval from the concerned Board of Studies, Academic Council and
Governing Body.
4.4 Each course is normally assigned a certain number of credits with
 1 credit per lecture period per week and 1 credit per 2 tutorial periods per week for
theory courses.
 1 credit for 2 periods of laboratory or practical courses.
 1 credit for 2 periods of technical seminar or 2 periods of mini project work per week.
 1 Credit for acquiring the international certification in a relevant discipline for showing
their competency in the international level (For example: Oracle Java Certification as
approved by the concerned HOD) subject to a maximum of 2 credits during their
programme.
3
4.5 Each semester curriculum shall normally have a blend of theory courses not exceeding 6 and
practical courses not exceeding 4, subject to a maximum of 9 courses.
4.6 For the award of the degree, a student has to earn the total number of credits specified in
the curriculum of the relevant discipline / branch of study (Annexure-I).
4.7 The medium of instruction is English for all courses, examinations, seminar presentations
and project report.
5. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

5.1 A student is ordinarily expected to complete the B.E. / B.Tech. P rogramme in 8
semesters (four academic years ) but in any case not more than 7 years (14
semesters). In case of LES, a student is ordinarily expected to complete the B.E. /
B.Tech. P rogramme in 6 semesters (three academic years) but in any case not more
than 6 years (12 semesters).
5.2 Each semester shall normally consist of 90 working days or 450 periods of 50 minutes
each. The Head of the Department shall ensure that every teacher imparts instruction as
per the number of periods specified in the syllabus and that the teacher teaches the entire
content of the specified syllabus for the course being taught.
5.3 However, special theory/practical classes may be conducted for students who require
additional coaching over and above the number of periods normally specified, as decided
by the class committee.
But for the purpose of calculation of attendance requirements for writing the End Semester
Examinations (as per clause 6) by the students, only 450 periods per semester conducted
within the specified academic schedule shall be taken into account.
5.4 The total period for completion of the programme reckoned from the
commencement of the first semester (third semester in case of LES) to which the
candidate was admitted shall not exceed the maximum period specified in clause 5.1
irrespective of the period of break of study (vide clause 18.1) or period of prevention in
order that he/she may be eligible for the award of the degree (vide clause 16).
6. REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPLETION OF A SEMESTER

6.1 A candidate who has fulfilled the following conditions shall be deemed to have satisfied the
requirements for completion of a semester.
Ideally every student is expected to attend all classes and earn 100% attendance. However, in
order to allow provision for certain unavoidable reasons such as medical / personal grounds /
participation in sports, the student is expected to earn a minimum of 75% attendance.
Therefore, he/she shall secure not less than 75% of overall attendance in that semester taking
into account the total number of periods in all courses attended by the candidate as against the
total number of periods in all courses offered during that particular semester.
6.2 However, a candidate who could secure attendance between 65% and less than 75% in the
current semester due to medical reasons (hospitalization / accident / specific illness) or due to
participation in the University / State / National / International level Sports events with prior
permission from the Head of the Department concerned shall be given exemption from the
prescribed attendance requirement and he/she shall be permitted to appear for that particular
semester examinations.
6.3 Candidates who secure less than 65% overall attendance will not be permitted to write the End-
Semester Examinations and are not permitted to go to next / subsequent semester. They are
required to repeat the incomplete semester in the next academic year.
4
7. FACULTY ADVISOR
To help the students in planning their courses of study and for general advice on the
academic programme, the Head of the Department of the student will attach a certain number of
students to a faculty member of the Department who shall function as Faculty Advisor for those
students throughout their period of study. Such Faculty Advisor shall advise the students and
monitor the courses taken by the students, check the attendance and progress of the students
attached to him / her and counsel them periodically. If necessary, the Faculty Advisor may also
discuss with or inform the parents about the progress / performance of the students concerned.
The responsibilities for the Faculty Advisor shall be:
 To act as the channels of communication across the HoD, the students of the
respective class and Parents.
 To collect and maintain various statistical details of academic and other activities of
the students
 To help the chairperson of the class committee in planning and conduct of the class
committee meetings.
 To monitor the academic performance of the students including attendance and to

inform the class committee.
 To attend to the students’ welfare activities like awards, medals, scholarships and
industrial visits.
 To attend to the students’ grievance and redressal requirements and help them.
8. CLASS COMMITTEE
A class committee consists of teachers of the class concerned, student representatives and a
chairperson, who does not handle any subject for the class. It is like the ‘Quality Circle’ (more
commonly used in industries), with the overall goal of improving the teaching-learning process. The
functions of the class committee include:
• Solving the problems experienced by students in the classroom and in the

laboratories in consultation with Head of the Department / Dean.
• Clarifying the Regulations of the degree programme and the details of rules therein.
• Informing the student representatives, the academic schedule including the mode and
dates of assessments and the syllabus coverage for each assessment.
• Informing the student representatives, the details of Regulations regarding weightage

used for each assessment.
• Analyzing the performance of the students of the class after each periodic test and finding
ways and means of improving the performance of the students.
• Identifying the slow learners and helping them to come up by guidance and/or by
providing additional coaching.
The class committee is normally constituted by the Head of the Department. However, if the students
of different branches are mixed in each class the class committee is to be constituted by the
concerned HODs. The class committee shall be constituted within a week from the date of
commencement of a semester. At least 4 student-representatives from the respective class (typically 2
boys and 2 girls) shall be included in the class committee. The Chairperson of the class committee
may invite the Faculty Advisor(s) and the Head of the Department to the meeting of the class
committee. The chairperson of the class committee is required to prepare the minutes of every meeting,
submit the same to the Head of the Department and then to the Principal within three working days of
the meeting and arrange to circulate the same among concerned students and teachers.
5
The first meeting of the class committee shall be held within fifteen days from the date of
commencement of the semester. The nature and weightage of internal assessments shall be informed
in the first meeting, and the same shall be communicated to the students. Two or three subsequent
meetings in a semester may be held at suitable intervals. During these meetings the student members
representing the entire class, shall meaningfully interact and express their opinions and suggestions of
the class students to improve the effectiveness of the teaching-learning process.
9. COURSE COMMITTEE FOR COMMON COURSES

Each common theory course offered to more than one discipline or more than one class handled by different
faculty members, shall have a “Common Course Committee” comprising all the teachers teaching the course
with one of them nominated as Course Coordinator. The nomination of the Course Coordinator shall be
made by the Faculty Chairman in consultation with Heads of Departments of the participating discipline.
The “Common Course Committee” shall meet as often as possible and ensure uniform delivery and
evaluation of internal assessments after arriving at a common scheme of evaluation (subject to clause 10).
Wherever feasible, the common course committee shall prepare a common question paper for the test(s).
10. PROCEDURES FOR AWARDING MARKS FOR INTERNAL ASSESSMENT (IA)
For all B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes, out of 100 marks for each paper the maximum marks for Internal
Assessment is fixed as 40 for Theory Courses / Theory Courses with lab components and End Semester
Examinations carries 60 marks.
However, internal assessment is for 50 marks for Practical Courses and End Semester Examination carries 50
marks and internal assessment is 100 marks for the Project Work while project report evaluation and viva-
voce examination carry 100 marks.
10.1 Internal Assessment for Theory Courses

The maximum marks for Internal Assessment shall be 40 in case of theory courses. Three assessments,
carrying 50 marks each shall be conducted b y t h e c o l l e g e . The total marks obtained in all the three
assessments should be converted to 75 marks and rounded to the nearest integer.
The internal assessment is based on the internal test marks, assignment marks and percentage of
attendance. The criteria for arriving at the Internal Assessment marks of 40 are as follows:
(a) Internal tests (75% credence)
Three internal tests, each carrying 50 marks shall be conducted by the Department /
Institution. The total marks obtained in all the tests put together out of 150, shall be reduced to 75
marks and rounded to the nearest integer. This implies equal weight to all the three tests.
However, a makeup test at the discretion of the concerned course faculty / Head of the
Department may be conducted for deserving candidates at the end of the semester, where the
students have to register/request for the makeup test.
(b) Assignment (15% credence)
Two assignments requiring work of average 3 to 4 hours of study and written work of average 3 to
4 hours, each carried out by a student in a separate assignment folder, duly indexed with
headings, date of submission, marks, remarks and signature of faculty with date etc. However,
depending on the nature of the course, the course coordinator may decide a variant of the
assessment such as Quiz/ Case Study Presentation/ Seminar etc. equivalent to assignment
weightage.
6
(c) Attendance (10% credence)
A maximum of 10 marks for attendance out of 100 marks shall be given to each student
depending on his/her attendance percentage as per the distribution given below:
Attendance (10 Marks)
Percentage of attendance Marks out of 10
75-79 2
80-84 4
85-89 6
90-94 8
95 and above 10
10.2 Internal Assessment For Practical Courses
The maximum marks for Internal Assessment shall be 50 in case of practical courses. Every practical
exercise / experiment shall be evaluated based on conduct of experiment / exercise and records
maintained. There shall be at least one test. The criteria for arriving at the Internal Assessment marks
of 50 are as follows:
Experiment / Observation / Record / Practical Classes performance : 50% credence
Practical Test : 40% credence
Attendance : 10% credence
10.3 Internal Assessment for Theory Courses with Laboratory Component
The maximum marks for Internal Assessment shall be 40 in case of theory courses with laboratory
component. The criteria for arriving at the Internal Assessment marks of 40 are as follows:
a) Internal Tests (60% credence)
If there is a theory course with laboratory component, there shall be three tests (each 50 marks).
The total 150 marks should be converted to 60 marks. However, a special test at the discretion of
the Head of the Department may be conducted for deserving candidates for which the students
have to request/register with the course instructor
(b) Assignment (15% credence)
Two assignments requiring work of average 3 to 4 hours of study and written work of average 3 to
4 hours, each carried out by a student in a separate assignment folder, duly indexed with
headings, date of submission, marks, remarks and signature of faculty with date etc. However,
depending on the nature of the course, the course coordinator may decide a variant of the
assessment such as Quiz/ Case Study Presentation/ Seminar etc. equivalent to assignment
weightage.
c) Lab experiments / Lab test (15% credence)
A maximum mark of 15 shall be given to practical component. There shall be at least one test
and every practical exercise / experiment shall be evaluated based on the conduct of experiment
/ exercise, records maintained.
7
(d) Attendance (10% credence)
A maximum of 10 marks for attendance out of 100 marks shall be given to each student
depending on his/her attendance percentage as per the distribution given below:
Attendance (10 Marks)

75-79 2
80-84 4
85-89 6
90-94 8
95 and above 10
10.4 Internal Assessment for Project Work
There shall be three assessments (each 100 marks) during the semester by a review committee. The
students of the project group (of not exceeding 3 students) shall make presentation on the progress made
before the committee. The Head of the Department shall constitute the review committee for each branch of
study. There shall be a minimum of three members in the review committee. The guide will be an additional
member of the Review Committee and he / she should be present during the presentation of his/her group.
The criteria for arriving at the Internal Assessment mark out of 100 are as follows:
Work assessed by the Project Guide : 30 Marks
Work assessed by the review committee : 60 Marks
Attendance : 10 Marks
75-79 2
80-84 4
85-89 6
90-94 8
95 and above 10
10.4.1 The candidate is expected to submit the project report on or before the last working day of the
semester.
10.4.2 All the project batches of VIII semester students are expected to present their project outcomes in one
International / National Conference.
10.4.3 The details of marks allotment for Internal Assessment and End Semester Examination is given
below.
Internal Assessment End Semester Examinations
Review Review Report Evaluation Viva-Voce

Attendance Guide Review I
II III Internal External Internal External *Guide
10 30 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
* Due to unavoidable reasons, in the absence of guide during the end semester examination, the internal examiner will
award the mark for the concerned student(s).
8
10.5 Attendance and Assessment Record
Every faculty member is required to maintain an ‘Attendance And Assessment Record’ for
every semester which consists of attendance marked in each lecture or practical or project work
class, the test marks, assignment marks, attendance marks and the record of class work (topics
covered), separately for each course handled by the teacher. This should be submitted to the Head of
the Department periodically (at least three times in a semester) for checking the syllabus coverage
and the records of test marks, assignment marks and attendance. The Head of the Department will
affix his / her signature and date after due verification. At the end of the semester, the record should be
verified by the Head of the Department / Institution who will keep this document in safe custody (for
five years).
11. EXAMINATIONS
Performance in each course of study shall be evaluated based on (i) Continuous internal assessment
throughout the semester and (ii) End semester examination.
Each course, both theory and practical shall be evaluated for a maximum of 100 marks. The
project work shall be evaluated for a maximum of 200 marks.
Project work may be allotted to a group of students not exceeding 3 per group.
The end semester examination (practical and theory) of 3 hours duration shall be conducted
between October - December during the odd semesters and between April - June during the even
semesters.
The end semester examination for project work shall consist of evaluation of the final report
submitted by the students of the project group (of not exceeding 3 students) by Internal and
External examiners followed by a viva-voce examination conducted separately for each project
group by a committee consisting of the external examiner, internal examiner and the guide of the
project group.
The award of end semester marks for 100 shall be evaluated by both Internal and External
Examiners, out of which the project report shall carry a maximum of 40 marks (same marks must
be awarded to every student of the project group) while the viva-voce examination shall carry 60
marks (awarded to each student of the project group based on the individual performance in the
viva-voce examination.)
i) Theory Courses
Internal Assessment : 40 Marks
End-Semester Exams : 60 Marks

ii) Theory Courses with laboratory component
iii) Practical courses

iv) Project Work
Internal Assessment : 100 marks
End semester
(Project work report Evaluation
and viva-voce examination) : 100 marks
9
12. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPEARING FOR END SEMESTER EXAMINATION
A candidate shall normally be permitted to appear for End semester examination of the current semester
if he / she has satisfied the semester completion requirements (vide Clause 6) and has registered for
examination in all courses of that semester by paying the prescribed fee.
However, for students having arrear courses of the previous semester(s), in order to write the current end
semester examination, the registration is mandatory for the examination of all the courses of that
semester and all arrear courses of the previous semester(s) by paying the prescribed fee, failing which,
the candidates will not be permitted to move to the higher semester.
A candidate who has already appeared for any course in a semester and passed the examination is not
entitled to reappear in the same course for improvement of letter grades / marks.
12. A. SPECIAL SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION AT THE END OF VIII SEMESTER

(Addition of a Clause 12.A in MEPCO R2015 CBCS (UG Programmes Regulations) as per the
th
approval of 4 Academic Council meeting held on 22-04-2016)
At the end of the VIII semester regular examinations, a candidate who has one or two arrears,
only in the VII and VIII semesters, will be eligible for attending the special supplementary examination
immediately after the publication of the results of challenge valuation. Students who have more than two
arrears in VII and VIII semesters and arrears from I semester to VI semester are not eligible to appear
for the special supplementary examination. Controller of Examination shall publish a schedule of special
supplementary examination after the last date of registering for the examination. The pattern of
evaluation will be the same as that of the end semester examination. Such appearance in special
supplementary examination will be treated as another attempt and it will be reflected in the grade sheet.
13. PASSING REQUIREMENTS
13.1 A candidate who secures not less than 50% of total marks prescribed for the courses
(Internal Assessment + End semester examination) with a minimum of 45% of the marks
prescribed for the end-semester Examination in theory, theory with practical components and
practical courses (including Project work), shall be declared to have passed in the
Examination.
For any programme, during any semester that conducts a practical course in two parts, say A
and B, it is mandatory that the student must appear for both the parts of the lab in the end
semester practical examination. The candidate is declared as pass in both the parts, A and B
of the lab, only if he / she secure a minimum of 50% put together. If the candidate is absent for
any one part of the lab, the candidate is declared as fail in both the parts A and B of the lab
and he / she should appear in both, part A and B in the subsequent semesters.
13.1.1 If a candidate fails to secure a pass in a particular course, it is mandatory that he / she
shall register and reappear for the examination in that course during the next
semester when examination is conducted in that course. It is mandatory that he /
she should continue to register and reappear for the examination till he / she
secures a pass mark.
13.1.2. The internal assessment marks obtained by the candidate in the first appearance
shall be retained and considered valid for all subsequent attempts till the
candidate secures a pass as per clause 13.1. However, from the 3rd attempt
onwards if a candidate fails to obtain pass marks (Internal Assessment + End
10
Semester Examination) as per clause 13.1 then the passing requirement shall be
as per clause 13.2.
13.2 For arrear students, from their 3rd attempt onwards, they should secure a minimum of 50% marks
prescribed for the course in the END Semester Examination alone.
13.3 Evaluation of Answer Scripts
The system of evaluation of answer scripts for theory courses is “Double Valuation” i.e.,
valuation by two examiners independently. Since the answer scripts are subject to double
valuation, there is no provision for revaluation. Even after a double valuation, candidates are
given the right to challenge the valuation. Challenging the valuation is permitted for those
students who have applied for photocopy of answer script. A candidate can apply for
challenge valuation in a theory course, within 2 weeks from the declaration of results, on
payment of a prescribed fee along with prescribed application to the Controller of
Examinations (COE) through the Heads of Departments.
Copies of answer scripts for theory courses can be obtained from the Office of the Controller
of Examinations on payment of a prescribed fee specified for this purpose through proper
application. The copy of answer script is to be valued by a competent authority and the valued
script should be submitted to Controller of Examination’s (COE’s) office along with the
prescribed fee for challenging the valuation. The COE will arrange for the challenge valuation
and the publications of the results.
Challenging is not permitted for Practical Courses, Mini projects, Seminar and for Project
work.
14. AWARD OF LETTER GRADES

All assessments of a course will be done on absolute marks basis. However, for the purpose of
reporting the performance of a candidate, the letter grades, each carrying certain points, will be awarded
as detailed below:
Range of Marks Letter Grade Grade Points (GP)

91 to 100 O (Outstanding) 10
81 to 90 A+ (Excellent) 9
71 to 80 A (Very good) 8
61 to 70 B+ (Good) 7
50 to 60 B (Average) 6
RA (Register for
0 to 49 0
Reappearance)
Shortage of
SA -
Attendance
Withdrawal W -
Audit Course AU -
‘RA’ denotes Reappearance is required for the examination in that particular course (This
grade will figure both in Grade Sheet as well as in Result Sheet.)
‘SA’ denotes shortage of attendance (as per Clause 6) and hence prevented from writing end
semester examination. ‘SA’ will appear only in the result sheet.
‘W’ denotes withdrawal from the particular course.
‘AU’ denotes Audit Course.
11
15 SGPA AND CGPA CALCULATION
After the results are declared, Grade Sheets will be issued to each student which will contain the
following details:
 The list of courses enrolled during the semester and the grades scored.
 The Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA) and
 The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) of all courses enrolled from first semester (third
semester in case of LES) onwards.
During each semester, the list of courses enrolled and the grades scored in each course are used to
compute the Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA). SGPA is the ratio of the sum of the products of
the number of credits of courses registered and the grade points corresponding to the grades scored in
those courses, taken for all the courses, to the sum of the number of credits of all the courses in the
semester.
 C GP
i 1
i i
SGPA  n
C i 1
i
where,
C – Credits assigned to each course
GP – grade point corresponding to the letter grade obtained for each course.
n – number of Courses successfully cleared during the particular semester in the case of SGPA
and during all the semesters in the case of CGPA.
CGPA will be calculated in a similar manner, considering all the courses enrolled from first semester
(third semester in case of LES). “RA”, “SA”, “W” and “AU” grades will be excluded for calculating
SGPA and CGPA.
16. ELIGIBILITY FOR THE AWARD OF DEGREE
16.1. A student shall be declared to be eligible for the award of the B.E. / B.Tech. Degree
provided,
i). The student has successfully gained the required number of total credits as specified in the
curriculum corresponding to his/her programme within the stipulated time.
ii). The student has successfully completed the programme requirements and has passed all
the courses prescribed in all the 8 semesters (six semesters in case of LES) within a maximum
period of 7 years (six years in case of LES) reckoned from the commencement of the first
semester (third semester in case of LES) to which the candidate was admitted.
iii). The student has successfully completed any additional courses prescribed by the
Chairperson, Academic Council whenever, any candidate is readmitted under regulations
other than MEPCO R-2015 (vide clause 18.2)
iv). The student has no disciplinary action pending against him/her.
v). The award of Degree shall be approved by the Syndicate of the University.
12
16.2 Classification of the Degree Awarded
16.2.1 First Class with Distinction:
A candidate who satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have passed
the examination in First class with Distinction:
 Should have passed the End semester examinations in all the courses of all the
eight semesters (six semesters in case of LES) in his/her First Appearance within four
years (three years in case of LES).
 Should have secured a CGPA of not less than 8.5
 Should NOT have been prevented from writing end semester examination due to lack
of attendance in any of the semesters.
 Withdrawal from examination (vide Clause 17) will not be construed as an

appearance.
 One year authorized break of study (if availed of) is permitted in addition to four
years (three years in case of LES) for award of First class with Distinction.
16.2.2 First Class:
A candidate who satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have passed the
examination in First class:
 Should have passed the End semester examination in all the courses of all the eight
semesters (six semesters in case of LES) within five years (four years in case of LES).
 Should have secured a CGPA of not less than 7.0
 Withdrawal from examination (vide Clause17) will not be construed as an appearance.
 One year authorized break of study (if availed of) or prevention from writing End
semester examination due to lack of attendance is permitted in addition to five years
(four years in case of LES) for the award of First Class.
16.2.3 Second Class:

All other candidates (not covered in clauses 16.2.1 and 16.2.2) who qualify for the award of
the degree (vide Clause 16.1) shall be declared to have passed the examination in
Second Class.
16.2.4. A candidate who is absent in semester examination in a course / project work after
having registered for the same shall be considered to have appeared in that
examination for the purpose of classification.
16.3 Ranks Awarded to Students
Ranks are awarded for each programme based on the following criteria.
 The number of ranks awarded for each programme is 6 or 10% of the students’ intake
in that programme, whichever is higher.
 The rank of a student is determined from CGPA. However, students who have scored
less than 7.5 CGPA will not be eligible for a rank.
 Students should have passed the End semester examination in all the courses
of all the eight semesters (six semesters in case of LES) in his/her First Appearance
without any break of study.
 However, for other students, a statement indicating their position in the programme
will be given on request, based on the CGPA, provided they have passed all the
courses within four years (three years in case of LES) of their study.
13
17. PROVISION FOR WITHDRAWAL FROM EXAMINATION
17.1 A candidate may, for valid reasons, (medically unfit / unexpected family situations)
be granted permission to withdraw from appearing for the examination in any course or
courses in any one of the semester examination during the entire duration of the degree
programme.
17.2 Such withdrawal shall be permitted only once during the entire period of study of the degree
programme.
17.3 Withdrawal application shall be valid only if the candidate is otherwise eligible to write the
examination (Clause 6) and if it is made within TEN days before the commencement
of the examination in that course or courses and also recommended by the Head of the
Department and approved by the Head of the Institution with intimation to COE.
17.3.1 Not withstanding the requirement of mandatory TEN days notice, applications for
withdrawal for special cases under extraordinary conditions will be considered on the
merit of the case.
17.4 Withdrawal shall not be construed as an appearance for deciding the eligibility of a candidate for
First Class with Distinction and First Class.
17.5 Withdrawal is NOT permitted for arrears examinations of the previous semesters.
17.6 Candidates shall appear, for the courses withdrawn, during the examination conducted in the
subsequent semester.
18. AUTHORIZED BREAK OF STUDY FROM A PROGRAMME
18.1 A candidate is normally not permitted to temporarily break the period of study. However, if a
candidate happens to discontinue the programme temporarily in the middle of duration of study
for valid reasons (such as accident or hospitalization due to prolonged ill health) and to rejoin
the programme in a later semester he / she shall apply to the Chairperson, Academic
Council in advance, in any case, not later than the last date for registering for the semester
in question, through the Head of the Department stating the reasons.
18.2 The candidate permitted to rejoin the programme after the break shall be governed by the
Curricula and regulations in force at the time of rejoining.
18.3 The authorized break of study will not be counted towards the duration specified for passing
all the courses for the purpose of classification (vide Clause 16.2.1 and 16.2.2).
18.4 The total period for completion of the programme reckoned from, the
commencement of the first semester (third semester in case of LES) to which the candidate
was admitted shall not exceed the maximum period specified in clause 5.1 irrespective of the
period of break of study in order that he / she may be eligible for the award of the degree (vide
clause 16).
18.5 If any student is detained for want of requisite attendance, progress and good conduct, the
period spent in that semester shall not be considered as permitted ‘Break of Study’ and
Clause 18.3 is not applicable for this case.
18.6 In case of any valid reasons for extension of Break of Study, it may be granted by the approval
of the Chairperson, Academic Council for a period not more than 1 year in addition to the
earlier authorized Break of Study. Such extended break of study shall be counted for the
purpose of classification of degree (vide clause 16.2).
18.7 If the candidate has not reported back to the department, even after the extended
Break of Study, the name of the candidate shall be deleted permanently from the college
enrollment. Such candidates are not entitled to seek readmission under any circumstances.
14
19. INDUSTRIAL VISIT / INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
Every student is expected to undergo Industrial visits for every year starting from the second year of the
Programme. Heads of Departments shall take efforts to arrange at least one industrial visit in a year.
The students may undergo industrial training for a total period of 2 – 4 weeks during summer /
winter vacation.
20. PERSONALITY AND CHARACTER DEVELOPMENT
All students shall enroll, on admission, in any one of the personality and character development
programmes (the NCC / NSS / NSO / YRC) and undergo training for about 80 hours inclusive of
attending camps of about seven days. The training shall include classes on hygiene and health
awareness and also training in first-aid.
National Cadet Corps (NCC) will have about 20 parades.
National Service Scheme (NSS) will have social service activities in and around the College /
Institution.
National Sports Organization (NSO) will have sports, Games, Drills and Physical exercises.
Youth Red Cross (YRC) will have activities related to social services in and around college/institutions.
While the training activities will normally be during weekends, the camp will normally be during vacation
period.
Every student shall put in a minimum of 75% attendance in the training and attend the camp compulsorily.
The training and camp shall be completed during the first year (second year in case of LES) of the
programme. However, for valid reasons, the Head of the Institution may permit a student to complete
this requirement in the second year (third year in case of LES) also.
21. DISCIPLINE
Every student is required to observe disciplined and decorous behavior both inside and outside the
Institution and not to indulge in any activity which will tend to bring down the prestige of the Institution.
In the event of an act of indiscipline being reported, the Principal shall constitute a disciplinary
committee to enquire into the act of indiscipline.
If a student indulges in malpractice in any of the End semester examination / internal examination he /
she shall be liable for punitive action as prescribed by the Institution from time to time.
Ragging is not at all allowed. Punitive actions will be taken against the students involved in ragging as
per the government norms.
22. AUDIT COURSE
UG students can audit courses from UG / PG curriculum based on their areas of interest and is
permitted under the following conditions:
 Students with CGPA 7.5 and above will be permitted to ‘Audit' the course. However, this would be
restricted to a maximum of 2 courses during the entire period of the programme.
 The students have to register for the courses to be audited through Course Registration Form while
registering for the semester. The course will not carry any credits. The word “Audit” would be
specially mentioned in the remarks column of the student's course registration form. Prior
15
permission of the Course Instructor and the Heads of the Respective Department is
required.
 The students would be required to have minimum 75% attendance in the Audit course.
 The ‘AU' grade would be awarded, if the attendance is satisfactory and requirements set out by the
course instructor are met. Students will be expected to complete the in-semester assessments. If
the attendance and performance is not satisfactory the course will not appear at all in the Grade
Sheet.
 Students can audit a course provided the course is offered and the time table slot permits.
 The course done by auditing will not be considered for the purposes of calculation of SGPA / CGPA
but will be reflected in the Semester Grade Sheet as Audit Course.
23. VALUE ADDED COURSES
In order to prepare the students to meet the challenges of the global work environment, value added
courses are offered to bridge the gap between the curriculum and the requirements of the industry.
Value added courses are designed and offered by each department for the benefit of the students. All
the UG students have to undergo at least one value added course in the sixth semester of their study.
UG students can choose any one of the value added course offered by the various departments, based
on their areas of interest at the end of the fifth semester. The students have to register for the value
added course through the Value Added Course Registration Form through their concerned HoD to the
HoD of the department offering the course, before the commencement of the sixth semester. Each
Value Added Course is assigned 2 Credits. The credits earned through value added courses will not be
considered for CGPA calculation. The performance of the students in the value added courses is
evaluated through end semester internal examination for 100 marks. If a student gets a pass mark in the
value added course, then the credits earned will be mentioned in the grade sheet or else, the status,
Audit / Withdrawn may appear in the grade sheet based on the individual student’s attendance.
24. SPECIAL COURSES
Interested Students can opt for special courses of 15 and 30 hours duration, approved by the academic
council. Special courses will be conducted in the semester holidays by experts from industry/research
organizations/higher learning institutions. Each 15 Hour special course is assigned one credit while each
30 Hour Special Course is assigned 2 credits. The credits earned through special courses will not be
considered for CGPA calculation. Students can complete such special courses during the semesters 4
to 7 as and when these courses are conducted by different departments. A student is also permitted to
register for special courses of other departments, provided the student has fulfilled the necessary pre-
requisites of the course being offered and subject to the approval of both the heads of departments. A
student can register for a maximum of 3 special courses. The special courses will be evaluated by the
respective course coordinator within 10 days of the completion of the programme. If a student gets a
pass mark in the special course, then the credits earned will be mentioned in the grade sheet or else,
the status, Audit / Withdrawn may appear in the grade sheet based on the individual student’s
attendance.
16
25. PRO - INTERNSHIP SCHEME
Pro-Internship scheme is designed specifically for students with good academic credentials. It presents
a unique opportunity for the students to complete the theory courses of the program in seven semesters.
Pro - Internship allows students to take up the VIII semester theory courses in VI and VII semesters
itself. Students can go for internship during the VIII semester and complete the VIII semester Project
Work in well reputed Industries / organizations offering Placement to the students / R & D organizations
/ Premier Institutions both in India and Abroad, as part of their internship. This is possible only if the
Industries / organizations offering Placement to the students / R & D organizations / Premier Institutions
allows Internship program with Project and the internship coordinators of the Department concerned are
notified well in advance.
25.1 Internship Benefits to Students:
During the Internship Students can apply the theory they have studied to practical problems in
an engineering / technology environment. They will have the opportunity to screen career
choices. It provides experience often required for future, full-time job searches. Experience
through internship facilitates sound judgment, confidence, teamwork, self-discipline, and
communication skills among the students. They have the possibility to establish contact with
practicing professionals and to get full-time job offers at graduation. It provides an opportunity
to earn while learning.
25.2 Eligibility
The guidelines presented below will be used to select the students for Pro-Internship
1. Students who are in the VI semester with a minimum CGPA of 7.5 upto V semester
2. Those who have completed all the courses upto V semester.
3. However only students who complete all the courses upto VII semester will be allowed
to proceed with the Internship cum Project.
25.3 Application to the Pro - Internship Scheme:
Students eligible for Pro-Internship scheme should apply for the scheme to their HoD within 7
days from the date of publication of V semester results in the VI semester of their study.
25.4 Guidelines to be followed:
(1) Pro Internship students should take at least one VIII semester theory course in VI semester.
The rest of the VIII semester theory courses can be completed in VII semester.
(2) The Pro Internship option requires students to attend two evening classes of 4 periods duration
per week for the VIII semester courses during their VI and VII semesters of their study. If
required, students need to attend additional classes during holidays to meet the curriculum
requirement.
(3) Students will be permitted to start the internship only after the seventh semester end terminal
examinations
(4) Students doing the internship should attend the Project Reviews in the scheduled dates. After
completion of the internship cum project, the final summative evaluation will be conducted with
a view to assign the final score.
17
25.5 Terms and conditions for internship:
1. The internship should be carried out at a single organization.

2. It should be completed within one semester.
3. All arrangements should be specified in the internship agreement.
4. During long leave period and closure of Industries/R&D organization/Premier Institutions for any
reason, during the internship period, the students concerned should continue the work only in the
college.
5. Students should adhere to the rules and regulations of the college and Industries/R&D
organization/Premier Institutions during the Internship cum Project period.
25.6 Termination of the Internship
(i) In the event of prolonged absence of student during the internship or

(ii) If the student has to discontinue the internship due to unforeseen circumstances
during that period or
(iii) If the performance of the work done by the student in the Industries/R&D
organization/Premier Institutions is not satisfactory during the Project Review or
(iv) If the student violates the college rules and regulations during the Internship cum
Project period,
Then the Internship cum Project will be terminated for these students, after due intimation to
the company. In such a situation, the VIII Semester Project will be in jeopardy, i.e. these students
have to repeat their VIII Semester project in the next academic year.
18
ANNEXURE
A candidate may be offered one of the following programmes of study approved by the University. A
candidate of a programme should earn the credits specified against it to enable him to be eligible to
be awarded the degree.
Credits
Name of the Programme
Regular LES
1. FACULTY OF CIVIL ENGINEERING
i) B. E. Civil Engineering 188 137
2. FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
i) B. E. Electrical and Electronics Engineering 190 139
3. FACULTY OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
i) B. E. Electronics and Communication Engineering 190 137
4. FACULTY OF COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
i) B. E. Computer Science and Engineering 181 130
5. FACULTY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
i) B. E. Mechanical Engineering 188 137
6. FACULTY OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
i) B. Tech. Information Technology 182 131
7. FACULTY OF BIOTECHNOLOGY
i) B.Tech. Biotechnology 182 132
26. REVISION OF REGULATIONS AND CURRICULUM
The Institution may from time to time revise, amend or change the Regulations, scheme of examinations
and syllabi if found necessary.
19
AFFILIATED TO ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI 600 025
REGULATIONS: MEPCO - R2015 (FULL TIME)
(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM)
B. E. – CIVIL ENGINEERING
Department Vision Department Mission

To provide students with a broad and thorough education in
To serve the Nation by providing a quality
civil engineering fundamentals, applications, and design that
engineering education that enables students’ to
prepares them for the practice of civil engineering at the
enter a profession that can improve the civil
professional level with the confidence and skills necessary to
infrastructure and economic welfare
meet the technical and social challenges of the future.
Programme educational objectives (PEOs):
 Technical knowledge : Possess a mastery of fundamental knowledge, problem solving skills,

engineering experimental abilities and design capabilities for advancing in their carrier
 Professionalism: Practice the civil engineering profession and follow professional and ethical standards
in executing civil engineering and multi-disciplinary projects on a global level.
 Self-Learning: Cope up with advanced technological social, economic, environmental changes through
life-long learning with effective team work, communication skill and leadership qualities.
Programme Outcomes (POs):
1. an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering to solve civil engineering
problems and design the civil engineering projects
2. an ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data related to civil
engineering
3. an ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints
such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety, manufacturability, and
sustainability
4. an ability to function on multidisciplinary teams in construction related activities
5. an ability to identify, formulate, and solve civil engineering problems
6. an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility while discharging civil engineering related
works
7. an ability to communicate and present the civil engineering concepts effectively
8. acquire broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in a global,
economic, environmental, and societal context
9. a recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in life-long learning to update the knowledge in civil
engineering field
10. a knowledge of contemporary issues related to civil engineering practice
11. an ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for civil engineering
practice and project management.
20
CURRICULUM (I to VIII SEMESTER)
SEMESTER- I (Common to all UG Programmes)
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY
1. 15HS101 Technical English – I 3 0 2 4
2. 15BS101 Mathematics – I 3 2 0 4
3. 15BS102 Engineering Physics 3 0 0 3
4. 15BS103 Engineering Chemistry 3 0 0 3
5. 15GE101 Computer Programming 3 0 0 3
6. 15GE102 Engineering Graphics 2 0 4 4
PRACTICAL
7. 15BS151 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15GE151 Computer Programming Laboratory 0 0 4 2
9. 15GE152 Engineering Practices Laboratory 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 17 2 18 27
SEMESTER II – Civil Engineering
SL. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

NO.
THEORY
1. 15HS201 Technical English – II* 3 0 0 3
2. 15BS201 Mathematics – II* 3 2 0 4
3. 15BS202 Environmental Science and Disaster Management* 3 0 0 3
4. Applied Materials Science
15BS203 3 0 0 3
(Common to Civil / Mechanical)
5. Engineering Mechanics
15GE201 3 2 0 4
(Common to Civil / Mechanical)
6. Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering
15GE202 3 0 0 3
(Common to Civil, Mechanical & Bio-Tech)
PRACTICAL
7. 15CS251 Computer Programming Lab in C++ 0 0 4 2
8. 15CE251 Computer Aided Building Drawing – I 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 18 4 8 24
* Common to all UG Programmes
SEMESTER- III

THEORY
1. Mathematics-III-Transforms and partial differential 3 2 0 4
15MA301
equations
2. 15CE301 Construction Materials and techniques 3 0 0 3
3. 15CE302 Mechanics of Solids 3 2 0 4
4. 15CE303 Soil Mechanics 3 2 0 4
5. 15CE304 Surveying 3 0 0 3
6. 15CE305 Engineering Geology 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15CE351 Survey Practical –I 0 0 4 2
8. 15CE352 Soil Mechanics Laboratory 0 0 4 2
9. 15HS351 Presentation Skills Laboratory 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 18 3 10 26
21
SEMESTER- IV

THEORY
1. 15MA401 Mathematics IV - Numerical Methods 3 2 0 4
2. 15CE401 Strength of Materials 3 2 0 4
3. 15CE402 Mechanics of Fluids and Machinery 3 2 0 4
4. 15CE403 Foundation Engineering 3 0 0 3
5. 15CE404 Highways and Railways 3 0 0 3
6. 15CE405 Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15CE451 Survey Practical –II 0 0 4 2
8. 15CE452 Strength of Materials Laboratory 0 0 4 2
9. 15CE453 Fluid Mechanics and Machinery Laboratory 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 18 3 12 27
SEMESTER V

THEORY
1. 15CE501 Structural Analysis–I 3 2 0 4
2. 15CE502 Design of Reinforced Concrete Elements 3 0 0 3
3. 15CE503 Concrete Technology 3 0 0 3
4. Core Elective I 3 0 0 3
5. Open Elective I 3 0 0 3
6. Allied Elective I 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15CE551 Concrete and Highway Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15CE552 Computer Aided Building Drawing - II 0 0 4 2
9. 15HS541 Professional Communication Skills Laboratory 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 18 1 12 25
SEMESTER VI

THEORY
1. 15CE601 Structural Analysis–II 3 2 0 4
2. 15CE602 Design of Steel Structures 3 2 0 4
3. 15CE603 Environmental Engineering 3 0 0 3
4. Core Elective II 3 0 0 3
5. Open Elective II 3 0 0 3
6. Allied Elective II 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15CE651 Civil Software application Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15CE652 Environmental Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 18 3 8 24
22
SEMESTER VII

THEORY
1. 15CE701 Estimation and Quantity Surveying 3 2 0 4
2. 15CE702 Construction Planning and Management 3 0 0 3
3. Core Elective III 3 0 0 3
4. Core Elective IV 3 0 0 3
5. Core Elective V 3 0 0 3
6. Open Elective III 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15CE751 Design Project 0 0 4 2
8. 15CE752 Computer Aided Design and Drafting Laboratory 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 18 1 8 23
SEMESTER VIII

THEORY
1. Core Elective VI 3 0 0 3
2. Open Elective IV 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
3. 15CE851 Main Project 0 0 12 6
TOTAL 6 0 12 12
Total Credits: 188 (Regular)

Total Credits: 137 (LES)
CORE ELECTIVE – I (V Semester)

1. 15CEC01 Advanced Construction Materials 3 0 0 3
2. 15CEC02 Advanced Surveying 3 0 0 3
3. 15CEC03 Ground Improvement Techniques 3 0 0 3
4. 15CEC04 Hydropower Engineering 3 0 0 3
5. 15CEC05 Airport, Docks and Harbour Engineering 3 0 0 3
CORE ELECTIVE – II (VI Semester)

1. 15CEC06 Mathematical Statistics 3 0 0 3
2. 15CEC07 Architecture 3 0 0 3
3. 15CEC08 Construction Safety Practices 3 0 0 3
4. 15CEC09 Ground water Hydrology 3 0 0 3
5. 15CEC10 Housing Planning and Management 3 0 0 3
6. 15CEC11 Remote Sensing and GIS
23
CORE ELECTIVE – III (VII Semester)

1. 15CEC12 Advanced Design of RC Structures 3 0 0 3
2. 15CEC13 Air pollution Management 3 0 0 3
3. 15CEC14 Bridge Engineering 3 0 0 3
4. 15CEC15 Coastal Zone Management 3 0 0 3
5. 15CEC16 Contracts Laws and regulations 3 0 0 3
CORE ELECTIVE – IV (VII Semester)

1. 15CEC17 Engineering Economics and Cost Analysis 3 0 0 3
2. 15CEC18 Concepts of Finite Element Method 3 0 0 3
3. 15CEC19 Pavement management Systems 3 0 0 3
4. 15CEC20 Fundamentals of Prefabricated Structures 3 0 0 3
5. 15CEC21 Repair and Rehabilitation of Structures 3 0 0 3
CORE ELECTIVE – V (VII Semester)

1. 15CEC22 Smart Materials and measuring techniques 3 0 0 3
2. 15CEC23 Introduction to Structural Dynamics 3 0 0 3
3. 15CEC24 Waste Water Engineering 3 0 0 3
4. 15CEC25 Water Resources System planning and management 3 0 0 3
5. 15CEC26 Design of Prestressed Concrete elements 3 0 0 3
CORE ELECTIVE – VI (VIII Semester)

1. 15CEC27 Interior Decoration 3 0 0 3
2. 15CEC28 Risk and Value Management 3 0 0 3
3. 15CEC29 Solid and Hazardous Management 3 0 0 3
4. 15CEC30 Traffic Planning and Management 3 0 0 3
5. 15CEC31 Elements of Industrial structures 3 0 0 3
Allied Elective Courses offered to other Departments

Offered by EEE Department
V Semester
SL. COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
NO. CODE
1. 15EEA01 Industrial Instrumentation 3 0 0 3
2. 15EEA02 Illumination Engineering 3 0 0 3
3. 15EEA03 Switched Mode Power Converters 3 0 0 3
4. 15EEA04 Power Plant Instrumentation and Control 3 0 0 3
5. 15EEA05 Electrical Machines and Drives 3 0 0 3
VI Semester
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15EEA06 Real Time Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3
2. 15EEA07 Fundamentals of Electric Power Utilization 3 0 0 3
3. 15EEA08 Soft Computing Techniques and Applications 3 0 0 3
4. 15EEA09 Fundamentals of Power Quality 3 0 0 3
5. 15EEA10 Wiring, Estimation and Costing 3 0 0 3
24
Offered by ECE Department
V SEMESTER
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

1. 15ECA01 Communication Systems 3 0 0 3
2. 15ECA02 Microprocessors and Applications 3 0 0 3
3. 15ECA03 MATLAB Programming 2 0 2 3
4. 15ECA04 Antenna Fundamentals 3 0 0 3
5. 15ECA05 Television Engineering 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

1. 15ECA06 Remote Sensing Techniques 3 0 0 3
2. 15ECA07 Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3
3. 15ECA08 Optical Communication 3 0 0 3
4. 15ECA09 Mobile Communication 3 0 0 3
5. 15ECA10 Very Large Scale Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3
Offered by CSE Department
V SEMESTER
SL COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15CSA01 Internet Programming 3 0 0 3
2. 15CSA02 Fundamentals of Software Engineering 3 0 0 3
3. 15CSA03 Introduction to Database 3 0 0 3
4. 15CSA04 Introduction to Data Structures and Algorithms 3 0 0 3
5. 15CSA05 Fundamentals of Operating Systems 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
SL COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15CSA06 Fundamentals of Cloud Computing 3 0 0 3
2. 15CSA07 Principles of Multimedia 3 0 0 3
3. 15CSA08 Introduction to Genetic Algorithms 3 0 0 3
4. 15CSA09 XML Programming 3 0 0 3
5. 15CSA10 Introduction to UML 3 0 0 3
6. 15CSA11 Introduction to Computer Organization 3 0 0 3
Offered by Mechanical Department

V SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
THEORY
1. 15MEA01 Automotive Maintenance and Pollution Control 3 0 0 3
2. 15MEA02 Fundamentals of Energy Resources 3 0 0 3
3. 15MEA03 Manufacturing for Industrial Electronics 3 0 0 3
25
4. 15MEA04 Human Factors in Engineering 3 0 0 3
5. 15MEA05 Decision Support Systems 3 0 0 3
6. 15MEA06 Engineering Economics and Cost Analysis 3 0 0 3
7. 15MEA07 Nano Technology 3 0 0 3
8. 15MEA08 Fuel Cell & Hydrogen Energy 3 0 0 3
9. 15MEA09 Bio-Mechanics and human body vibration 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
THEORY
1. 15MEA10 Fundamentals of Thermal Science 3 0 0 3
2. 15MEA11 Fundamentals of Lithography 3 0 0 3
3. 15MEA12 Fundamentals of Fire Safety Engineering 3 0 0 3
4. 15MEA13 High Energetic material - Propellants 3 0 0 3
5. 15MEA14 Direct Digital Manufacturing 3 0 0 3
6. 15MEA15 Instrumental Analysis of Materials 3 0 0 3
7. 15MEA16 Basics of Aircraft and Space Technology 3 0 0 3
8. 15MEA17 Introduction to MATLAB with Engineering Applications 3 0 0 3
9. 15MEA18 Micro and Nano Fabrication 3 0 0 3
10. 15MEA19 Fundamentals of Nature Inspired Algorithms 3 0 0 3
11. 15MEA20 Energy Efficient Buildings 3 0 0 3
12. 15MEA21 Water Treatment Technology 3 0 0 3
Offered by IT Department
V SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15ITA01 Introduction to Computer Graphics 3 0 0 3
2. 15ITA02 Rich Internet Application 3 0 0 3
3. 15ITA03 Introduction to Java 3 0 0 3
4. 15ITA04 Perl 3 0 0 3
5. 15ITA05 Fuzzy Systems 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15ITA06 Graphics Programming 3 0 0 3
2. 15ITA07 PHP Programming 3 0 0 3
3. 15ITA08 Android Application Development 3 0 0 3
4. 15ITA09 Python Programming 3 0 0 3
5. 15ITA10 Decision Making Methods 3 0 0 3
Offered by Bio-Tech Department
V SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15BTA01 Basic Cell and Molecular Biology 3 0 0 3
2. 15BTA02 Basic Microbiology 3 0 0 3
3. 15BTA03 Basic Biochemistry 3 0 0 3
4. 15BTA04 Basic immunology 3 0 0 3
26
VI SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15BTA05 Chemicals in Environment and Public Health 3 0 0 3
2. 15BTA06 Biological Waste Management 3 0 0 3
3. 15BTA07 Nanobiotechnology 3 0 0 3
4. 15BTA08 Human Physiology 3 0 0 3
Offered by MBA Department
VI SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15BAA01 Essentials of Finance 3 0 0 3
2. 15BAA02 Essentials of Marketing 3 0 0 3
3. 15BAA03 Essentials of Human Resource Management 3 0 0 3
27
I Semester
15HS101 Technical English – I LT P C

(Common to all UG Programmes)
3 02 4
Course Objectives are to:
 enable the students of Engineering and Technology build up vocabulary
 improve grammatical accuracy
 develop language functions
 understand the basic nuances of language
Course Outcomes:
 The students of Engineering and Technology will be able to build up their vocabulary
 Grammatical accuracy will be improved
 Language functions will be developed
 The basic nuances of language will be understood
UNIT I 12
Listening–Importance of listening- Types of listening - Listening to audio files and understanding the concept;
Speaking -Speaking about one’s place, important festivals etc. – Introducing oneself, one’s family / friend; Asking
for Information; Reading - Skimming and Scanning - Note-making - Reading comprehension exercises; Writing -
Free writing on any given topic (My favourite place / Hobbies / School life, etc.) - Sentence completion-
Autobiographical writing (writing about one’s leisure time activities, hometown, etc.) - Creative Writing;
Grammar–Parts of Speech- Kinds of Sentences- Framing questions; Vocabulary -Word formation - Word
expansion
UNIT II 12
Listening - Listening and responding to video lectures / talks; Listening exercises with sample telephone
conversations; Speaking - Describing a simple process (filling a form, etc.) - Asking & answering questions on
various everyday activities: Telephone skills – Telephone etiquette. Reading – Critical reading - Finding key
information in a given text and paraphrasing - Sifting facts from opinions; Value Based Text Reading and
thematic analysis. Writing: Informal letter – Letter to the editor (Regarding Social Issues) - Single line Definitions
– Recommendations- Paragraph Writing; (cause & effect / compare & contrast / narrative / analytical)
Grammar– tense - Use of sequence words - Adverbs -; Vocabulary –prefixes and Suffixes -Compound words.
UNIT III 12
Listening - Listening to specific task - focused audio tracks - Listening to different accents - Watching videos /
documentaries and responding to questions based on them and giving personal opinion.
Speaking - Speaking in formal situations (teachers, officials, foreigners); Role-play and Simulation
Reading - Reading and interpreting data given as visual material. Writing– Coherence and cohesion in writing- -
Channel conversion -Process descriptions – interpretations of Pictures of flow charts, graphs, pie charts and
tables - Essay writing – Different types of essays. Grammar– Articles - Connective adverbs – Subject-verb
agreement-; Vocabulary – Same word in a different parts of speech & Word Association
UNIT IV 12
Listening - Excerpts from films focusing on theme and follow up exercises - film scenes; Speaking - Responding
28
to questions - Giving impromptu talks, Making presentations on given topics- Group interaction; Reading -
Making inference from the reading passage - Predicting the content of a reading passage; Jumbled sentences;
Writing - Business Letters- Sales and Credit letters; Letter of Enquiry; Letter of Quotation, Order, Claim and
Adjustment Letters. Grammar – Preposition – future time reference; Vocabulary - Single word substitutes - Use
of abbreviations & acronyms.
UNIT V 12
Listening - Listening to Speeches/Presentations, Listening to broadcast & telecast from Radio & TV; Sample
interview; Speaking; Different forms of interviews - Speaking at different types of interview; Reading - Email
communication - Reading the attachment files having a poem/joke/proverb - Sending their responses through
email Writing; Writing: invititation letter, accepting, declining letter and permission letter, Creative writing,
Poster making, Interpreting posters; Grammar –Editing-Direct and indirect speech; Vocabulary - Lexical items
(fixed / semi fixed expressions).
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dept. of English, Anna University, Chennai. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and Engineers.
Orient Black Swan, Chennai. 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for Engineers.
Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2011.
2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and communication skills for students of science and Engineering.
Orient Black Swan publications, Chennai, 2011.
3. Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company limited,
New Delhi, 2007.
4. Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. Pearson Edition
(II Edition), New Delhi, 2001.
Extensive reading:
1. Kalam, Abdul. The Wings of Fire, Universities Press, Hyderabad. 1999.
15BS101 MATHEMATICS I LT P C
3 20 4
 To know the matrix algebra techniques needed by engineers for practical applications
 To make the student knowledgeable in the area of infinite series and their convergence so that he/ she
will be familiar with limitations of using infinite series approximations for solutions arising in
mathematical modeling
 To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in engineering problems
 To introduce the concepts of improper integrals, Gamma, Beta functions which are needed in
engineering problems
 To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and their usage
29
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students are able to
 Expertise matrix algebra
 Apply tests of convergence
 Understand and apply functions of several variables
 Evaluate integrals using Beta and Gamma functions
 Expertise multiple integrals and their usage
UNIT 0 (Not for Examination) 5+ 0
Basic concepts on limits, continuity, derivative & integrals of a single variable
UNIT I MATRICES 9+3
Characteristic equation - Eigen values and Eigenvectors of a real matrix– Properties of eigen values and
eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton Theorem – Diagonalization of matrices – Reduction of a quadratic form to
canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic forms
UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3
Partial derivatives –Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem-Total derivative – Differentiation of implicit
functions-Change of variables - Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for
functions of two variables – Errors and approximations - Maxima and minima of functions of two variables –
Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers
UNIT III INFINITE SERIES 9+3
Sequences – Convergence of series – General properties – Series of positive terms – Tests for convergence:
Comparison test, Integral test, Comparison of ratios and D’Alembert’s ratio test (Proofs excluded) – Alternating
series – Series of positive and negative terms – Absolute and conditional convergence – Power Series –
Convergence of exponential, logarithmic and Binomial Series
UNIT IV IMPROPER INTEGRALS 9+3
Improper integrals of the first and second kind and their convergence – Evaluation of integrals involving one
parameter by Leibnitz rule – Beta and Gamma functions – Properties – Evaluation of integrals using Beta and
Gamma functions – Error functions
UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3
Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area enclosed by
plane curves – Triple integrals– Triple integrals in cylindrical and spherical coordinates – Volume of Solids
L= 45 hours T = 15 hours Total = 60 hours
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43
Edition, 2013
2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons (ASIA) Pvt. Ltd, Singapore,
th
9 Edition, 2013
30
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,
th
4 Edition, 2014
nd
2. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2 Edition,
th
11 Reprint, 2013
th
3. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 7
Edition, 2012
rd
4. Monty J. Strauss, Gerald L. Bradley, Karl J. Smith, “Calculus”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3
Edition 2007 (For Unit 0-Section 2.1,2.3,3.1,5.2, Unit – 2,3,5)
5. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
th
Company, New Delhi, 11 Reprint, 2010
15BS102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LTPC

3003
Course Objective
 To impart sound knowledge about basic concepts of physics.
 To introduce the basic physics concepts relevant to different branches of Engineering and Technology
 To introduce the fundamentals of physics and its applications in engineering.
Course Outcomes:
 The students are able to understand the elastic properties of the materials.
 The students will acquire knowledge about solid state physics.
 The students will acquire knowledge about the basic concepts of physics in the topics such as
acoustics, ultrasonics, thermal physics, and applied optics.
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9
Elasticity - Poisson’s ratio and relationship between moduli (qualitative) - Stress-strain diagram and its uses-
factors affecting tensile strength - bending of beams - cantilever - bending moment - theory and experiment of
Young’s modulus determination - Uniform and non-uniform bending - I shaped girders - twisting couple - hollow
cylinder - shaft - torsion pendulum - determination of rigidity modulus- moment of inertia of a body (regular and
irregular).
UNIT II ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 9
Classification of sound - loudness and intensity - Weber-Fechner Law - standard intensity and intensity level -
decibel - reverberation - reverberation time - rate of growth and decay of sound intensity - derivation of Sabine’s
formula - absorption coefficient and its determination – factors affecting acoustics of buildings : focusing,
interference, echo, Echelon effect, resonance - noise and their remedies. Ultrasonics - production -
magnetostriction and piezoelectric methods - detection of ultrasound - acoustic grating - industrial applications -
NDT – Ultrasonic method: scan modes and practice.
UNIT III THERMAL PHYSICS 9
Thermal expansion - thermal stress - expansion joints - bimetallic strips - thermal conductivity- conductions in
solids - Forbe’s and Lees’ disc methods - Rectilinear flow of heat through a rod -flow of heat through a
compound media - radial flow of heat – thermal insulation of buildings – Laws of blackbody radiation: Kirchhoff’s
law, Stephens law, Wien’s law, Raleigh-Jean’s law and Planck’s law (derivation). Laws of thermodynamics -
Otto and diesel engines and their efficiency - entropy - entropy of Carnot’s cycle - reverse Carnot’s cycle -
refrigerator.
31
UNIT IV APPLIED OPTICS 9
Interference - Michelson interferometer: construction, working, determination of wave length and thickness - anti-
reflection coating - air wedge and its application - Lasers - Einstein’s coefficients - CO2, Nd:YAG and
semiconductor lasers - homojunction and heterojunction -construction and working - applications - Optical fibers -
classification (index & mode based) - principle and propagation of light in optical fibers - acceptance angle and
numerical aperture - fiber optic communication system - active and passive sensors.
UNIT V SOLID STATE PHYSICS 9
Growth of single crystals-Czochralski method and Bridgeman-Stockbarger method - unit cell, crystal systems,
Bravais space lattices - crystal planes and directions, Miller indices - expressions for interplanar distance -
coordination number and packing factor for simple structures: SC, BCC, FCC and HCP - structure and
significance of NaCl, ZnS, diamond and graphite - crystal imperfections: point defects, dislocations and stacking
faults.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Marikani A, Engineering Physics, PHI, New Delhi, 2013.

2. Gaur R.K., and Gupta, S.L., Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Raj Publications, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sankar, B.N., Pillai.S.O., Engineering Physics, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2009.
2. Palanisamy, P.K., Engineering Physics, Scitech Publications (P) Ltd, 2009.
3. Arumugam, M., Engineering Physics, Anuradha Publications, 2000.
4. John W. Jewett. Jr, and Raymon A. Serway, Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics –
Seventh Edition, Cengage Learnings, Delhi, India, 2013.
5. David Halliday, Robert Resnick and Jearl Walker, Fundamentals of Physics, sixth edition, John Wiley and
Sons, New Delhi, 2010.
15BS103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LTPC

(Common to all UG Programmes) 3003
Course Objective
The student should be familiar with
 The treatment of water for potable and industrial purposes.
 The principles of electrochemistry, electrochemical cells, emf and applications of emf measurements.
 The principles of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.
 Different materials and their engineering applications.
 Different types of fuels and combustion.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the student will be able to
 Understand the basic principles of water quality parameters, their analysis and various water treatment
processes for domestic and industrial applications.
32
 Understand the basic principles of electrochemistry and its applications.
 Know the principles, various types of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.
 Have a sound knowledge on various engineering materials and their industrial applications.
 Have a sound knowledge on different types of fuels.
UNIT I WATER TECHNOLOGY 9
Characteristics of water – alkalinity – types of alkalinity and determination – hardness – types of hardness and
estimation by EDTA method (problems on calculation of hardness only); Boiler feed water – requirements –
disadvantages of using hard water in boilers – priming and foaming – scales and sludges – caustic embrittlement
– boiler corrosion – external conditioning (demineralization process) – internal conditioning (colloidal, phosphate,
carbonate and calgon conditionings) – Domestic water treatment – disinfection methods (Chlorination,
Ozonation, UV treatment) – break point chlorination – salinity – desalination by reverse osmosis.
UNIT II ELECTROCHEMISTRY 9
Electrochemical cells – reversible and irreversible cells – EMF – measurement of emf – Single electrode potential
– Nernst equation (problems) – reference electrodes – Standard Hydrogen electrode – Calomel electrode – Ion
selective electrode – glass electrode and measurement of pH – Standard Cell – electrochemical series –
significance – potentiometric redox titration – conductometric titrations (Strong acid Vs Strong base and Weak
acid Vs Strong base)
UNIT III CORROSION AND ITS CONTROL 9
Chemical corrosion – Pilling-Bedworth rule – electrochemical corrosion – differential aeration corrosion – factors
influencing corrosion – different types – galvanic corrosion – erosion corrosion – pitting corrosion – crevice
corrosion – waterline corrosion – stress corrosion – corrosion control – sacrificial anode and impressed current
cathodic methods – corrosion inhibitors – Protective coatings – metallic coating – pretreatment of surface –
hotdipping – spraying – cladding – cementation – electroplating (Cr, Cu, Ni and Au) – electrolessplating
(electroless nickel plating only).
UNIT IV ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
Refractories – classification – acidic, basic and neutral refractories – properties (refractoriness, refractoriness
under load, dimensional stability, porosity, thermal spalling) – manufacture of alumina, magnesite and zirconia
bricks.
Lubricants – mechanism of lubrication, liquid lubricants – properties (viscosity index, flash and fire points, cloud
and pour points, oiliness) – solid lubricants – graphite and molybdenum disulphide – semi solid lubricants and
emulsions.
Nanomaterials – introduction to nano chemistry – carbon nanotubes and their applications.
UNIT V FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuels – Classification – Calorific value (Problems using Dulong’s formula) – Coal – proximate and ultimate
analysis – Hydrogenation of coal – Petroleum – processing and fractions – cracking – catalytic cracking and
methods – knocking – octane number and cetane number – synthetic petrol – Fischer-Tropsch and Bergius
processes – Gaseous fuels – Natural gas, CNG and LPG – Flue gas analysis – Orsat apparatus – Combustion –
theoretical calculation of air (Problems on calculation of weight of air only).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. P.C. Jain and Monika Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.(P) Ltd., 16 Edition, New
Delhi (2013).
2. S.S.Dara, A text book of engineering chemistry, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi (2010).
33
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company (P) Ltd., New Delhi
(2009).
2. B. K. Sharma, Engineering chemistry, Krishna Prakasan Media (P) Ltd., Meerut (2006).
3. B. Sivasankar, Engineering Chemistry, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi (2008).
15GE101 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LTPC

(Common to all UG Programmes) 30 03
Course Objectives:
 To gain knowledge on problem solving techniques
 To learn how to write modular and readable C programs
 To understand the usage of arrays and strings
 To learn to use pointers to access and manipulate memory
 To exploit the notion of derived data types and files
Course Outcomes:
 Solve problems using sound techniques
 Develop modular C programs for a given problem
 Store and manipulate homogeneous data using arrays and strings
 Write programs that uses memory based on the run time needs
 Store and manipulate heterogeneous data using structures
 Write programs that manipulate data stored on permanent storage
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF C 9
Basic Organization of a Computer - Problem Solving Techniques: Introduction to Algorithm, Pseudo code, Flow
Chart.
Structure of ‘C’ program, compilation and linking processes - C Tokens: Keywords, Data Types, Constants,
Variables - Declaration - Qualifiers - typedef - Enumeration - Pre-processor directives (#include, #define)
UNIT II BASIC CONSTRUCTS IN C 9
Managing simple Input and Output operations - Operators and Expressions - Decision Making: Branching
statements, Looping statements - Function: Declaration, Definition - Recursion - Storage classes
UNIT III ARRAYS AND STRINGS IN C 8
Arrays: Initialization - One dimensional, Two dimensional, and Multi-dimensional arrays - String: String
operations, Manipulating Strings - Pre-processor directives (#if, #else, #elif, #ifdef, #ifndef)
UNIT IV POINTERS IN C 10
Pointers - Parameter passing mechanism in functions - Dynamic Memory Allocation - Pointer arithmetic -
Pointers and one dimensional array - Pointers and Multi-Dimensional Array: Array of Pointers, Pointer to Pointer,
Pointer to an array - void Pointer - Pointer to function - Command Line Arguments
34
UNIT V STRUCTURES, UNIONS AND FILE HANDLING IN C 9
Structure: Declaration, Definition-Array of Structures - Pointer to Structure - Structure within a Structure - Bit
fields in Structure - Union - Files: File Management functions, Working with Text Files and Binary Files
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2009
2. Byron S Gottfried, “Programming with C, Schaum’s Outlines”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010
reprint.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson

Education, 2006 reprint.
2. R.G. Dromey, “How to Solve it by Computer”, Pearson Education, 2008
3. Al Kelley, Ira Pohl, “A Book on C : Programming in C”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2008 reprint
4. Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, “C How to Program”, Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall of India, 2009 reprint.
5. Ashok N. Kamthane, “Computer programming”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.
6. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, Thirteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm
2. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html
3. http://www.w3schools.in/c
4. http://fresh2refresh.com/c-tutorial-for-beginners
ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C
15GE102
(Common to all UG Programmes) 2 0 4 4
Course Objectives:
 To gain knowledge on the basics of Engineering Drawing construction procedures.
 To understand the principles involved in graphic skill for communication of concepts, ideas and design of
Engineering products.
 To draw the drawing of various solids.
 To expose the above to existing national standards related to technical drawings.
 An ability to draw the drawing for any given object to the required standard.
Course Outcomes:
 Sketch multiple views of Engineering components
 Create the projection of point, straight line and plane
 Project the solid objects
 Section the solid
 Develop lateral surfaces of solids
 Apply isometric and perspective projections
35
Concepts and Conventions (Not For Examination) 5
Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specifications – Lettering and Dimensioning-Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets.
UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND PICTORIAL VIEWS TO ORTHOGRAPHIC 14
VIEWS
Geometrical Constructions like bisection of a straight line, division of a straight line into n equal parts, bisection
of angles, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by
eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – Construction of involutes of square and circle – Drawing of
tangents and normal to the above curves.
Orthographic projection – Principles – Principal planes- Representation of Three Dimensional objects – Layout
of views– Sketching of multiple views (Front, Top and Side views) from pictorial views of simple objects and
Engineering Components.
UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACES 14
First Angle projection–Projection of points in four quadrants. Projection of straight lines (only First angle
projection) inclined to both the principal planes – Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating
line method and traces.
Projection of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by change of position
method.
UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 14
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one of the
principal planes by change of position method. Projection of simple solids when the axis inclined to both planes.
UNIT IV SECTION OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF LATERAL 14
SURFACES OF SOLIDS
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one of the principal
planes and perpendicular to the other – Obtaining true shape of the section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple solids – Prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones. Development of
lateral surfaces of sectioned solids and simple applications like funnel.
UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 14
Principles of isometric projection – Isometric scale –Isometric View– Isometric projections of simple solids and
cut solids – Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones– Combination of two solid objects in simple vertical positions.
Perspective projection of simple solids–Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual ray method.
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
th
1. N.D. Bhatt, “Engineering Drawing” Charotar Publishing House, 50 Edition, (2010).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore, 2007.
2. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy Edition,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
3. Shah M.B. and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.
4. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P) Limited, 2008.
5. Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2009.
6. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
36
sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.
6.
Special points applicable to End Semester Examinations on Engineering Graphics:

1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be permitted
to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day
15BS151 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T PC

0 0 4 2
(Classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Chemistry)
Course Objectives:
 To have a study on determination of Rigidity modulus and Young’s modulus
 To be familiar with findings thickness of a thin paper
 To deal with the determination of Ultrasonic velocity
 To have a study on estimation of hardness and alkalinity of water
 To deal with Conductometric titration and Potentiometric titration
Course Outcomes:
 Find the moment of inertia of disc and Rigidity modulus of wire
 Determine thickness of a thin sheet of paper
 Find the specific resistance of wire
 Estimate hardness and Alkalinity of water sample
 Do Conductometric titration and Potentiometric titration
 Find corrosion rate
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any FIVE Experiments)
1. Torsional pendulum – Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of disc.
2. Non-uniform pending- Young’s modulus determination
3. Air-wedge- Determination of thickness of a thin sheet of paper
4. Spectrometer- Determination of wavelength of Hg spectrum using grating
5. Lee’s disc-Determination of thermal conductivity of bad conductor
6. Determination of ultrasonic velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic
interferometer.
7. Carey Foster Bridge- Determination of specific resistance of the given coil of wire.
37
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Physics Laboratory Manual, Department of Physics, Mepco Schlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR CHEMISTRY LABORATORY (Any FIVE Experiments)

1. Estimation of hardness of water by EDTA method
2. Estimation of alkalinity of water sample
3. pH-metric titration (acid & base)
4. Conductometric titration (strong acid Vs strong base)
5. Conductometric titration (mixture of acids Vs Strong base)
6. Potentiometric titration between ferrous ion and potassium dichromate
7. Determination of corrosion rate by weight loss method
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. J. Mendham, R.C. Denney, J. D. Barnes, M.J.K. Thomas, Vogel's Quantitative Chemical Analysis,
Prentice Hall, India, 2000.
2. D.P. Shoemaker and C.W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, McGraw Hill, London, 2001.
COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T PC

15GE151
(Common to all UG Programmes) 0 0 4 2
Course Objectives:
 To develop C programs using conditional and looping statements
 To understand the principles of arrays and strings
 To learn to access memory using pointers
 To group different kinds of information related to a single entity
 To understand the manipulation of data in permanent storage

Course Outcomes:
 Implement programs using control statements
 Write programs using arrays and strings
 Access data in memory using pointers
 Use structures to manipulate heterogeneous data
 Manipulate data stored on permanent storage

SYLLABUS FOR THE LABORATORY:
1. Study of simple Document Processing & Presentation Preparation
2. Study of basic OS commands, Software Engineering Practices -2 sessions (Not for End
Examination)
3. Programs using simple statements
4. Programs using decision making statements
5. Programs using looping statements
6. Programs using user defined functions and recursive functions
7. Programs using one dimensional and two dimensional arrays
38
8. Solving problems using string functions
9. Programs using pointers and dynamic memory allocation
10. Programs using structures and unions
11. Programs using pointers to structures and other data types
12. Programs using text files
13. Programs using binary files

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2009
2. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2006 reprint.
3. Byron S Gottfried, “Programming with C”, Schaum’s Outlines, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010
reprint.
4. Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, “C How to Program”, Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall of India,2009
5. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, Thirteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm
2. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html
3. http://www.w3schools.in/c
4. http://fresh2refresh.com/c-tutorial-for-beginners
15GE152 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY LTPC

0042
Course Objectives:
 To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering practices in
Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
 To have a study and hands-on-exercise on plumbing and carpentry components.
 To have a practice on gas welding, foundry operations and fitting
 To have a study on measurement of electical quantities, energy and resistance to earth.
 To have a practice on soldering
Course Outcomes:
 Do pipe connections with different joining components.
 Create joints for roofs, doors, windows and furniture
 Prepare square fitting and vee fitting models
 Do residential house wiring
39
 Measure energy and resistance to earth of an electrical equipment
 Apply soldering
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 9
Buildings:
Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings, Safety aspects.
Plumbing Works:
1. Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions, reducers, and elbows
in household fittings.
2. Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
3. Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
4. Hands-on-exercise: Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with
different joining components.
5. Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
6.
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
1. Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.

2. Hands-on-exercise: Wood work, joints by sawing, planning and cutting.
II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
Welding:
Preparation of arc welding of butt joints, lap joints and tee joints.
Basic Machining:
1. Simple Turning, Step turning
2. Drilling Practice using drilling machine.
Sheet Metal Work:
1. Forming & Bending:
2. Model making – Trays, funnels, etc.
3. Different type of joints.
Machine assembly practice:
1. Study of centrifugal pump
2. Study of air conditioner
Demonstration on:
1. Gas welding practice
2. Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –Exercise – Production of
40
hexagonal headed bolt.
3. Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
4. Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and vee – fitting models.
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS)
III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 10
1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3. Stair case wiring
4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding measurement of AC signal
parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CRO.
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EXOR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose PCB.
5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. K.Jeyachandran, S.Natarajan & S, Balasubramanian, “A Primer on Engineering Practices Laboratory”,

Anuradha Publications, (2007).
2. T.Jeyapoovan, M.Saravanapandian & S.Pranitha, “Engineering Practices Lab Manual”, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd, (2006)
3. H.S. Bawa, “Workshop Practice”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Limited, (2007).
4. A.Rajendra Prasad & P.M.M.S. Sarma, “Workshop Practice”, Sree Sai Publication, (2002).
5. P.Kannaiah & K.L.Narayana, “Manual on Workshop Practice”, Scitech Publications, (1999).
SEMESTER EXAMINATION PATTERN
The Laboratory examination is to be conducted for Group A & Group B, allotting 90 minutes for each group, with
a break of 15 minutes. Both the examinations are to be taken together in sequence, either in the FN session or in
the AN session. The maximum marks for Group A and Group B lab examinations will be 50 each, totaling 100 for
the Lab course. The candidates shall answer either I or II under Group A and either III or IV under Group B,
based on lots.
41
List of equipment and components
(For a Batch of 30 Students)
CIVIL ENGINEERING
1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes, plastic pipes, 15 Sets.
flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and other fittings.
2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each
5. Power Tools:
(a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos.
(b) Demolition Hammer 2 Nos.
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos.
(d) Planer 2 Nos.
(e) Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos.
(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer, wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other welding outfit. 2 Nos.
5. Centre lathe 10 Nos.
6. Drilling machine 2 Nos.
7. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets
8. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets
9. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos.
10. . Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner 1 each.
ELECTRICAL
1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 10 Sets
2. Electrical measuring instruments 15 Sets.
3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each
4. Megger (250V/500V). 1 No.
5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos.
(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos.
ELECTRONICS
1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power supply 2 Nos.
42
II Semester
15HS201 Technical English –II LTPC

300 3
 make the students of Engineering and Technology enhance their communicative skills
 strengthen LSRW skills
 boost up creative and critical thinking
 master the skills of writing
 face the challenges of the competitive world
Course Outcomes:
 The students of Engineering and Technology will be able to enhance LSRW skills
 Their creative and critical thinking will be enriched
 The students will be able to face the challenges of the competitive world
UNIT I 15
Listening - Listening to informal conversations and participating; Listening to different types of conversation and
answering questions. Speaking - Opening a conversation (greetings, comments on topics like weather) - Turn
taking - Closing a conversation (excuses, general wish, positive comment, and thanks); narrating personal
experience. Reading - Developing analytical skills, Deductive and inductive reasoning - intensive reading.
Writing - Biography Writing- Effective use of SMS for sending short notes and messages - Using ‘emoticons’ as
symbols in messages - e-mail/blogs - Posting reviews in blogs. Grammar – Regular and irregular verbs - Modal
verbs - Purpose expressions. Vocabulary – Match the Synonyms- Homonyms and Homophones.
UNIT II 7
Listening - Listening to situation based dialogues - Conversations between great leaders and celebrities.
Speaking - Conversation practice in real life situations, asking for directions (using polite expressions), giving
directions (using imperative sentences), Purchasing goods from a shop, Discussing various aspects of a film
(they have already seen) or a book (they have already read); Dialogues (Fill up exercises), Recording students’
dialogues. Reading - Reading a short story or an article from newspaper, Critical reading, Comprehension skills;
Extensive reading activity (reading stories / novels); Writing - Writing a review / summary of a story /article -
Product Description -Dialogue Writing- memos and circulars. Grammar - Use of clauses - Conditional clauses -
Phrasal verbs and their meanings, Using phrasal verbs in sentences– Conjunctions. Vocabulary :
Descriptive words & phrases,
UNIT III 6
Listening - Listening to the conversation with various accents/dialects - Understanding the structure of
conversations. Speaking -Conversation skills with a sense of stress, intonation, pronunciation and meaning –
Seeking information – expressing feelings (affection, anger, regret, etc.). Reading - Speed reading – reading
passages with time limit - Skimming; Writing - Minutes of meeting – format and practice in the preparation of
minutes - Writing summary after reading articles from journals - Giving instructions Grammar - Reported speech
- Active and passive voice - American and British English.
Vocabulary - Words used as nouns and verbs without any change in the Spelling.
43
UNIT IV 7
Listening - Listening to a telephone conversation, Viewing model interviews (face-to-face, telephonic

and video conferencing); Speaking - Role play practice in telephone skills - listening and responding - asking
questions, -note taking – passing on messages, Role play and mock interview for grasping interview skills;
Telephonic interview – recording the responses. Reading - Reading the job advertisements and the profile of the
company concerned. Writing - Applying for a job – cover letter - résumé preparation – vision, mission and goals
of the candidate; e-résumé writing. Writing Advertisements for a Product. Grammar - Numerical expressions -
discourse markers -Adjectives and comparative Adjectives. Vocabulary -Idioms and their meanings – Using
idioms in sentences - Phrases used for Advertisements
UNIT V 10
Listening - Viewing a model debate and reviewing the performance of each participant - Identifying the
characteristics of a good listener; Sample Debate Speaking - Group communication skills –assertiveness in
expressing opinions – mind mapping technique; Reading - making notes from books, Newspaper or any form of
written materials. Writing – Itinerary - Checklist - report writing – recommendations / suggestions – interpretation
of data (using charts for effective presentation) - Note making skills. Grammar–Infinitives and Gerunds - Cause
and effect expressions. Vocabulary – Collocation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dept. of English, Anna University, Chennai. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and Engineers.
Orient Black Swan, Chennai. 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for Engineers.
Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2011.
2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and communication skills for students of science and Engineering.
Orient Black Swan publications, Chennai, 2011.
3. Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company limited,
New Delhi, 2007.
4. Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. Pearson Edition
(II Edition), New Delhi, 2001.
Extensive reading:
1. Wells, H.G. The Time machine, Peacock, India, 2008.

15BS201 MATHEMATICS II LTPC
320 4
 To make the student acquire sound knowledge of techniques in solving ordinary differential equations
obtained from engineering problems
 To acquaint the student with the concepts of vector calculus that is needed for problems in engineering
disciplines
 To know the standard techniques of complex variable theory so as to enable the student to apply them
with confidence, in application areas such as heat conduction, elasticity, fluid dynamics and flow of the
electric current
44
 To make the student for appreciating the purpose of using transforms to create a new domain in which it
is earlier to handle the problem that is being investigated.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students are able to
 Apply different techniques to solve ordinary differential equations
 Solve engineering problems using vector calculus
 Use complex variable theory for applications like heat conduction, fluid dynamics etc.
 Transform given problem to a new domain for solving it efficiently
UNIT 0 (Not for Examinations) 5+0
Reviews of integration concepts
UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Method of variation of parameters –Method of undetermined coefficients – Homogeneous equation of Euler’s

and Legendre’s type – System of Simultaneous first order linear equations with constant coefficients
UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 9+3
Gradient and Directional derivative – Divergence and Curl – Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields – Line
integral over a plane curve – Surface integral and Volume integral– Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stokes’
theorems (excluding proofs) – Verification and application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals
UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 9+3
Analytic functions – Necessary and Sufficient conditions for analyticity – properties – Harmonic conjugates –
Construction of analytic functions – Conformal mapping – Mapping by functions w= z+c, cz, 1/z, z+1/z, and
- Bilinear transformation.
UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 9+3
Line integral – Cauchy’s theorem and integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series – Singularities – Residues
– Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and
semi-circular contour with no pole on real axis
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORM 9+3
Laplace transform – Transforms of elementary functions – Basic properties – Transform of derivatives and
integrals – Transform of periodic functions - Initial and Final value theorems – Inverse Transforms – Convolution
theorem –Application to solution of linear ODE with constant coefficients
TOTAL: 65 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”,, Khanna Publications, New Delhi, 43 edition (2013)
th
2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons Pvt. Ltd, Singapore, 9
Edition, 2006, (Reprint 2013)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,
45
th
4 Edition, 2014
nd
2. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2 Edition,
th
11 Reprint, 2013
th
3. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 7
Edition, 2012
rd
4. Monty J. Strauss, Gerald L. Bradley, Karl J. Smith, “Calculus”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3
Edition 2007 (For Unit 0-Section 5.2, Unit – 1,2)
5. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi,
th
11 Reprint, 2010
15BS202 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT LTPC

(Common to all UG Programme)
300 3
Course Objectives:
The student is expected to understand
 What constitutes the environment, what are precious resources in the environment, how to conserve
these resources, what is the role of a human being in maintaining a clean environment and useful
environment for the future generations and how to maintain ecological balance and preserve
bio-diversity.
 The role of government and non-government organizations in environment management.
 About Disaster and its management.
Course Outcomes:
 Understand the basic concepts of environment studies and natural resources.
 Get the thorough knowledge about ecosystem and biodiversity.
 Have an elaborate knowledge about causes, effects and control measures of various types of pollution.
 Understand the social issues and various environmental acts.
 Get the knowledge about types of disaster and mitigation measures.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND NATURAL 9

RESOURCES
Definition, scope and importance – Need for public awareness – Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation,
deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction, mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people –
Water resources: Use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water,
dams – benefits and problems – Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and
using mineral resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture
and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer, pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case studies
– Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources, use of alternate
energy sources. Case studies – Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of
resources for sustainable lifestyles
UNIT II ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 10

Concept of an ecosystem – Structure and function of an ecosystem – Producers, consumers and decomposers –
Energy flow in the ecosystem (single channel energy flow model) – Concept of nutrient cycling (Nitrogen cycle) –
Ecological succession – Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids – Introduction to Biodiversity –
46
Definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity – Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use,
social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, National and local levels – India as a mega-
diversity nation – Hot-spots of biodiversity – Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife
conflicts – Endangered and endemic species of India – Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ
conservation of biodiversity.
UNIT III ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND SOCIAL ISSUES 12
Definition – Causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Marine pollution (d)
Noise pollution (e) Nuclear hazards – Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban
and industrial wastes – Role of an individual in prevention of pollution.
Unsustainable and Sustainable development – Unsustainable practices – Issues – possible solutions – Water
conservation, rain water harvesting – Environmental ethics –Acts for Prevention of Environmental Pollution –
Wildlife Protection Act – Forest Conservation Act - Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act – Air
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act – Environment Protection Act – Issues involved in enforcement of
environmental legislation – Public awareness.
UNIT IV DISASTER AND ITS IMPACTS 7
Definition of Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Risk – Types – Natural disasters (earthquake, landslides, flood,
cyclones, tsunami and drought) – Manmade disasters (Chemical, nuclear and biological) Disaster impacts
(environmental, physical, social, ecological and economical) – Case studies.
UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT 7
Need and concept of Disaster management – Disaster Management cycle – Prevention, mitigation,
preparedness, relief, recovery – Post–disaster environmental response (water, sanitation, food safety, waste
management, disease control) – Role and responsibilities of government, community, local institutions and
NGOs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gilbert M. Masters and Wendell P. Ela, Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science,
Pearson Education Pvt., Ltd., Third Edition, 2014.
2. Miller T.G. Jr, Environmental Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co.
3. Townsend C., Harper J., and Michael Begon, Essentials of Ecology, Blackwell Science, Third Edition.
4. Trivedi R.K. and P.K. Goel, Introduction to Air Pollution, Techno-Science Publications.
5. Anubha Kaushik and Kaushik C.P., Environmental Science and Engineering, New Age International
(P) Ltd, Fourth Edition, ISBN: 978-81-224-3647-1, 2014.
6. Mukesh Dhunna., 2009, Disaster Management, Vayu Education of India, New Delhi.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad India, 2004.
2. Trivedi R.K., Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and Standards, Vol. I
and II, Enviro Media.
3. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, Environmental Encyclopaedia, Jaico Publ. House, Mumbai,
2001.
4. Wager K.D., Environmental Management, W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA, 1998.
5. Benny Joseph, Environmental Science and Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd,
New Delhi, ISBN: 0070601690, 2006.
6. Singh B.K., 2008, Handbook of Disaster Management: techniques & Guidelines, Rajat Publication.
7. Ghosh G.K., 2006, Disaster Management, APH Publishing Corporation.
47
15BS203 APPLIED MATERIALS SCIENCE LTPC
(Common to Civil and Mechanical Engineering)
300 3
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the essential principles of material science for Mechanical and related Engineering
applications
 To transform the basic principles and concepts to understand the utility of Engineering Materials for
industrial applications in terms of their structure and properties
 To identify the fleet of scientific channels exploring the generation of high-tech Engineering materials
Course Outcomes:
 The students are able to understand the crystal structure and structure related properties of the
materials
 The students will acquire knowledge about magnetic and superconducting materials
 The students will acquire knowledge about the non-ferrous materials like polymers and ceramics
 The students will acquire knowledge about the composite materials
 The students are able to understand the application of nano devices
UNIT I PLASTIC DEFORMATION OF MATERIALS 9
Crystal imperfections: point, line, planar and volume defects–Frank Reed source of dislocations–Plastic and
elastic deformation, twinning, cold/hot work hardening–Recovery, recrystallization and grain growth–grain size,
ASTM grain size number–Strengthening methods–Strain hardening–Refinement of the grain size–Solid solution
strengthening–Precipitation hardening
UNIT II MAGNETIC AND SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
Origin of magnetic moment–Bohr magneton–Dia and para magnetism–Ferro magnetism–Domain theory–

Hysteresis–Soft and hard magnetic materials–antiferromagnetic materials–Ferrites–applications
Superconductivity: properties–Types–BCS theory (qualitative) –High Tc superconductors –Application of
superconductors–SQUID, cryotron, magnetic levitation.
UNIT III POLYMERIC AND CERAMIC MATERIALS 9
Polymers–Types of polymers–Thermal, Mechanical, Electrical and Viscoelastic Properties–Conducting Polymers,

Bio-Polymers and High temperature polymers and their applications Engineering ceramics–Properties and
applications–ZrO2, Al2O3, SiC, Si3N4
UNIT IV COMPOSITE MATERIALS 9
Definition–function of matrix and reinforcement in composites–classification of composites based on

reinforcement–types of composite materials–polymers, metallic and ceramic matrix composites. Law of mixtures.
Comparison with conventional materials. Fabrication of metal matrix and ceramic matrix composites–properties
and uses.
UNIT V NANOMATERIALS 9
Introduction–low dimensional structures–quantum well, wires and dots–Electronic and optical properties–
nanoclusters and nanocrystals–properties of nanomaterials. Synthesis–CVD, electrodeposition, sol-gel.
Fabrication and characterization of nano electronic devices and MEMS. CNT– Fabrication techniques–properties
and applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
48
TEXTBOOKS:
1. William D. Callister, Jr. Material Science and Engineering, Seventh Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc. New
Delhi, 2010
2. Kasap, S.O., Principle of electronic materials and devices, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2007
3. Koch C, Nanostructured materials: processing, properties and applications, William Andrew Pub., 2008
4. The Science and Engineering of Materials, Sixth Edition, Donald R. Askeland, Pradeep, P. Fulay,
Wendelin J. Wright, SI Edition Prepared by D.K. Bhattacharya
5. Cengage Learning, 2011
6. Ragavan, V. Material science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kenneth G. Budinski and Micheal K. Budinski, Engineering Materials, PHI, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Flinn R. A. and Trojan P.K. Engineering Materials and their application, Wiley, 2009.
3. Pradeep T. Nano: The essential, McGraw Hill Professional, 2012.
th
4. J.C. Anderson, K.D. Leaver, P. Leevers, R. D. Rawlings, Material Science of Engineers, 5 Edition,
Nelson Thomas Ltd. UK, 2003.
5. Polymer Science and Technology, Third Edition, by Joel R. Fried, Prentice Hall; 3 Edition, 2014.
15GE201 ENGINEERING MECHANICS L T P C
(Common to Civil / Mechanical) 3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the vectorial and scalar representation of forces and moments

 To apply static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies both in two dimensions and also in three
dimensions.
 To comprehend the effect of friction on equilibrium.
 To understand the principle of work and energy, the laws of motion, the kinematics of motion.
 To write the dynamic equilibrium equation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course the student will be able to
 Understand the vectorial and scalar representation of forces and moments
 Static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies both in two dimensions and also in three dimensions.
 Understand the principle of work and energy.
 Comprehend the effect of friction on equilibrium.
 Understand the laws of motion, the kinematics of motion and the interrelationship.
 Write the dynamic equilibrium equation.
UNIT I BASICS & EQUILIBRIUM OF PARTICLES 12
Introduction – Rigid Bodies –Laws of Mechanics – Lame’s theorem, Parallelogram and triangular Law of forces
,Principle of transmissibility – Coplanar Forces – Resolution and Composition of forces – Equivalent systems of
forces – Single equivalent– force Equilibrium of a particle – Forces in space – Equilibrium of a particle in space –
Vectorial representation of forces.
49
UNIT II EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 12
Free body diagram – Types of supports and their reactions – requirements of stable equilibrium – Moments and
Couples – Scalar components of a moment– Moment of a force about a point and about an axis – Vectorial
representation of moments and couples –– Varignon’s theorem – Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions –
Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in three dimensions – Examples.
UNIT III FRICTION 12
Frictional force – Laws of Coulomb friction – simple contact friction –Sliding Friction–Inclined planes–Angle of
Repose– Belt friction – Ladder friction– Wedge Friction– Rolling resistance.
UNIT IV PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS 12
Significance of properties of Sections - First moment of area and the Centroid of Simple sections – Rectangle,
circle, triangle from integration method– T section, I section, – Angle section, Hollow section by using standard
formula – Theorem of Pappus Guldinus– Parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem - Second and
product moments of plane area – Rectangle, triangle, circle from integration method – T section, I section, Angle
section, Hollow section by using standard formula –Polar moment of inertia – Principal moments of inertia of
plane areas – Principal axes of inertia – mass moment of inertia of solid rectangular prisms, cylinders and cones.
UNIT V DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES & RIGID BODIES 12
Displacements, Velocity and acceleration, their relationship – Relative motion – Curvilinear motion – Newton’s
law of motion – D’Alembert principle – Work Energy Equation of particles – Impulse and Momentum – Impact of
elastic bodies. General Plane motion–Translation and rotation of rigid bodies.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Beer, F.P and Johnson Jr. E.R., “Vector Mechanics for Engineers”, Vol. 1 Statics and Vol. 2 Dynamics,
McGraw–Hill International Edition, 1997.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajasekaran, S, Sankarasubramanian, G., “Fundamentals of Engineering Mechanics”, Vikas Publishing

House Pvt. Ltd., 2000.
2. Hibbeller, R.C., “Engineering Mechanics”, Vol. 1 Statics, Vol. 2 Dynamics, Pearson Education Asia Pvt.
Ltd., 2000.
3. Palanichamy, M.S., Nagam, S., “Engineering Mechanics – Statics & Dynamics”, Tata McGraw–Hill,
2001.
th
4. MeriamJ.L, KraigeL.G, “Engineering Mechanics-Statics”, 6 Edition, Wiley, 2010.
5. Irving H. Shames, “Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics”, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd.,
th
4 Edition, 2003.
6. Ashok Gupta, “Interactive Engineering Mechanics – Statics – A Virtual Tutor (CDROM)”, Pearson
Education Asia Pvt., Ltd., 2002.
50
15GE202 Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering L T P C
(Common to Civil, Mechanical & Bio-Tech)
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students to have a clear knowledge of the basic electrical and electronics engineering.
 To analyze DC and AC circuits using basic laws.
 To understand the operating principles of measuring instruments.
 To familiarize the construction, working principle, EMF equation of DC machines, single phase
transformer, alternator, synchronous motor and induction motor.
 To acquaint the students with construction, operation, characteristics and applications of semiconductor
devices.
 To make the students understand the concepts of logic gates and their applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will be able to

 Analyze DC and AC circuits using basic laws.
 Apply the basic laws governing the operation of the instruments.
 Demonstrate about DC machines, AC machines and its applications.
 Analyze and compare the construction, theory and characteristics of the semiconductor devices.
 Design basic combinational and sequential logic circuits.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS & MEASUREMENTS 12
Ohm’s Law – Kirchhoff’s Laws –Reduction of series and parallel circuits-Mesh and Nodal Analysis of DC circuits –
Introduction to AC Circuits - RMS Value, Average value, Form factor and peak factor phasor representation – Single
Phase AC series circuits with R,RL, RC & RLC- Power and Power factor. Introduction to three phase circuits- Star
and delta connected balanced load.
Electrical measurements - Introduction, Operating torques, Operating Principles of Moving Coil and Moving Iron
Instruments, Dynamometer type Watt meters and Energy meter.
UNIT II DC MACHINES & TRANSFORMER (Qualitative treatment only) 8
DC Generators - construction, principle of operation, Types, EMF equations and applications. DC Motors -
operation, Types, Speed and torque equation – speed control of DC shunt motors. Single Phase Transformer -
Constructional details and operation, Types, EMF equation, transformation ratio.
UNIT III AC MACHINES (Qualitative treatment only) 8
Synchronous generators - construction and operation, EMF equation - Synchronous motors – principle of
operation. Three phase induction motor – Types, Construction and operation, Torque equation, slip torque
characteristics, Single phase induction motor - construction, operation and applications.
UNIT IV SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS (Qualitative 9
treatment only)
Introduction to semiconductors-PN Junction Diode – characteristics, breakdown effect and applications - Half wave
and Full wave rectifiers, Zener Diode - characteristics and voltage regulator. Bipolar Junction Transistor – operation
of NPN and PNP, characteristics of CB, CE, CC configurations. Transducer - Thermistor, Thermocouple, Hall
effect, peltier effect.
UNIT V DIGITAL ELECTRONICS (Qualitative treatment only) 8
Number System – Binary, octal, hexadecimal, Logic Gates (AND, OR,NOT,NAND,NOR,XOR,XNOR), Half and Full
Adders – Flip-Flops –RS, JK, T and D - Counters – synchronous up counter, synchronous down counter,
asynchronous up counter, asynchronous down counter, shift registers – shift right and shift left register
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
51
TEXTBOOKS:
1. V N Mittle, Arvind Mittle “Basic Electrical Engineering”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.
2. R.S. Sedha, “A Textbook of Applied Electronics” S. Chand & Co., 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Muthusubramanian R, Salivahanan S, “Basic Electrical, Electronics and Computer Engineering”,

McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Nagsarkar T K and Sukhija M S, “Basics of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford University press (2012).
3. V K Mehta, Rohit mehta “Principles of Electronics”, S.Chand & Company Ltd, (2015).
4. Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’ Outline Series, McGrawHill,
(2014).
15CS251 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING L T P C

LABORATORY IN C++
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the basic concepts of object-oriented programming.
 To study about the constructor, destructor concepts and operator overloading.
 To know the Inheritances and virtual functions.
 To know the different methods of exception handling.
 To expertise in different methods of file handling and template concepts.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
 Describe oops concepts.
 Design the class with constructor and destructors.
 Design the class with operator overloading and function overloading.
 Implement run time polymorphism.
 Handle exceptions
 Use file handling mechanisms.
 Work with function and class template.
SYLLABUS FOR THE LAB:
1. Programs Using Functions with default arguments

2. Program using Classes, objects, member functions, Constructors
& destructor.
3. Program using static data members and static member function.
4. Programs using Dynamic memory allocation
5. Programs using friend function.
6. Program using function overloading and Operator Overloading including Unary and Binary Operators.
52
7. Program using inheritance.
8. Program using virtual function and virtual base classes.
9. Program using function templates and class templates
10. Program using Exception handling mechanism.
11. Programs using Sequential and Random access files.
12. Mini Project.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. H.M.Deitel, P.J.Deitel, “C++ : how to program”, Sixth edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt., Ltd., 2012
2. Yashavant Kanetkar, “Understanding Pointers In C”, 4th Edition, 2008, Bpb Publications.
3. Herbert Schildt, "the C++ : Complete Reference", Fourth edition, TMH, 2002.
4. K.R.Venugopal, Rajkumar Buyya, T.Ravishankar, "Mastering C++", TMH, 2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.cplusplus.com/doc/tutorial/
2. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c++-tutorial.html
3. http://www.learncpp.com/
4. http://www.stroustrup.com/C++.html
5. http://en.cppreference.com/w/ .
15CE251 COMPUTER AIDED BUILDING DRAWING I L T P C
0 0 4 2
Course Objectives:
 To provide knowledge on different views of components of a building.

 To provide knowledge on various global symbols and sign conventions used in building drawing.
 To familiarize the students with creating, modifying and annotating commands using software.
 To enable the students to create plan, section and elevation of buildings using drafting
software.
 To enable the students to create drawings and to take print out using computer.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this lab course the students will be able to
 Have fundamental understanding of 2D and 3D views of buildings.
 Understand the different views of the components of a building.
 Familiarize with the standard symbols and sign conventions suitably.
 Use create, modify and annotation commands.
 Create plan, section and elevation of different buildings and take the print out.
53
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Part A
1. Drafting and annotation commands.
2. Simple Drawings I
3. Simple Drawings II.
4. Drawings using advanced commands
5. Simple Drawings III
PART B
Creation of geometrical drawing of following component of buildings:
1. Stepped wall footing and isolated RCC column footing
2. Fully panelled and flush doors
3. Half panelled and half-glazed window
4. RCC dog legged and open well stairs
5. Steel truss
PART C
Development of plan, elevation, section and schedule of openings from the given line diagram of residential
building.
REFERENCE BOOK
1. Sikka V.B., “A Course in Civil Engineering Drawing”, 4th edition, S.K.Kataria & Sons, New Delhi, 1998.
2. Shah M.G. Kale C.M. & Patki S.Y., “Building Drawing with an Integrated Approach to Built Environment”,
4th edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. New Delhi, 2002.
3. Shah.M.G., “Building drawing” –Tata McGraw-Hill,1992
4. Kumaraswamy N., Kameswara Rao A., “Building planning & Drawing”, Charotar Publishing, 2013.
th
5. Varma B.P “Civil Engineering Drawing & House Planning”, Khanna publishers, Delhi – 11 edition.
IS CODES :
1. IS: 962 – 1967 Code of Practical for Architectural and Building Drawing.
2. IS: 4021 – 1983 Specification for Timber Door, Window and Ventilator Frames
3. IS: 6523 – 1983 Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Door and Window Frames
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Note: Plotting of diagrams must be completed for each exercise and attached to the records written by students.
54
III Semester
L T P C
MATHEMATICS III - TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL
15MA301
EQUATIONS
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know a sound knowledge on Partial Differential Equations.
 To acquaint the student with the concepts of Fourier series that is needed for problems in engineering
disciplines.
 To know the standard techniques for solving boundary value problem.
 To familiarize the student with Fourier transform this is used to solve problems in engineering and technology.
 To know the standard techniques for solving difference equations.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students are able to
 Solve various Partial Differential Equations.
 Know to express any periodic functions as a series of well known periodic functions sine and cosine.
 Obtain the solution of boundary value problem such as displacement of string and heat conduction.
 Use Fourier transform in engineering applications.
 Obtain the solution of difference equations using Z- transforms.
UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Formation of PDE – Solutions of first order PDE – Lagrange’s linear PDE -Standard types and equations
reducible to standard types – Singular solution –– Classification of second order PDE – Solution of second and
higher order linear homogeneous PDE with constant coefficients – Linear non-homogeneous partial differential
equations with constant coefficients.
UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 12
Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half-range Sine and Cosine series –
Parseval’s identity – Harmonic Analysis – Complex form of Fourier series.
UNIT III BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN PDE 12
Method of separation of variables – Solutions of one dimensional wave equation and one dimensional heat
equation – Steady state solution of two-dimensional heat equation – Fourier series solutions in Cartesian
coordinates.
UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORM 12
Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair – Sine and Cosine transforms – Properties – Transform of
elementary functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s identity.
UNIT V Z - TRANSFORM AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 12
Z-transform - Elementary properties - Inverse Z-transform - Convolution theorem - Initial and Final value
theorems - Formation of difference equation - Solution of difference equation using Z-transform.
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
55
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd Edition, 2013.
2. Gupta, S.C., and Kapoor, V.K., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand and Sons. New
Delhi, Reprint 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall Media (An imprint of
Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2011.
2. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 7th
Edition, 2012.
3. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 4th Edition,
2010.
4. Hwei Hsu, “Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random Variables and Random
Processes”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2014.
5. Oliver C. Ibe, “Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes”, Elsevier India Pvt Ltd, New
Delhi, Reprint-2012.
L T P C
15CE301 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND TECHNIQUES
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To give complete exposure on stones and their suitability.
 To get idea on damp proofing materials, timber and roofing materials
 To study the various construction techniques and practices in field.
 To have exposure on sub-structure, super structure, industrial structure constructions.
 To explore the suitability of equipment employed in different ground conditions.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
 Select suitable type of stones, bricks, lime and ceramic materials
 Choose effective timber, roofing, damp and water proofing materials in the field
 Practice various construction techniques in the field
 Execute projects related to industrial structures.
 Employ an appropriate equipment towards speedy completion of projects
UNIT I BASIC BUILDING MATERIALS AND CEMENTS 9
Stones: classification - composition and mineral constituents - properties and tests - artificial stones
Bricks: brick earth - composition and harmful constituents - manufacturing process, classification - sampling and
testing - properties - brick substitutes
Lime: production - cementing action - classification - properties and tests
Cement and Ceramics: – manufacturing process – type and grades - ceramic products - floor tiles - sanitary
appliances - roof tiles - acid and chemical resistant products - mineral binders - air setting and hydraulic binders
56
UNIT II MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 9
Damp proofing and Moisture proofing: Paints, varnishes, distempers and adhesives and sealants - organic
binders: bitumen, tars, emulsions and mastics - polymers and plastics: walls, pipes and sanitary ware, glues and
mastics
Timber: market forms and industrial products - physical properties, seasoning and preservative treatment -
plywood - pressed wood - particle board - hard board - fibre board - lamina board
Ferrous metals: Iron and steel, basic metallurgy, composition and grades, market forms and heat treatment -
Steel as reinforcement - Corrosion of metals and protection
Non-ferrous metals: Aluminium, copper, brass and glass products -properties - applications
UNIT III CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 9
Specifications - Construction co-ordination - Site clearance and marking - Foundations and basements - Masonry
- Bonds - Brick masonry - Stone masonry - Flooring - Construction joints - Movement and expansion joints -
Contraction joints - Form works - Centring and shuttering - Slip forms - Scaffoldings, shoring and underpinning -
Cable anchoring and grouting - Shoring for deep cutting
UNIT IV CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES 9
Sub structures: Trenchless techniques - Box jacking - Pipe jacking - Arch jacking - Tunnelling - Sheet piling -
Diaphragm walls - Coffer dams - Well foundation and caisson - Sinking operations - Piling techniques -
Super structures: Launching girders - Bridge decks - Heavy decks - Off shore platforms – Shells, domes and
braced domes - In-situ pre-stressing in high rise structures - Articulated structures - Space decks.
Industrial structures: Chimneys - Cooling towers - Silos - Bunkers - High tension transmission and
telecommunication towers - Support structures for heavy equipment and conveyors - Escalators - Conduits for oil
and fluids conveyance.
UNIT V CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT 9
Earthwork - Earth moving operations - Selection of equipment – Earth equipment - Types - Tractors, motor
graders, scrapers, front end waders and earth movers - Equipment for soil compaction - Equipment for material
handling - Conveyors- Types- Foundation and Pile driving Equipment - Equipment for trenching, tunnelling and
dredging.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Edward Allen and Joseph Iano, “Fundamentals of Building Construction: Materials and Methods”, Wiley, 5th
Edition, 2008.
2. Arora S.P. and Bindra S.P., “The Text Book of Building Construction”, DhanpatRai and Sons, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Varghese, P.C., “Building construction”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Peurifoy, Schexnayder, Shapira, “Construction Planning, Equipment and Methods”, Tata McGraw Hill
th
Education Private Ltd-7 edition, 2013.
3. National Building Code of India, Part V, "Building Materials”, 2005.
4. IS codes: 3495-1992, 712-1973, 6932-1973 Part I-II, 1624-1974, 287-1993, 459-1992, 277-2003.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Jha, J and Sinha, S.K., “Construction and Foundation Engineering”, Khanna Publishers, 2009.
57
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.theconstructor.org
2. http://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/syllabus.php?subjectId=105102088
L T P C
15CE302 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop understanding of the state of stresses and strains in structural components as a result of
different loading conditions.
 To provide knowledge on shear force and bending moment for all statically determinate beams by
 recognizing the beam type and loading.
 To provide exposure on the concepts of internal stress in beams of various cross sections.
 To have knowledge on analyzing the elements under complex state of stress by means of analytical and
 graphical methods.
 To develop knowledge on the behaviour of members subjected to pure torsion and shear.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course the students will be able to
 Realize the state of stresses and strains in structural components under tension, compression and shear.
 Plot the Shear force and bending moment diagrams for all the statically determinate beams.
 Analyse the beam for internal stress.
 Evaluate the elements subjected to complex state of stress by means of analytical and graphical methods.
 Comprehend the behaviour of members under pure torsion and shear.
UNIT I TENSION, COMPRESSION AND SHEAR 9+3
Introduction - Normal stress and strain - Mechanical properties of materials - Elasticity, plasticity and creep -
Linear elasticity- Hooke’s law - Poisson’s ratio - Shear stress and strain - Elastic constants- Allowable stresses
and allowable loads - Thermal stresses in compound bars -Impact loading.
UNIT II SHEAR FORCE AND BENDING MOMENT 9+3
Introduction - Types of beams, load and reactions - Shear force and bending moment - Relationships between
load, shear force and bending moment – Shear force and bending moment diagrams.
UNIT III STRESSES IN BEAMS 9+3
Introduction - Pure bending and non-uniform bending - Curvature of a beam - Longitudinal strains in beams -
Normal stresses in beams – Non- prismatic beams - Shear stresses in beams of rectangular, circular, T and I
section - Built-up beams and shear flow.
UNIT IV PRINCIPAL STRESS AND STRAIN 9+3
Plane stress - Principal stresses and maximum shear stress – Mohr’s circle for plane stress - Determination of
principal stresses and planes - plane strain - Applications of plane stress - Maximum stresses in beams-
Spherical and deviatory components of stress tensor – Determination of principal stresses and principal planes.
58
UNIT V TORSION OF SHAFTS AND SPRING 9+3
Torsional deformations of a circular bar - Circular bars of linearly elastic materials – Non uniform torsion -
Stresses and strains in pure shear - transmission of power by circular shafts - Stepped shafts - Shafts fixed at
both ends - Strain energy in torsion and pure shear - Springs – Types- Helical and leaf springs – Stresses and
deflection of springs.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rajput.R.K. “Strength of Materials”, S.Chand and Co, New Delhi, 2007.

2. Bhavikatti. S., "Solid Mechanics", Vikas publishing house Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bansal R.K. ”Strength of materials”, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2007.

2. Subramanian R. ”Strength of materials”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2005.
3. Ramamrutham, S.,”Strength of Materials”, DhanpatRai& Sons, 2008
4. William A. Nash, ”Theory and Problems of Strength of Materials”, Schaum’s Outline Series, Tata McGraw-Hill
publishing co., New Delhi, 2007.
5. Srinath L.S,” Advanced Mechanics of Solids”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2005.
6. Gambhir. M.L., "Fundamentals of Solid Mechanics", PHI Learning Private Limited., New Delhi, 2009.
EXTENSIVE READING
1. Ugural. A.C., "Mechanics of Materials", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
WEB REFERENCES
1. http://web.mst.edu/~mecmovie/
L T P C
15CE303 SOIL MECHANICS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide knowledge on the properties and classification of soil
 To acquire knowledge on permeability of soil and stress distribution in soil media
 To impart idea about various methods of compaction and consolidation of soil
 To familiarize about behaviour of soil under shear
 To be acquainted with stability analysis of slopes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course students will be able to
 Classify the soil based on index properties
 Assess the permeability characteristics of soil and calculate stress at any point in a soil media due to load
applied at the ground surface
 Find out the settlement of the structure
 Estimate the shear strength of various types of soil.
 Analyze the stability of slopes using different methods.
59
UNIT I BASIC PROPERTIES OF SOIL 9
Introduction - Soil formation – Phase relation – Engineering and index properties - Grain size distribution –
Atterberg limits – Soil classification significance – BIS classification system
UNIT II PERMEABILITY AND STRESS DISTRIBUTION 9
Introduction- Permeability – Darcy’s law - Laboratory methods – Quick sand condition - Seepage – Laplace
equation - Flow nets – properties and applications - Stress distribution-effective stress concepts – Boussinesq’s
equation – Stress due to line load and circular and rectangular loaded area – Westergaard’s equation for point
load
UNIT III COMPACTION AND CONSOLIDATION 9
Introduction-compaction- Influencing factors - laboratory and field methods- Settlement - Components -

Terzaghi's one dimensional consolidation theory - Laboratory consolidation test – Field consolidation curve – NC
and OC clays - Final and time rate of consolidation
UNIT IV SHEAR STRENGTH 9
Introduction- Shear strength of soil – Mohr–coulomb’s theory – measurement of shear strength - Direct shear
test, UCC test, triaxial shear test and vane shear test - Shear strength of cohesive and cohesionless soil.
UNIT V SLOPE STABILITY 9
Slope failure mechanisms - Modes - Stress analysis - Infinite and finite slopes - Stability analysis for purely
cohesive and c-Ф soils - Method of slices – Friction circle method - Stability number – Slope protection measures.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. GopalRanjan and Rao A.S.R., “Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics”, New Age International Publishers,
New Delhi, 2000.
2. Murthy, V.N.S., “Text Book of Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, CBS Publishers, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Arora. K.R, “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Standard Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi,
2005.
2. Punmia B.C., “Soil Mechanics and Foundations”, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 16th Edition,
(2005).
3. Venkataramaiah C, “Geotechnical Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2006.
4. Kaniraj, S.R, “Design aids in Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing
company Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.
5. Purushothama Raj. P., “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2013.
EXTENSIVE READING:
th
1. McCarthy D.F,“Essentials of Soil Mechanics and Foundations”,6 Edition,Prentice-Hall,NewJersey,2002.
60
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT- %20Guwahati/soil_mech/index.html
2. http://www.eng.fsu.edu/~tawfiq/soilmech/lecture.html
3. http://aboutcivil.org/soil-mechanics/soil-mechanics-1-high.pdf
L T P C
15CE304 SURVEYING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the basics of linear and angular measurements using chain and compass.
 To impart the basics of levelling and its applications.
 To study the applications of theodolite survey in linear and angular measurements.
 To provide the knowledge on the utility of tachometric surveying by various methods.
 To understand the elements of different types of curves on roads and their significance.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Carry out preliminary surveying to prepare a layout of a given area.
 Plot LS, CS and Contouring using leveling applications.
 Execute a theodolite traverse.
 Find heights and distances using tacheometry surveying.
 Set out different types of curves
UNIT I CHAIN AND COMPASS SURVEYING 9
Surveying- Introduction and principles - Classification – maps - scales - Conventional signs - Survey instruments
-handling and adjustments - Chain surveying-ranging and chaining - reciprocal ranging - setting perpendiculars -
well conditioned triangles –obstacles- sources and limits of error and their correction - Compass-types-bearings-
magnetic and true north, magnetic declination and its variation – traversing- local attraction and its elimination.
UNIT II LEVELLING AND ITS APPLICATIONS 9
Levelling- principles- levels and staves- accessories- temporary and permanent adjustments- sensitiveness of
bubble tube - Bench marks – Types of levelling – booking- reduced levels- determination - plotting LS and CS-
curvature and refraction corrections-contour-types-applications.
UNIT III THEODOLITE SURVEYING 9
Theodolite - vernier and micro-optic - description and uses - temporary and permanent adjustments - horizontal -
vertical angles - heights and distances - traversing - closing error and distribution - Gale’s table - omitted
measurements.
UNIT IV TACHEOMETRIC SURVEYING 9
Tacheometry -principle- systems- tangential- stadia methods - horizontal and inclined sights – staff- vertical and
normal - fixed and movable hairs - stadia constants – anallatic lens - subtense bar.
61
UNIT V CURVES 9
Introduction- curve ranging - horizontal and vertical curves - Simple curves - setting with chain and tapes,
tangential angles by theodolite, double theodolite – Compound curves -Reverse curves- Transition curves -
functions and requirements - setting out by offsets and angles - vertical curves - sight distances.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kanetkar T.P., “Surveying and Levelling”, Vols. I and II, Standard Publishers, New Delhi 2008.
2. Duggal R.K, “Surveying”, Vol. I & II, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bannister A and Raymond S, “Surveying”, Addison Wesley Longman ltd, England, 2006.
2. Anderson, J.M. and Mikhail, E.M., “Surveying: Theory and Practice”, McGraw Hill, 1998.
3. Schofield, W. and Breach M., “Engineering Surveying”, 6th Ed., Butterworth-Heineman,2007
4. Arora, K.R., “Surveying”, Vol. I, II and III, Standard Book House, 1995.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105107122
L T P C
15CE305 ENGINEERING GEOLOGY
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the concepts of geological agents and their processes.
 To provide knowledge on various properties of minerals and their engineering significance.
 To give knowledge on various classifications of rocks.
 To understand the importance of geological investigations and mapping.
 To understand the applications of geological surveys in civil engineering structures.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Identify various geological agents and processes involved.
 Identify the available minerals by their properties and behaviour.
 Classify and identify the available rocks in the construction site.
 Do geological investigations and mapping for construction projects.
 Apply the geological concepts in civil engineering projects.
UNIT I GENERAL GEOLOGY 9
Role of Geology in Civil engineering – Branches of geology – Earth structures and composition –Elementary
knowledge on continental drift and plate tectonics - Earth processes –Weathering – Geological work of rivers,
wind and sea - Engineering importance – Earthquake belts in India – Ground water – Mode of occurrence –
Prospecting .
62
UNIT II MINERALOGY 9
Introduction – Crystallography – elements, symmetry, axes, forms, systems – Mineral properties – Physical,
optical – Study of rock forming minerals - Felspar group - Orthoclase, microcline, albite, anorthite – Pyroxene
group - Enstatite, augite - Oxide minerals - Quartz, corundum - Carbonate minerals – Calcite, dolomite,
magnesite – Minerals usage in civil engineering field - Coal and petroleum – Origin and occurrence in India.
UNIT III PETROLOGY 9
Classification of rocks – Distinction between igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rocks- Occurrence,
Engineering properties and distribution - Igneous rocks– Granite, syenite, diorite, gabbro, pegmatite, dolerite and
basalt- sedimentary rocks - Sandstone, limestone, shale, conglomerate and breccia-Metamorphic rocks-
Quartzite, marble, slate, phyllite, gneiss and schist.
UNIT IV STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY AND MAPPING 9
Introduction – Basic terminologies – Study of structural features – Folds, faults and joints -Engineering
considerations - Geophysical investigations- Seismic and electrical-Mapping-Introduction-Types-Geological-
Structural-Lithological.
UNIT V GEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS IN CIVIL ENGINEERING 9
Geological conditions necessary for construction of dams, tunnels, buildings, road cuttings- Landslides – Causes
and preventions- Improvement of sites-Coastal protection.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Parbin Singh, “Engineering and General Geology”, S.K.Kataria& Sons, 2012.

2. S.K.Duggal, H.K.Pandey and N.Rawal, “Engineering geology”, McGraw Hill Education Private limited,2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.,Varghese P. C, “Engineering Geology for Civil Engineers”, PHI Learning Private Limited, Delhi, 2015.
2. F.G.H. Blyth and M.H.de Freitas, “Geology for Engineers”, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2015.
L T P C
15CE351 SURVEY PRACTICAL - I
0 0 4 2
Course Objectives:
 To impart knowledge on measuring area and offset by using chain surveying.
 To familiarize concepts of bearing and included angles using different compass.
 To provide knowledge on different methods of plane table surveying.
 To acquire knowledge on finding the reduced levels using different methods of levelling.
 To impart knowledge on LS and CS
 To provide knowledge on different types of contours
Course Outcomes:
 Handle the conventional surveying instruments such as chain/tape, compass and plane table and in the
63
field of civil engineering.
 Undergo traverse using various instruments.
 Determine reduced levels of various points.
 Plot LS, CS and Contour using levelling instrument.
 Use the theodolite effectively for various applications.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Measurement of given area using chain and cross staff survey.

2. Measurement of area of the given building using chain and its accessories.
3. Measurement of bearings and calculation of included angles using Prismatic and Surveyors Compass.
4. Adjustment of compass traverse
5. Area calculation by Radiation and Intersection methods using plane table.
6. Location of points by Resection method -Three point problem.
7. Determination of Reduced levels of various locations-Simple levelling.
8. Determination of Reduced levels- Fly and check Levelling.
9. Plotting of LS and CS.
10. Plotting of Contours.
11. Study of Theodolite.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kanetkar T.P., “Surveying and Levelling”, Vols. I and II, Standard Publishers, New Delhi 2008
2. Arora, K.R., “Surveying”, Vol. I, II and III, Standard Book House, 1995
L T P C
15CE352 SOIL MECHANICS LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
Course Objectives:
 To give exposure on classification of soil based on index properties.
 To educate the fundamentals of OMC and maximum dry density of soil mass.
 To provide knowledge on the shear strength of the given soil.
 To study about the compressibility of soil sample.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
 Classify the soil sample based on its index properties.
 Assess the OMC required in the field applications.
 Check stability of slopes by performing shear strength test on soil.
 Estimate compressibility of soil and apply it on the field.
64
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Collection of soil sample using Split spoon sampler

2. DETERMINATION OF INDEX PROPERTIES
a. Special gravity of soil solids
b. Grain size distribution – Sieve analysis and Hydrometer analysis
c. Liquid limit, Plastic limit and shrinkage limit tests
3. DETERMINATION OF INSITU DENSITY AND COMPACTION CHARACTERISTICS
a. Field density Test (Core cutter and Sand replacement method)
b. Moisture – density relationship using Standard Proctor Compaction test
4. DETERMINATION OF ENGINEERING PROPERTIES
a. Permeability (constant head and falling head methods)
b. One dimensional consolidation test on cohesive soil
c. Direct shear test in cohesionless soil
d. Unconfined compression test in cohesive soil
e. California Bearing Ratio Test on Road materials
f. Tri-axial compression test in cohesion-less soil to estimate shear strength parameters
g. Laboratory vane Shear test in cohesive soil
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. GopalRanjan and Rao A.S.R., “Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics”, New Age International Publishers,
New Delhi, 2000.
2. Saibaba Reddy, E. Ramasastri, K. “Measurement of Engineering Properties of Soils”, New age
International (P) Limited Publishers, New Delhi, 2002.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://home.iitk.ac.in/~madhav/geolab.html
2. http://www.uic.edu/classes/cemm/cemmlab/
L T P C
15HS351 PRESENTATION SKILLS LABORATORY
0 0 2 1
Course Objectives
 To hone the students’ proficiency in speaking skills
 To enhance their pronouncing skills
 To help the students acquire presentation skills
 To enable the students communicate effectively
Course Outcomes:
Students of Engineering and Technology will be able to
 recognize phonemes
 improve pronunciation
 acquire all strategies of presentation skills
 develop interpersonal skills
Phonetic Practice 4
English phonemes: Vowels, Diphthongs, Consonants - Word Stress, phoneme recognizing practice
65
Listening Comprehension 3
Documentaries, Educational video clips, Oration of Great leaders, Radio & TV news, Listening to conversations,
Telephone etiquette, Reviewing news from Media.
Language Functions 3
Giving reasons, talking about future plans, Comparing & Contrasting, Making suggestions
Presentation Strategies 5
Presentation Strategies Defining Purpose; Audience & Locale; Organizing Contents; Preparing Outline; Audio-
visual Aids; Nuances of Delivery; Body Language; Proximics; Setting Nuances of Voice Dynamics; Time-
Dimension.
Presentation and Appraisal Sessions 10
Importance of Journal articles – elements of technical articles (abstract, introduction, methodology, results,
discussion, conclusion, appendices, Bibliography and references), Preparation of scholarly papers based on the
internet Resources, Oral Presentations & Reviews.
TOTAL: 30 Periods
Reference Books
1. Mandel, Steve. Effective Presentation Skills. New Delhi: Viva Books Pvt. Ltd., 2004.
2. Gopalaswamy, Ramesh & Ramesh Mahadevan. ACE of Soft Skills. New Delhi: Pearson, 2010.
3. Gimson, AC. An Introduction to the Pronunciation of English. London: ELBS, 1989.
4. Oconnor, JD. Better English Pronunciation. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press, 1967.
66
IV SEMESTER
L T P C
15MA401 MATHEMATICS IV - NUMERICAL METHODS
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the mathematical foundations of numerical techniques for solving linear system, eigenvalue
problems, interpolation, numerical differentiation and integration and the errors associated with them;
 To demonstrate the utility of numerical techniques of ordinary and partial differential equations in solving
engineering problems where analytical solutions are not readily available.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be
 Able to solve the eigenvector problems
 Able to solve the numerical differentiation and interpolation and the errors associated with them.
 Able to solve the engineering problems associated with the ordinary and partial differential equations.
UNIT I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 9+3
Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method – Newton-Raphson method-
Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss Elimination method –Pivoting - Iterative method - Gauss-Seidel–
Dominant eigenvalue of a matrix by Power method.
UNIT II INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION 9+3
Lagrange interpolation – Newton’s forward and backward difference interpolation –Newton’s divided difference
interpolation – Cubic Splines.
UNIT III NUMERICAL DIFFERENTATION AND INTEGRATION 9+3
Approximation of derivatives using interpolation polynomials - Numerical integration using Trapezoidal,

Simpson’s 1/3 and Simpson’s 3/8 rules - Two point andthree point Gaussian quadrature formulae – Evaluation of
double integrals by Trapezoidal andSimpson’s rules.
UNIT IV INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Single step- Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method -Fourth order Runge-Kutta method for solving first and
second order equations - Multi-step methods - Milne’s and Adams-Bash forth predictor-corrector methods –
methods for solving first order equation.
BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN ORDINARY AND PARTIALDIFFERENTIAL 9+3

UNIT V
EQUATIONS
Finite difference methods for solving two-point linear boundary value problems. Finite difference techniques for
the solution of two dimensional Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations on rectangular domain – One dimensional
heat-flow equation by explicit and implicit methods - One dimensional wave equation by explicit method.
67
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Grewal, B.S. and Grewal,J.S., “Numerical methods in Engineering and Science”, Khanna Publishers, New
th
Delhi, 9 Edition, 2007.
2. Sankara R.K., “Numerical methods for Scientists and Engineers’, Prentice Hall ofIndia Private Ltd., New
rd
Delhi, 3 Edition,2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
st
1. Brian B., “A Friendly Introduction to Numerical Analysis”, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 1 Edition, 2007.
th
2. Gerald, C.F.,Wheatley, P.O.,“Applied Numerical Analysis”,Pearson Education Asia,New Delhi,7 Edition, 2011.
st nd
3. Laurene V. Fausett, “Applied Numerical Analysis using MATLAB”, Pearson Education,New Delhi, 1 print, 2
Edition, 2009
L T P C
15CE401 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To build the necessary theoretical background for analysis of trusses.

 To have an exposure on the analysis of thin and thick cylinders subjected to fluid pressure and various failure
theories.
 To understand the behaviour of short and long column under axial and eccentric loads.
 To provide understanding of various methods in finding deflection of beams.
 To give exposure to unsymmetrical bending and shear.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyse the determinate trusses.
 Analyze the problems related to thin and thick cylinders subjected to fluid pressure.
 Familiarize with the behaviour of short and long column under axial and eccentric loads.
 Determine slope and deflection in beams using various methods.
 Apply the concepts in beams subjected to unsymmetrical bending.
UNIT I ANALYSIS OF TRUSSES 9+3
Perfect, deficient and redundant trusses - Degree of redundancy – Internal and external redundancy – Methods
of analysis - Method of joints - Method of section- Method of tension coefficient- Analysis of Space Truss
UNIT II THIN AND THICK CYLINDERS AND THEORIES OF ELASTIC FAILURE 9+3
Thin cylinders – Circumferential stress – Longitudinal stress – Volumetric strain - Stresses in thick cylindrical shell
– Lame’s equation – Stresses in compound cylinders – Shrink fit - Failure theories - Maximum principal stress
theory- Maximum shear stress theory- Maximum principal strain theory- Strain energy theory- maximum shear
strain energy theory
UNIT III COLUMNS AND STRUTS 9+3
Short and slender columns- Axial and bending stress – Kern of a section - buckling and stability – Columns with
pinned ends - Columns with other support conditions - Columns with eccentric loads - Euler theory and Rankine’s
formula - Elastic and inelastic column behaviour – Design formulae for columns.
68
UNIT IV DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 9+3
Deflection of beams - Geometric methods - Double integration method – Macaulay’s method – Moment-Area
method - Conjugate beam method.
UNIT V UNSYMMETRICAL BENDING 9+3
Unsymmetrical bending- Symmetrical and unsymmetrical sections - Bending stresses in beams - Shear centre -
Shear centre for thin walled beam of mono- Symmetric and unsymmetrical open sections.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rajput R.K. "Strength of Materials (Mechanics of Solids)", S.Chand& company Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
2. Egor P Popov, “Engineering Mechanics of Solids”, 2nd edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kazimi S.M.A, “Solid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2003
2. PunmiaB.C."Theory of Structures" (SMTS) Vol 1&II, Laxmi Publishing Pvt Ltd, New Delhi 2004.
3. Rattan.S.S., "Strength of Materials", Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.
4. Srinath, L.S, “Advanced mechanics and solids”, Tata-McGraw Hill publishing company ltd, 2005.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. William A .Nash, “Theory and Problems of Strength of Materials”, Schaum‟ s Outline Series, Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing company, 2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.esm.psu.edu/courses/emch213d/tutorials/animations
L T P C
15CE402 MECHANICS OF FLUIDS AND MACHINERY
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To get exposed to basic properties of fluids
 To acquire knowledge on basic concepts of fluid mechanics
 To be familiar with various major & minor losses encountered in pipe flow
 To understand various types of open channel flows
 To impart basic theory of various types of turbines & pumps
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Measure the pressure of fluid and determine the stability of floating bodies
 Measure the discharge of fluid flowing through pipes
 Compute the major and minor losses occurring in pipe flow
 Design a most economical channel section
 Select appropriate turbine and pump based on the requirement
69
UNIT I FLUID PROPERTIES AND FLUID STATICS 9+3
Scope of fluid mechanics - Definitions of a fluid - Methods of analysis - Dimensions and units -Viscosity, density,
vapour pressure ,surface tension, capillarity - Basic equation of fluid statics - Pressure measurements -
Manometers. - Buoyancy and floatation - Stability of floating bodies - Relative equilibrium.
UNIT II FLUID KINEMATICS & DYNAMICS 9+3
Kinematics – Methods of describing fluid motion - Classification of flows and flow lines- - Stream function and
velocity potentials - Flow nets.
Dynamics - Application of control volume to continuity, energy and momentum - Euler’s equation of motion along
a stream line - Bernoulli’s equation - Applications to velocity and discharge measurements - Linear momentum
equation.
UNIT III FLOW THROUGH PIPES 9+3
Laminar flow through pipes - Development of laminar and turbulent flows in pipes - Reynolds experiment -
Hagen Poiseullie equation – Darcy - Weisbach equation - Moody diagram - Major and minor losses of flow in
pipes - Pipes in series and in parallel – Equivalent pipes – Power transmission through pipes.
UNIT IV FLOW THROUGH OPEN CHANNELS 9+3
Definition and differences between pipe flow and open channel flow –Types open channels - Types of Flow –
Properties of open channel - Fundamental equations - Velocity distribution in open channel – Steady uniform
flow: Chezy equation, Manning equation - Best hydraulic sections for uniform flow - Computation in Uniform Flow
- Specific energy and specific force.
UNIT V TURBINES & PUMPS 9+3
Turbines - Classification - Reaction turbines - Francis turbine, Radial flow turbines, draft tube and cavitation -
Propeller and Kaplan turbines - Impulse turbine - Performance of turbine - Specific speed - Runaway speed -
Similarity laws.
Centrifugal pumps - Minimum speed to start the pump - NPSH - Cavitation in pumps - Operating characteristics -
Multistage pumps – jet pump and submersible pumps (working principle only).
TEXT BOOKS:
1. VenTe Chow, “Open Channel Hydraulics”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2009.
2. Subramanya. K , “1000 solved problems in Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines” Tata McGraw –
Hill Publishing company Limited, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Modi P.N and Seth, “Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines”, Standard Book House
New Delhi. 2003
2. Jain A. K.” Fluid Mechanics”, Khanna Publishers 1995.
3. Rajesh Srivastava,” Flow through open channels”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2008.
th
4. Streeter, V.L. Wylie, E. B. and Bedford K.W, “Fluid Mechanics”, 9 edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
1998.
70
L T P C
15CE403 FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To get basic knowledge of the geotechnical site investigation.
 To understand the types of foundation and design principles
 To discuss different types of pile foundation and its capacity
 To study various earth pressure theories
 To gain knowledge on special types of foundation
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Conduct sub surface investigation and select foundation based on soil condition
 Estimate pressure distribution below the footing and calculate bearing capacity of soil
 Calculate the load carrying capacity of piles.
 Check the stability of retaining wall
 Choose the suitable foundations.
UNIT I SITE INVESTIGATION 9
Introduction – Sub surface exploration – stages, depth, lateral extent and methods – Standard penetration test -
significance - sampling – types, techniques and requirements- Bore log report.
UNIT II SHALLOW FOUNDATION 9
Introduction – Location and depth of foundation – Bearing capacity of shallow foundation – influencing factors –
Terzaghi’s theory and BIS method – In-situ tests – Plate load test - allowable bearing pressure - Settlement –
components of settlement – determination of settlement of foundations on granular and clay deposits – allowable
settlements – Methods of minimizing settlement and differential settlement.
UNIT III PILE FOUNDATION 9
Introduction – types – selection of piles – Pile carrying capacity in granular and cohesive soil – Static and
dynamic formula– Capacity from insitu tests (SPT and SCPT) – Negative skin friction – Uplift capacity – Group
capacity– Pile load test - Settlement of pile groups – Interpretation – Construction procedure of under reamed
piles.
UNIT IV RETAINING WALLS 9
Introduction – Types of retaining wall - Plastic equilibrium in soils – Active and passive states – Rankine’s theory
– Coulombs wedge theory – Earth pressure on retaining walls of simple configurations – Graphical methods –
Rebhann and Culmann methods- pressure on the wall due to line load – stability analysis.
UNIT V SPECIAL FOUNDATIONS 9
Introduction – Foundations of transmission line towers – data requirements – forces - choice of foundation type -
design procedure only - Well foundation - Tilt and shift - Remedial measures- Bearing capacity - methods of
construction - settlement - lateral stability – Recent scenario.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
71
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Gopal Ranjan and Rao A.S.R., “Basic and applied soil mechanics”, New Age International Publishers,
New Delhi, 2000.
2. Murthy, V.N.S., “Text Book of Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, CBS Publishers, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Purushothama Raj. P., “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education,
2013.
2. C. Venkataramaiah, “Geotechnical Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2006.
3. Arora K.R., “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Standard Publishers and Distributors, New
Delhi, 2005.
4. Punmia B.C., “Soil Mechanics and Foundations”, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 16th Edition,
(2005).
5. Varghese P.C.,”Foundation Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. N.N. Som and S.C. Das, “Theory and Practice of Foundation Design”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.cdeep.iitb.ac.in/nptel/Civil%20Engineering/Foundation_Engineering/TOC-M1.htm
2. http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/06CV64.html
L T P C
15CE404 HIGHWAYS AND RAILWAYS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the fundamentals related to the Planning and design of road components.
 To provide knowledge on various materials of pavement construction and method of design of highway
construction.
 To provide exposure on various types of road construction procedures and maintenance methods.
 To impart knowledge on various planning standards related to railway components.
 To provide hands on experience on railway components, its geometrics and design of elements.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply the concepts behind the Highway component planning.
 Apply the knowledge on the materials characteristics in the design of road pavements.
 Analyse the concepts of road construction procedures and apply it in maintenance methods.
 Apply the concepts of railway planning while designing the permanent way.
 Design the components or railways such as level crossings and turnouts.
72
UNIT I HIGHWAY PLANNING AND DESIGN 9
History of road development in India-Classification of roads-present status- road patterns, alignment: basic
requirements –influencing factors-location surveys- alignment in hilly areas. Geometric design-terrain
classification-design speed-vehicular characteristics- cross-section elements-road user characteristics. Sight
distance: PIEV theory, SSD, OSD and ISD. Design of horizontal curves, super elevation, radius and widening of
pavements at curves-transition curves. Types of gradients-grade compensation on curves-analysis of vertical
curves- summit curves-valley curves.
UNIT II PAVEMENT MATERIALS AND PAVEMENT DESIGN 9
Aggregates-Desirable properties-Tests-Requirements for different types of pavements. Bituminous Materials-

Tests and Desirable properties-Selection of Bitumen Grade. Bituminous Mix Design-Principle and Methods.
Different Pavement Types-Functions of Components-Design factors- Design Wheel Load- ESWL- Repetition of
loads-Materials characteristics- Climatic variation. Design of flexible and rigid pavements (IRC approach)-
Stresses in rigid highway pavements- Critical load positions-stresses due to loads, temperature change,
combined stresses, Joints in rigid pavements: transverse joints- longitudinal joints-fillers and sealers
UNIT III HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE 9
Equipment used for construction-Types of road constructions: WBM-Bituminous roads- cement concrete road -
soil stabilized roads: methods, use of geo-textiles. Highway drainage- maintenance & rehabilitation- failures of
flexible and rigid pavements, maintenance procedures: assessment and need - pavement management
system- evaluation of pavements.
UNIT IV RAILWAY PLANNING 9
Introduction- type of modes-role of rail transportation in Economic development - Merits of rail transportation,
gauges - permanent way - track components: Sleepers-functions ,types, sleeper density- ballast- functions -
Types of materials. Rails-Coning of wheels and tilting of rails- rail cross sections- wear and creep of
rails- rail fastenings. Geometric design- Gradients- transition curves- widening of gauges on curves- cant and
cant deficiency.
UNIT V RAILWAY GEOMETRIC DESIGN AND MAINTENANCE 9
Point and crossing-design of turnouts - track junctions. Yards: types and functions. Signaling and interlocking-
classification - interlocking of signals and points-control of train movements. Construction and
maintenance of railway track- methods of construction, -material requirements- special measures for high
speed track- maintenance of tracks and traffic operations – Recent trends.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. L R Kadiyali, N B Lal,“ Principles and practice of highway engineering”, Khanna Publications, 2005.
2. Saxena S.C. and Arora S. P., “A Course of Railway Engineering”,DhanpatRai, New Delhi, 7th edition,2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Agarwal, M. M.,“Indian Railway Track”, Sachdeva Press, New Delhi,2013.

2. Mundrey.J.S., “Railway Track Engineering”Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2009
3. Hay W.W., “Introduction to transportation Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, NY, 2012.
4. Daniel J Findley, Bastian Schroeder, Christopher Cunningham & Tom Brown, “Highway Engineering:
Planning, Design, and Operations”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2015.
73
L T P C
15CE405 IRRIGATION ENGINEERING AND HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To get exposure to basic principles of Irrigation
 To emphasis the need and importance of Irrigation
 To provide training on design of impounding structures
 To be familiar with design of hydraulic structures
 To realize the importance of participatory irrigation management
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Measure the Soil moisture characteristics
 Prepare the irrigation schedule and estimate design flood
 Design various types of dams
 Design various types of canals
 Assess the performance of an irrigation system
UNIT I IRRIGATION PRINCIPLES 9
Need for irrigation – Advantages and ill effects – Development of irrigation –– Tamilnadu scenario - Physical
properties of soil -Soil moisture characteristics – Retention of water in soils and concept of plant available water –
Movement of water into and within the soils – Duty, Delta, Base Period– Factors affecting Duty-Irrigation
efficiencies–Consumptive use of water-Irrigation requirements of crops - Standards for irrigation water.
UNIT II HYDROLOGY & DESIGN FLOOD ESTIMATION 9
Importance of hydrology – Hydrological cycle – Types of precipitation – Measurement of rainfall by rain gauges –
Mean rainfall over a drainage basin – Various methods of computing runoff from its given rainfall – Design flood -
Estimating design flood and flood flows
UNIT III DIVERSION AND IMPOUNDING STRUCTURES 9
Head works –Weirs and Barrage –Types of impounding structures - Factors affecting, location of dams -Forces
on a dam -Design of Gravity dams- Earth dams, Arch dams – Spillways -Energy dissipaters.
UNIT IV CANAL IRRIGATION 9
Classification of canals- Alignment of canals – Design of irrigation canals– Regime theories - Canal Head works
– Canal regulators - Canal drops – Cross drainage works – Canal Outlet, Escapes –Lining and maintenance of
canals – Other methods of Irrigation – Surface and Subsurface methods – Merits and Demerits
UNIT V IRRIGATION WATER MANAGEMENT 9
Modernization techniques – Rehabilitation – Command Area Development - Systems of rice intensification -

Water delivery systems - Participatory Irrigation Management - Farmer’s organization and turn over – Water
users associations - Economic aspects of irrigation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
74
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sharma, R.K., and Sharma, T.K., “Irrigation Engineering”, S. Chand and Company, NewDelhi, 2008.
2. Garg, S.K., “Irrigation Engineering,” Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Arora, K.R., “Irrigation, Water Power and Water Resources Engineering”, StandardPublishers Distributors,
New Delhi, 2009.
2. Dilip Kumar Majumdar, “Irrigation Water Management”, Prentice-Hall of India, NewDelhi, 2008.
3. Punmia, B.C., “Irrigation and Water Power Engineering”, Laxmi Publishers, New Delhi,2008
4. Asawa, G.L., “Irrigation Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi,2009
L T P C
15CE451 SURVEY PRACTICAL - II
0 0 4 2
Course Objectives:
 To apply geometric and trigonometric principles of surveying.
 To get practical exposure to different systems of Tacheometry.
 To set out a curve by different methods.
 To determine the azimuth of a line by observation of sun.
 To give exposure on modern surveying instruments like GPS and Total station.
Course Outcomes:
 Determine the heights, distances, and gradient using trigonometric methods
 Calculate the height of an inaccessible point by system of tacheometry.
 Apply field procedures in setting out of a curve.
 Calculate the azimuth of a line by observation of sun.
 Use modern surveying instruments like total station, GPS
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Measurement of Horizontal and Vertical angle using theodolite

2. Measurement of heights and distances by single plane and double plane method.
3. Measurement of heights and distances using stadia and tangential system of Tacheometry.
4. Setting out of foundation for a given building.
5. Setting out of a Simple curve using linear method.
6. Setting out of a Simple curve using Angular method.
7. Setting out of a compound curve
8. Calculation of Latitude and Longitude using GPS.
9. Determination of angles and height measurement using total station
10. Determination of area of a given plot using total station
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
75
REFERENCE BOOKS:
2. Arora, K.R., “Surveying”, Vol. I, II and III, Standard Book House, 1995
L T P C
15CE452 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
Course Objectives:
 To understand the technical concepts and ways to solve engineering problems through theoretical
calculations by conducting experiments.
 To learn the principles studied in theory.
 To access the strength of various construction materials.
 To understand the concepts of mechanics of materials to determine the behaviour of materials under
load.
 To provide the skill sets required in performing experiments and writing lab reports.
Course Outcomes:
 Apply the concepts of mechanics for determining stresses and strains from the member forces.
 Verify the principle and theory studied using the experiments.
 Do problems by knowing the effects of axial loads, bending, shear and torsion on structural components.
 Determine the behavior of structural elements such as bars, beams and columns subjected to tension,
compression, shear, bending and torsion by means of experiments.
 Understand the behavior of materials and structural elements.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Hardness of the specimen using Vickers, Brinelland Rockwell Hardness machine.

2. Impact strength of the specimen by izod and charpy method.
3. Young’s Modulus of the specimen using deflection test.
4. Proving Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem using deflection test.
5. Stiffness and Modulus of rigidity of the specimen using Torsion testing machine.
6. Modulus of rigidity and stiffness of the spring specimen by Compression and tension test.
7. Yield strength, Ultimate strength, percentage of elongation and Young’s modulus for the Mild steel rod
and HYSD bars using UTM.
8. Maximum shear strength of the Mild steel and Aluminium bar using double shear test.
9. Modulus of rigidity of the specimen using wire Torsion testing machine and stiffness using rod torsion
testing machine.
10. Bending test using UTM.
11. Tensile strength of the thin wire using tensile tester apparatus.
12. Young’s Modulus Of Concrete Using UTM
76
Tests on Cement
1. Specific Gravity
2. Fineness of a sample by Sieving
3. Standard Consistency and Setting Time
4. Soundness
5. Compressive Strength
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Standard Codes:
1. ASTM Standards
2. Indian Standards
(i). IS 516-1959-Indian Standard methods of Tests for strength of Concrete
(ii).IS 5242-1979-Indian Standard method of test for determining shear strength of metals
(iii).IS 1734(part 10)-1983- Indian Standard method of test for ply wood
(iv).IS 1598-1977- Indian Standard method of test for izod impact test of metals
(v). IS 1757-1988- Indian Standard method of test for charpy impact (V-Notch) on Metallic Material
(vi).IS 1501-2002- Indian Standard method for vickers hardness test for metallic materials
(vii).IS 1500-2005- Indian Standard method for brinell hardness test for metallic materials
(ix).IS 1586-2000- Indian Standard method for rockwell hardness test for metallic materials
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kazimi S.M.A, “Solid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2003
2. PunmiaB.C."Theory of Structures" (SMTS) Vol 1&II, Laxmi Publishing Pvt Ltd, New Delhi 2004.
3. Rattan.S.S., "Strength of Materials", Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.
4. Srinath, L.S, “Advanced mechanics and solids”, Tata-McGraw Hill publishing company ltd, 2005.
L T P C
15CE453 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
Course Objectives:
 To impart knowledge on measuring flow through pipes and open channels
 To familiarize the determination of major and minor losses in pipes
 To get exposed to basic concept of stability of floating bodies
 To acquire knowledge on finding the efficiency of various types of pumps
 To provide knowledge on various types of turbines and their applications
Course Outcomes:

 Measure the flow through pipes and open channels
 Compute the major and minor energy losses in pipes
77
 Determine the meta centric height of floating bodies
 Determine the efficiency of various types of pumps
 Select appropriate type of turbine for the given cituation
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Calibration of orifice for flow measurement in tanks

2. Flow measurement in Open channel using various types of Notches
3. Determination of co-efficient of discharge of venture meter for flow measurement in pipes
4. Calibration of orifice meter to measure the flow of liquid through pipes
5. Study of impact of jet on flat plate (normal / inclined)
6. Computation of friction factor for the given pipe to calculate the head loss in pipe networks
7. Determination of various minor losses in pipes to compute the total head loss
8. Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem to apply in flow measuring devices
9. Determination of efficiency of the Francis turbine used for hydropower generation
10. Determination of meta centric height of floating body to assess the stability condition
11. Study on performance characteristics of Centrifugal pumps (Constant speed / variable speed)
12. Determination of efficiency of the reciprocating pump to decide its suitability for specific purpose.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. VenTe Chow, “Open Channel Hydraulics”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2009.
2. Modi P.N and Seth, “ Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines”, Standard Book House
New Delhi. 2003
3. Jain A. K.” Fluid Mechanics”. Khanna Publishers 1995.
78
V Semester
L T P C
15CE501 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS – I
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To gain knowledge on computing slopes and deflections using energy methods.

 Have knowledge on influence lines for statically determinate and indeterminate structures.
 To analyse and solve arched and cable profiled structures.
 To analyse the indeterminate structures for internal forces by theorem of three moments and slope
deflection method.
 To analyse the indeterminate structures for internal forces Moment distribution method.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Determine slopes and deflections of beams and frames.

 Draw influence lines for statically determinate and indeterminate structures.
 Analyse and solve arched and cable profiled structures.
 Analyse the indeterminate structures by exact analysis.
 Analyse the indeterminate structures by iterative procedure.
UNIT I WORK–ENERGY METHODS AND INDETERMINATE TRUSSES 9+3
Work - Principle of virtual work - Deflections of trusses, beams and frames - Conservation of energy and strain
energy – Castigliano’s second theorem - Betti’s law and Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem. Analysis of indeterminate
trusses by strain energy method– Lack of fit –Temperature stresses (up to two degrees of redundancy).
UNIT II MOVING LOADS AND INFLUENCE LINES 9+3
Influence lines for reactions in statically determinate structures – influence lines for member forces in pin-jointed
frames – Influence lines for shear force and bending moment in beam sections – Calculation of critical stress
resultants due to concentrated and distributed moving loads - EUDL – Combined Dead and Moving Load
Diagram- Focal Length - Muller Breslau‟s principle – Influence lines for continuous beams and single storey rigid
frames – Indirect model analysis for influence lines of indeterminate structures – Beggsdeformeter
UNIT III ARCHES 9+3
Arches as structural forms – Examples of arch structures – Types of arches – Analysis of three hinged, two
hinged and fixed arches, parabolic and circular arches – Settlement and temperature effects.
UNIT IV INDETERMINATE BEAMS AND FRAMES 9+3
Theorem of three - Moments equation - Fixed and propped cantilever - Derivation of slope deflection equation -
Analysis of statically indeterminate beams and portal frames – Continuous beams with and without support
yielding – Analysis of portal frames with and without sway.
UNIT V MOMENT DISTRIBUTION METHOD 9+3
Distribution and carryover of moments – Stiffness and carry over factors – Analysis of continuous beams – Plane
rigid frames with and without sway – Neylor‟s simplification.
79
TEXTBOOKS:
1. L.S. Negi& R.S. Jangid, “Structural Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 6th Edition,
2003.
2. Punmia.B.C, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, "Theory of structures", Laxmi Publications Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2004 .
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Wang C.K. , “Indeterminate Structural Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010
2. Ghali.A., Nebille and Brown. T.G., "Structural Analysis - A unified classical and matrix approach" Sixth
Edition, SPON press, New York, 2013.
3. Gambhir. M.L., "Fundamentals of Structural Mechanics and Analysis", PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2011.
4. Reddy. C.S., "Basic Structural Analysis", Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
5. BhavaiKatti, S.S, "Structural Analysis – Vol. 1 & Vol. 2", Vikas Publishing Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
6. Vaidyanadhan, R and Perumal, P, “Comprehensive Structural Analysis – Vol.1 & Vol.2”, Laxmi
Publications Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Devdas Menon “Structural Analysis”, Narosha publishing house, New Delhi, 2008
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.ce.memphis.edu/3121/notes/notes.html
2. http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/CV42.html
L T P C
15CE502 DESIGN OF REINFORCED CONCRETE ELEMENTS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop an understanding on the basic concepts in the behavior and design of reinforced concrete
systems and elements using limit state method.
 To introduce the design principles of RC members for shear, bond, and torsion.
 To introduce the concepts in the design of RC Column design.
 To give the knowledge in the concept of RC footings.
 To develop an understanding on the basic concepts in the behavior and design of staircase.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Design flexural members using limit state method under different loading and end conditions.
 Design flexural members of any cross sectional shape for shear, bond, and torsion.
 Design RC columns of any cross section with different end conditions.
 Select and design RC footing of different cross section under various site conditions.
 Choose and design various types of staircase as per the site/building requirements.
80
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND DESIGN OF FLEXURAL MEMBERS 9
Stages in Structural Design – Design philosophies – Introduction to working stress method, ultimate load design
(Principles only) - Limit state method – Comparison – General principles of design – Design of beams and slabs
–Procedure for the analysis of section by strain compatibility method.
UNIT II DESIGN FOR BOND, ANCHORAGE, SHEAR & TORSION 9
Design of flanged beams - Behavior of RC members in bond and Anchorage – Curtailment of reinforcement -
Behavior of RC beams in shear and torsion - Design of RC members for combined bending, shear and torsion.
UNIT III DESIGN OF COLUMNS 9
Columns – Assumptions – Effective length – Classification – Design guidelines – Axially loaded short columns
with lateral ties and helical reinforcement – Columns - uni-axial bending – biaxial bending – Slender columns
subjected to biaxial bending - Standard method of detailing of RC columns.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF FOOTING 9
Foundations - Classification - Design guidelines - Codal provisions -Design of wall footing– Design of axially and
eccentrically loaded square, rectangular and circular footing – Design of combined footing - Standard method of
detailing of RC footing.
UNIT V DESIGN OF STAIRCASE 9
Types of stairs – Design of ordinary stairs, doglegged stairs, Open newel stairs and stairs with stringer beams -
Standard method of detailing of staircase.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. UnnikrishnaPillai, S., DevdasMenon, “Reinforced Concrete Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
Ltd., New Delhi 2009.
2. Sinha, S.N., “Reinforced Concrete Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Varghese, P.C., “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete”, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2010.
2. Krishna Raju, N., “Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi,
2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=105105105
CODE BOOKS:
1. IS 456 – 2000 - Plain and Reinforced Concrete – CODE OF PRACTICE (Fourth Revision)
2. SP 16 - Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS 456:1978.
81
L T P C
15CE503 CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the properties of different cements and the concretes

 To provide knowledge on different mix design methods
 To give exposure on different kinds of admixtures.
 To familiarize the concepts on destructive and non-destructive tests.
 To get exposure on special concretes and concreting methods.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Evaluate the properties of cement and concrete.
 Design different types of concrete mix.
 Employ a suitable admixture in the required field conditions.
 Diagnose the strength and durability of concrete structures with different testing methods.
 Choose suitable environmental friendly materials for making sustainable green concrete.
UNIT I CONCRETE 9
Fresh concrete - Constituent materials – Cement – Manufacturing and chemical composition - Types and grades
- Mechanism of hydration - Properties and tests - Aggregates - Water – Concrete manufacturing stages -
Workability - Concepts and tests; Hardened concrete - Properties and tests
UNIT II MIX DESIGN 9
Concept and principles – Influencing factors - Types and methods - Design practice of ACI, British and IS method
- Variability in test results - Sampling and acceptance criteria - Quality control - Software for mix design.
UNIT III ADMIXTURES 9
Necessity - Types - Chemical admixtures with specific properties - Accelerators - Retarders -Plasticizers and
Super plasticizers - Water proofers - Mineral admixtures - Fly ash - Slag - Micro and Nano silica - Mineral
additives and fillers
UNIT IV DESTRUCTIVE AND NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTS 9
Creep of concrete - Shrinkage and thermal effects on concrete - Permeability - Air and water permeability tests &
methods - Durability of concrete - Corrosion - Remedial measures - Destructive tests - NDT - Rebound Hammer -
UPV - Corrosions Cell test
UNIT V SPECIAL CONCRETES AND CONCRETING METHODS 9
Light weight concrete - Fibre reinforced concrete - Polymer concrete - Ferro-cement - Ready mix concrete- Self
compacting concrete - High strength concrete - High performance concrete - Roller compacted concrete - Bio and
bacterial concrete - Smart concrete - Extreme weather concreting - Vacuum dewatering concreting - Underwater
concreting - Guniting and shotcreting
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
82
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Nevile, A.M., “Properties of Concrete”, Longman Publishers, 2004

2. M.S.Shetty., “Concrete Technology, Theory & Practice”, S.Chand and Co, New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. Kumar Mehta. P, Paulo. J. M. Moteiro, “Concrete – Micro Structure, Properties and Materials”, 3 Edition,
Mcgraw Hill, 2006
2. Gambhir, M.L., “Concrete Technology”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Santhakumar A.R., “Concrete Technology”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2007.
4. Indian standard plain and reinforced concrete - Code of practice, IS: 456 - 2000,(Fourth revision)
5. Indian standard concrete mix proportioning – Guide lines, IS: 10262 - 2009,(First revision)
WEB REFERENCES:
2. http://theconstructor.org/?s=concrete
L T P C
15CE551 CONCRETE AND HIGHWAY ENGINEERING LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the properties of constituent materials, fresh concrete and mix design procedure.
 To learn the tests on hardened concrete and how the different materials shall modify the performance of
concrete.
 To know the properties of bitumen and their suitability.
 To study the various tests carried out on aggregates
 To have an exposure on field tests on bitumen mixes
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Prepare different concrete mixes and check the workability properties.
 Analyze the various tests and properties of cement and concrete.
 Understand quality and grade check on bitumen
 Diagnose the properties of aggregates with different testing methods.
 Check the quality of existing bituminous roads and constituents.
83
TESTS ON AGGREGATES
1. Bulking of Fine Aggregates

2. Specific Gravity and Water Absorption of Coarse Aggregates
3. Bulk Density and Voids of Concrete Aggregates
4. Moisture Content(or Surface Moisture) of Concrete Aggregates
5. Organic Impurities in Aggregates
6. Flakiness Index and Elongation Index
7. Crushing and impact value
8. Stripping and Abrasion
TESTS ON FRESH & HARDENED CONCRETE
1. Slump Cone and Compaction Factor

2. Flow Table and Vee Bee Consistometer
3. Compressive Strength and Split Tensile Strength
4. Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity
5. Rebound Hammer and UPV Test on Concrete
TEST ON BITUMEN
1. Penetration and Softening Point

2. Density and Specific Gravity
3. Flash and Fire Point
4. Viscosity and Ductility
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Reference Books
1. M.L.Gambhir, NehaJamwal, “Building and Construction Materials – Testing and Quality

Control(LabManual)”,McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014
2. M.S.Shetty, “Concrete Technology, Theory & Practice”, S.Chand and Co, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Khanna,S.K, Justo,C.E.G.“Highway material testing (LaboratoryManual)”, NemChand & Bros, Roorkee
(U.P), Revised Edition, 2009.
84
L T P C
15CE552 COMPUTER AIDED BUILDING DRAWING II
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the AutoCAD workspace and user interface.
 To demonstrate an understanding of advanced tools like blocks and layers etc.,
 To explore the fundamental concepts and workflows for creating 3Dmodels using AutoCAD
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
 Use the precision drafting tools to develop accurate technical drawings.
 Get familiarized with advanced AutoCAD tools like layers and blocks etc.,
 Create solid primitives, solid or surface models from cross-sectional geometry, or composite models
from multiple solid models.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
PART A
 Planning a Project - Building layouts, landscaping, plans, elevations, sectional views etc.
 Buildings with load bearing walls – Flat roofand Pitched roof
 Buildings with Framed structure.
 Industrial buildings – North light roof structures – Trusses
 Creation of blocks and Layers

PART B
 Introduction to 3D - Isometric Drawings
 Wire-frame Models
 Surfaces / Regions
 Creation of 3D model of a simple residential building
 Perspective view of one and two storey buildings
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. George Omura, Brian C. Benton, “Mastering AutoCAD 2014 and AutoCAD LT2014”, Wiley – An Autodesk
Official Press, 2013.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.mycadsite.com/tutorials/
85
L T P C
15HS541 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION SKILLS LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
Course Objectives
 To enable the students of engineering and technology attain effective professional communication skills
 To train the aspirants to get through interviews successfully
 To make them successful corporate
 To upgrade the language proficiency level of engineering students
Course Outcomes:
Students of Engineering and technology will be able to
 attain effective communication skills
 enhance business communication
 acquire language proficiency
 face interviews
Vocabulary Building 9
Synonyms & antonyms, grammar: error spotting exercise, listening exercise, reading comprehension exercises,
sequencing the jumbled sentences, cloze test
Business Correspondence 9
Report Writing: types of Reports- Project report – report format, Preparation of a report based on the newspaper
article. Writing memos, notice, agenda and circular.
Group Discussion 9
Group Discussion-an introduction, Sample videos on GD and appraisal, Participation in Group Discussion-
Persuasive skills, Negotiating ability, team skills and leadership Quality.
Interview Skills and Soft Skills 9
Resume designing, Online Resume, Successful interview skills, mock interviews, and Motivation – self-image –
goal setting – managing changes – corporate etiquette, body language, and power dressing- time management –
stress management, Career and life planning.
Theatre Art and an Introduction to International Examinations 9
Master of Ceremony, Welcome Address, Role play activities, dramatics, An Introduction to International English
Language Testing System (IELTS) – Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL), Cambridge Advanced
English(CAE)– Graduate Record Examination (GRE) – Civil Service (Language related)
TOTAL: 45 Periods
Reference books
1. Berry, Thomas Elliott. Most Common Mistakes in English Usage. New Delhi: TMH Publication Company
Limited, 2012.
2. Thorpe,E and Heaton,S. Objective English. Ed: Pearson Education, II Edition,
New Delhi: 2007.
3. Bhatnagar, R.P. English for Competitive Examination. 3 ed. Macmillan, New Delhi: 2012.
4. Bhatnagar, R.P., NITINBhatnagar and Mamta. Communicative English for Engineers & Professionals.
Noida: Pearson Education, 2010.
5. Rizvi, Asharaf M. Effective Technical Communication. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
Limited, 2007.
86
VI Semester
L T P C
15CE601 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS II
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To analyse statically indeterminate structures by imposing boundary conditions on flexibility matrix.

 To formulate the element stiffness matrix and assemble the structure stiffness matrix for solving
indeterminate problems.
 To understand the basics of finite element method and its application to structural analysis.
 To introduce the importance of plastic analysis to calculate the collapse loads for beams and frames.
 To analyse the suspension bridges and space truss.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course the students will be to
 Analyse the statically indeterminate structures using flexibility method.
 Analyse the statically indeterminate structures using stiffness method.
 Apply the finite element method to structural analysis.
 Employ plastic analysis to calculate the collapse loads for beams and frames.
 Determine the member forces in suspension bridges and space truss.
UNIT I FLEXIBILITY METHOD 9+3
Equilibrium and compatibility – Determinate vs. Indeterminate structures – Indeterminacy – Primary structure –
Compatibility conditions – Analysis of indeterminate pin-jointed plane frames, continuous beams, rigid jointed
plane frames (with redundancy restricted to two).
UNIT II STIFFNESS METHOD 9+3
Element and global stiffness matrices – Analysis of continuous beams – Co-ordinate transformations – Rotation
matrix – Transformations of stiffness matrices, load vectors and displacements vectors – Analysis of pin-jointed
plane frames and rigid frames (with redundancy limited to two)
UNIT III FINITE ELEMENT METHOD 9+3
Introduction – Discretization of a structure – Displacement functions – Truss element – Beam element – Plane
stress and plane strain - Triangular elements
UNIT IV PLASTIC ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURES 9+3
Statically indeterminate axial problems – Beams in pure bending – Plastic moment of resistance – Plastic
modulus – Shape factor – Load factor – Plastic hinge and mechanism – Plastic analysis of indeterminate beams
and frames – Upper and lower bound theorems
UNIT V SPACE AND CABLE STRUCTURES 9+3
Analysis of Space trusses using method of tension coefficients – Beams curved in plan - Suspension cables –
suspension bridges with two and three hinged stiffening girders
87
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Punmia.B.C., Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, “Theory of Structures”, Laxmi Publications, 2004.
2. Vaidyanathan, R. and Perumal, P., “Comprehensive structural Analysis – Vol. I & II”, Laxmi Publications,
New Delhi, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ghali.A, Nebille,A.M. and Brown,T.G. “Structural Analysis” A unified classical and Matrix approach” 6th edition.
Spon Press, London and New York, 2013.
2. Coates R.C, Coutie M.G. and Kong F.K., “Structural Analysis”, ELBS and Nelson, 1990.
3. Pandit G.S. & Gupta S.P. "Structural Analysis – A Matrix Approach", Tata McGraw Hill 2004.
4. William Weaver Jr. & James M. Gere, "Matrix Analysis of Framed Structures", CBS Publishers and
Distributors, Delhi, 2004.
5. Gambhir. M.L., "Fundamentals of Structural Mechanics and Analysis"., PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2011.
6. Negi L.S. &Jangid R.S., “Structural Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2003.
7. BhavaiKatti, S.S, “Structural Analysis – Vol. 1 and Vol. 2”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2008.
EXTENSIVE READING
1. DevdasMenon“Advanced Structural Analysis”, Narosha publishing house, New Delhi, 2008.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.ce.memphis.edu/3121/notes/notes.html
2. http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/CV42.html
L T P C
15CE602 DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To expose limit state design concepts and design of bolted and welded joints.
 To provide knowledge on design tension members.
 To get familiar with compression member design.
 To have knowledge on design of beams.
 To Gain knowledge on design of industrial structures.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
 Be proficient in limit state design concepts and connection design.
 Design of tension members.
 Execute compression member design
 Design steel beams
 Carry out Steel design real projects and live examples
88
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO STEEL STRUCTURES AND DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS 9
Steel Structures – Limit State Design Philosophy – Working Stress Design Philosophy – Review of IS:800 – 1984
and IS 800 - 2007 – Partial Safety factors – Load combinations . Design of Bolted Connections – Welded
Connections – Prying action – Eccentric connections.
UNIT II TENSION MEMBERS 9
Design of tension members – Calculation of Net Section including lag effects – Staggered Holes and Block Shear
– Design of tension splice
UNIT III COMPRESSION MEMBERS 9
Buckling Class - Flexural Buckling and Flexural –Torsional Buckling - Effective length factor - Column Formula
Design of Compression member - Strut – Stanchion – Column Splicing - Built up Columns – Lacing and
Battening
UNIT IV FLEXURAL MEMBERS 9
Classification of the section: Plastic, Compact, Semi Compact, Slender- Laterally restrained beams – laterally
Unrestrained Beams – Lateral Torsional Buckling –Effects of restraints and Effective length- Beam columns
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES AND PLATE GIRDERS 9
Elements of roof trusses – Purlins – Loads on trusses – Estimation of Wind Loads on Structures –Design of
Gantry Girder – Design of Plate Girder
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. N. Subramanian,” Design of Steel Structures: Theory and Practice”, Oxford Publications 2011.
2. Duggal, “Design of Steel Structures”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. S.S. Bhavikatti ,”Design of Steel Structures”, I. K. International Pvt Ltd, 2009.

2. Gaylord, E.H., Gaylord, N.C., and Stallmeyer, J.E., “Design of Steel Structures”, 3rd edition,
McGraw-Hill Publications, 1992
3. Negi L.S.” Design of Steel Structures”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. INSDAG, “Teaching Resources for Structural Steel Design – Vol. I, II & III”, Kolkatta.
2. Karuna Moy Ghosh, “Analysis and Design Practice of Steel Structures” 2012
WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://engineering.purdue.edu/~ahvarma/CE%20470/
2. http://www.learnerstv.com/Free-engineering-Video-lectures-ltv323- Page1.html
3. http://peer.berkeley.edu/~yang/courses/ce248/CE248_LN_Floor_vibra tions.pdf
CODE BOOKS:
1. IS 800 – 2007 - Indian Standard General Construction in Steel – Code of Practice.
2. IS 800 – 1984 - Indian Standard General Construction in Steel – Code of Practice.
3. SP (6) - ISI Handbook for Structural Engineers – Structural Steel Sections (1964)
4. IS 875 – 1987 Code of Practice for Design Loads (Other Than Earthquake) For Buildings and Structures.
a) IS 875 (Part 1) 1987 (Dead Loads - Unit Weights Of Building Materials And Stored Materials)
89
b) IS 875 ( Part2 ) 1987 (Imposed Loads)
c) IS 875 (part – 3) 1987 ( Wind Loads )
d) IS 875 (Part – 4 )1987 (Snow Loads)
e) IS 875 (Part – 5) 1987 (Special Loads and Combinations)
L T P C
15CE603 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the principles of water supply system and planning the sources, conveyance of water.
 To get knowledge in treatment of water.
 To impart the knowledge inprinciples behind the distribution of water and water supply to a building.
 To grasp the principles of collection, conveyance and treatment of wastewater.
 To know the sludge management and disposal of wastewater.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Recognize the water supply system, water sources and water quality characteristics and standards,
Intake structures, pipes and Pumps.
 Select the treatment units for water.
 Design the Water distribution water & Network design and House service and plumbing systems.
 Appraise wastewater collection system, Pumps and various wastewater treatment units.
 Analyse the concepts of wastewater disposal, House drainage and plumbing systems.
UNIT I WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS – SOURCE & CONVEYANCE 9
Planning - Objectives – Population forecasting – Design period – Water demand– Sources of water – Source
selection – Water quality parameters & significance – Standards – Intake structures – Conveyance – Pipes –
Mains design – Laying, jointing & testing of pipes – Pumps - Pump selection – Appurtenances
UNIT II WATER TREATMENT 9
Objectives - Unit operations and processes - Principles, functions design and drawing of Chemical feeding, Flash
mixers, flocculators, sedimentation tanks and sand filters - Disinfection- Residue Management - Construction and
Operation & Maintenance aspects of Water Treatment Plants.
UNIT III ADVANCED WATER TREATMENT 9
Principles and functions of Aeration - Iron and manganese removal, Defluoridation and demineralization -Water
softening - Desalination - Membrane Systems - Recent advances.
UNIT IV WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SUPPLY TO BUILDINGS 9
Requirements of water distribution -Components -Service reservoirs -Functions and drawings - Network design -
Appurtenances -operation and maintenance -Leak detection, Methods. Principles of design of water supply in
buildings -House service connection -Fixtures and fittings -Systems of plumbing and drawings of types of
plumbing.
90
UNIT V SEWERAGE SYSTEM 9
Sources of waste water – Quantity of sanitary sewage – Waste water characteristics and significance – Sewers –
Types - Laying, jointing and testing of sewers – Appurtenances.
Selection of unit operation and process – Sludge -Treatment and disposal – Digester and Biogas recovery –
Sewage farming - Sewage disposal standards- On land – Disposal into water bodies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Garg, S.K., “Environmental Engineering I & II”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2013
2. Modi, P.N., “Environmental Engineering I & II”, Standard Book House, Delhi, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, CPHEEO, Government of India, New Delhi, 1999
2. Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment, CPHEEO, Government of India, New Delhi, 1993
3. Hand book on Water Supply and Drainage, SP35, B.I.S., New Delhi, 1987
4. Metcalf and Eddy, M.C., “Wastewater Engineering – Treatment & Reuse”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publications,
New Delhi, 2003
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Punmia,B.C.,Ashok K Jain and Arun K Jain,Water Supply Engg., Laxmi Publications(P)Ltd., New Delhi, 2005
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.larsenviro.com/
L T P C
15CE651 CIVIL SOFTWARE APPLICATION LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students to develop knowledge on using software packages for analysis of structures.
 To enable the students well verse with making of spread-sheets for structural design and concrete mix design.
 Ability to develop network models for project management
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this lab course the students will be able to
 Proficiently use the software packages for structural analysis.
 Proficiently use Excel to undertake engineering calculations.
 Proficiently project management software packages.
91
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
ANALYSIS USING STANDARD SOFTWARE PACKAGE
 Analysis, design and detailing of Trusses.
 Analysis, design and detailing of continuous Beams.
 Analysis of 2D and 3D frames.

DEVELOPMENT OF PROGRAM USING SOFTWARE
 Design of singly and doubly reinforced beams
 Design of one way slab and two way slab
 Design of columns
 Design of isolated rectangular footing
 Concrete mix design for M25 and M30 grade.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT
 Planning and Scheduling for a construction project
.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Krishnamoorthy C.S., and Rajeev.S., “Computer Aided Design and Analytical tools”, Narosa., 2000.Krishna
Raju, N., “Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi, 2003.
IS CODES:
1. IS 456:2000 Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete

2. IS 875(1-5):1987 Code of Practice for Design Loads (Other than Earthquake) for Buildings and Structures.
3. SP (16): 1980 Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS: 456-1978.
4. IS 800:2007 Code of Practice for General Construction in steel.
5. SP6: Part 1:1964 Handbook for Structural Engineers.
L T P C
15CE652 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the principles of sampling and preservation of water and wastewater.
 To convey the principles of testing of water and wastewater.
 To get the idea in testing bleaching powder and chlorinated water
 To provide analyzing methods for water and wastewater.
 To procure knowledge in detection of gases by using analyzers
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Acquire the sampling and preservation methods of water and wastewater.
 Test the water and wastewater and their different characteristics as per standards
92
 Test bleaching powder and find the disinfectant percentage in chlorinated water.
 Do the different water and wastewater analysis as per standards
 Detect and quantify the gases by using gas analyzers.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
A. Tests on Water and Waste water (IS 10500:2012)
 Sampling and Preservation of water and wastewater samples
 Physical Characteristics
1. Turbidity and Temperature
2. Odour and Colour (Demonstration only)
 Chemical Characteristics
1. pH and Dissolved Oxygen
2. Dissolved and Suspended Solids
3. Volatile and Fixed Solids
4. Hardness
5. Chlorides and Sulphate
6. B.O.D. and C.O.D. test
7. Ammonia nitrogen
 Biological Characteristics
1. Introduction to Bacteriological Analysis (Demonstration only)
2. Heavy Metal analysis using Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer (Demonstration only)
B. Test for finding the Optimum Coagulant Dosage (Alum) for given water sample
C. Test for Bleaching Powder
1. Residual Chlorine
2. Available Chlorine
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Garg, S.K., “Environmental Engineering I & II”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2013
2. Modi, P.N., “Environmental Engineering I & II”, Standard Book House, Delhi, 2012
3. Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, CPHEEO, Government of India, New Delhi, 1999
4. Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment, CPHEEO, Government of India, New Delhi, 1993
5. Hand book on Water Supply and Drainage, SP35, B.I.S., New Delhi, 1987
6. Metcalf and Eddy, M.C., “Waste water Engineering–Treatment & Reuse”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publications,
New Delhi, 2003
93
VII Semester
L T P C
15CE701 ESTIMATION AND QUANTITY SURVEYING
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the knowledge on basic concepts related to estimate preparation.
 To analyse the rate of a work item according to the specification
 To identify various items of work in a building & calculate their quantities using appropriate methods.
 To understand the concepts behind the preparation of estimate of the various civil engineering works.
 To understand the terminologies and concepts behind the valuation of properties, depreciation and time
value of money
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Prepare the estimate corresponding to the required specification
 Arrive rates of various work items and get familiarized with tendering and contract process.
 Calculate the quantities of various items of work in a building by entering them in a standard
measurement sheet.
 Perform quantity take-offs for various work items using various methods of processing dimensions
 Predict the value of properties considering various influencing factors.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ESTIMATION AND SPECIFICATION 9+3
General introduction to estimation–purpose of estimates - Types of estimates – Units of measurements for works
and materials – Degree of accuracy in measurements - Purpose and basic principles of General and Detailed
Specifications- detailed specifications for various items of work– Report accompanying the estimate.
UNIT II RATE ANALYSIS, TENDERS & CONTRACTS 9+3

Data- lead statement - Schedule of rates - Standard data book - Lump sum provision –Task/out turn of work-Rate
analysis for various work items - Tender and process of tendering – Contracts – Types of contracts – Arbitration
and legal requirements.
UNIT III BUILDING ESTIMATE 9+3
Taking out quantity – Measurement, abstract sheets and recording of measurements - Centre line method and
Long wall - short wall method – Detailed estimate of masonry buildings and R.C.C works - Preparation of Bar
Bending Schedule – Various types of arches – Calculation of brick work and RCC works in arches – Deductions
for openings - Preparation of bills of quantities Approximate estimates – Case studies.
UNIT IV ESTIMATE OF OTHER STRUCTURES 9+3
Industrial sheds- steel trusses - Water supply and sanitary works - septic tank, soak pit, manhole - Roads – earth
work, pitching of slopes, hill roads-estimation of R.C.C. slab culvert, pipe culvert- Irrigation works - canals,
aqueducts.
UNIT V VALUATION 9+3
Purpose of valuation – Types – Book value – Market value – Salvage value – Scrap value – Depreciation –
Obsolescence – Sinking fund – Land valuation – Mortgage & Lease – Problems on valuation – Annuity –
Definition & types only - Fixation of rent – Outgoing – Gross & Net income – Years’ Purchase – Capital cost –
Standard rent.
L : 45, T : 15 TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
94
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dutta .B.N, “Estimating and Costing in Civil Engineering Theory and Practice,” UBS Publishers Pvt. Ltd.,
2009.
2. Patil .B.S , “Civil Engineering Contracts and Estimates”, Universities press(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Birdie .G.S, “A Text Book on Estimating and Costing”, DhanpatRai Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
2. Chakraborti .M, “Estimating ,Costing, Specification and Valuation in Civil Engineering”, M.Chakraborty
Publication,2006.
3. Banerjee.D.N. “J A Parks Principles And Practice Of Valuation”, Eastern Law House Private Ltd., New Delhi,
1998
4. Jagannathan .G, “Getting More at Less Cost“, - The Value Engineering Way, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
1995.
5. Course notes on “Estimation and costing”, State Institute of Vocational Education Andhra Pradesh,
Hyderabad. First Edition: 2006.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://drsmau.in/material.php
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-%20Guwahati/cpm/index.html
L T P C
15CE702 CONSTRUCTION PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the necessity of the planning in the diverse construction projects.
 To know the appropriate techniques used for scheduling the resources.
 To have exposure on various cost control methods and accounting.
 To study the quality control and monitoring techniques
 To make awareness among the learners about management information system.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the requirement of planning techniques exercised in the construction projects.
 Choose suitable scheduling technique for the particular project.
 Practice modern cost account systems and control techniques adopted.
 Employ the advanced management tools for quality control and monitoring towards speedy and
guaranteed projects.
 Work with MIS for large projects.
UNIT I CONSTRUCTION PLANNING 9
Necessity - Basic concepts - Phases and stages of project planning - Types of construction plans for projects -
Planning for materials, labour and equipment - Defining activities and precedence relationships - Estimating
95
activity durations and resource requirements - Program for progress of work and control - Bar and Milestone
charts - Uses and drawbacks - Terminology - Coding systems
UNIT II MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES 9
Evolution of networks - Inter-relationship of events and activities - Fundamental rules for network construction -
Critical path method - Program Evaluation and Review Technique - Probability of project completion time -
Precedence networks - Scheduling for activity-on-node networks - Resource oriented scheduling - Scheduling
with resource constraints - Improving scheduling process - Time-cost relationships – Crashing and time/cost
trade-offs - Introduction to application software
UNIT III COST CONTROL & DEPARTMENTAL ACCOUNTING PROCEDURE 9
Costs and estimates associated with construction - Means of financing and assistance - Project budget - Cost
control system, cost accounts and coding - Financial accounting systems - Project cash flows - Time value of
money - Capital investment decision - Organization of PWD - Duties and responsibilities - Accounting procedure
- Administrative and technical sanction - Payment of bills - Imprest account - Temporary advance account - Cash
book - Work register - M-book – Stores - Work charged establishment -Nominal muster roll - Daily labour reports
UNIT IV QUALITY CONTROL, MONITORING AND TRAINING 9
Importance and elements of quality - Organization for quality control - Total quality control - Quality control
circles - Quality assurance techniques - Statistical quality control with sampling by attributes & variables -
Training & development - Identification of training needs - Training Calendar - Outsourcing for training - Methods
of training - On job, in plant and in house training- Evaluation of training - Training to overcome deficiencies -
Performance appraisal - Documentation.
UNIT V MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM 9
Types of project information - Accuracy and use of information - Computerized organization - Management
information system - Organizing information in databases – Types of databases - Centralized database
management systems - Databases and application programs - Information transfer and flow.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Chitkara, K.K. “Construction Project Management Planning, Scheduling and Control”, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2010.
2. Chris Hendrickson and Tung Au, “Project Management for Construction – Fundamentals Concepts for
Owners, Engineers, Architects and Builders”, Prentice Hall, Pitsburgh, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Moder.J., C.Phillips and Davis, “Project Management with CPM, PERT and Precedence Diagramming”, Van
Nostrand Reinhold Co., Third Edition, 1983.
2. Willis., E.M., “Scheduling Construction projects”, John Wiley and Sons 1986.
3. Halpin,D.W., “Financial and cost concepts for construction Management”, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
1985.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-%20Guwahati /cpm/index.html
2. http://theconstructor.org/?s=construction+planning
96
L T P C
15CE752 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAFTING LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To demonstrate a basic knowledge of CAD and the ability to use appropriate technique and procedures
for the care and use of hardware and software to produce a series of orthographic and isometric
drawings.
 To demonstrate an understanding of various commands and command functions.
 To explain about the detailing of various RC and Steel structures.
 To understand the importance of developing precise basic entities.
 To understand the importance of detailing for various structural components using computer techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Gain knowledge for the design and detail the different types of retaining walls and will be able to apply
the theoretical concepts in the real world construction.
 Understand the importance of measuring systems and the measuring instruments involved in drafting
and related fields.
 Design and draw the detailing of various types of water tanks (RC and STEEL) along with the staging
and foundation.
 Plot the drawing using scaling technique as per industry requirement.
 Design and draw the detailing involved in the plate girder.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
RC STRUCTURE
Design and Detailing of
 Cantilever retaining wall
 Counterfort retaining wall
 Dog Legged Staircase
 Rectangular underground water tank
 Circular overhead water tank

STEEL STRUCTURE
Design and Detailing of
 Pressed steel tank
 Rectangular steel tank
 Hemispherical bottom steel tank
 Plate Girder
 Truss with Purlin
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
97
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Ltd., New Delhi 2003.
2003.
3. Krishnamurthy, D., “Structural Design & Drawing – Vol. II”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, Delhi 1992.
4. Krishnamurthy, D., “Structural Design & Drawing – Vol. III Steel Structures”, CBS Publishers & Distributors,
New Delhi 1992.
5. Dr.B.C. Punmia, Ashok kumarjain and Arunkumarjain “Comprehensive design of steel structures”, Laxmi
nd
Publications, 2 edition, 1998.
IS CODES:
1. IS 456:2000 - Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete

2. IS 875(1-5):1987 - Code of Practice for Design Loads (Other than Earthquake) for Buildings and Structures.
3. SP (16): 1980 - Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS: 456-1978.
4. IS 800:2007 and IS 800:1984 - Codes of Practice for General Construction in steel.
5. SP6: Part 1:1964 - Handbook for Structural Engineers.
6. IS 3370: 2009 - Concrete structures for storage of liquids – Code of practice
7. IS 804: 1967 (reaffirmed in 2008) - Specifications for Rectangular steel tanks.
8. IS 805:1968 (reaffirmed in 2008) - Code of practice for use of steel in gravity water tanks
98
CORE ELECTIVES
V SEMESTER
L T P C
15CEC01 ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the necessity of adopting the basic green building concepts
 To motivate to use the industrial wastes and by-products in the construction fields
 To explore a new alternative building materials
 To provide exposure on sustainable building blocks.
 To popularize the cost effective construction techniques
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Realize the environmental issues related to construction materials
 Employ the pozzolanic materials in construction
 Utilize alternative construction materials
 Develop building blocks from locally available materials
 Apply new construction techniques.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on Construction Materials
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS ON GREEN MATERIALS AND BUILDINGS 9
Introduction to Global Warming - Sources of global warming - Green buildings: Concepts - Rating – Rating by
various agencies - Materials used and their Efficiency - Comparison of conventional & green buildings -
Environment friendly and cost effective building technologies - Buildings with cost and energy efficient roofing
systems - Building in different climatic regions
UNIT II LIME - POZZOLANIC BINDERS 9
Lime stone - Pozzolana: Red mud, Powdered burnt clay(Surkhi), Metakaolin- Industrial wastes and by-products:
Rice Husk and Bark Ash, Fly ash, Silica fume, Micro silica, Nano silica, GGBS - Other mineral products: Lime -
Pozzolanic binders: Process - Properties and uses - mortars with combination of burnt clay and pozzolana -
Strength - Field practical aspects and implications.
UNIT III ALTERNATIVE BUILDING MATERIALS 9
Agro wastes and Biomass resources: Straw bale, Bamboo, Chemically treated thatch - Engineered Cementitious
Composites: Fibre Reinforced Cement Composites, Fibre Reinforced Polymer Composites, Geo-textiles and
Geo-synthetics - Masonry mortars: Structural masonry, Ferro-cement and Ferro-concrete, Glenium concrete -
Materials for nuclear containment structures - Crumb modified bitumen rubber - Foams and Light - Weight
materials –Introduction to smart materials
UNIT IV BUILDING BLOCKS 9
Aerocon and light weight blocks - Stones and laterite blocks - Burnt bricks - Solid and hollow concrete blocks -
Precast paver blocks - Burnt clay hallow blocks - Stabilized soil and mud blocks - Concepts, processes, sizes and
99
properties - Influence of density and binder content on strength - Stone masonry blocks - Cob rammed earth,
Earthen finishes, Earth plasters and floors - Modular contained earth - Earth bag construction
UNIT V ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES 9
Precast Techniques - Alternatives for wall construction - Types of walls - Alternative roofing systems - Concepts
- Micro concrete roofing(MCR) tiles - Roofing: asbestos sheets and G.I sheets - Tubes and light weight roofing -
Filler slab roofs - Composite beam and panel roofs - Ferro cement wall panels and roofing channel - Masonry
domes and vaults - Brick masonry domes - Brick masonry vaults - lateral thrust.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. K.S Jagadish, B.V. Venkatarama Reddy, K.S. NanjundaRao., “Alternative Building Materials and
Technologies”, New Age International (P) Ltd Publishers, 2007, Reprint 2014.
2. Neville,A.M.,“Properties of Concrete”, Pearson Education Asia (P) Ltd, England, 2000.
3. Kumar Mehta, P and Paulo J M Monteiro, “Concrete Microstructure, Properties and Materials”, McGraw Hill,
2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1. Shan Somayaji, “Civil Engineering Materials”, 2 Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2001.
rd
2. Michael S. Mamlouk, John P. Zaniewski, “Materials for Civil and Construction Engineers”, 3 Edition,
Prentice Hall Inc., 2001.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Michael F. Ashby, D.R.H. Jones., “Engineering Materials 1: An Introduction to Properties, Applications and
Design” Elsevier Publications, 2005.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.theconstructor.org
L T P C
15CEC02 ADVANCED SURVEYING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the basic principles and methods of hydrographic surveying.

 To get introduced to the concept of astronomy in locating a celestial body.
 To impart knowledge on the basics of aerial photogrammetry.
 To learn on the principles of Electronic distance measurements, Total station and GPS.
 To give exposure to advanced surveying techniques involved such as remote sensing, GIS, etc.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Apply the right method in locating and plotting of soundings.
 Locate a celestial body using different co-ordinate systems in astronomical surveying.
 Interpret and scale aerial photographs.
 Apply total station and EDM in distance measurement and traversing
 Adopt advanced surveying techniques over conventional methods in the field of civil engineering.
100
Knowledge on Basic of Surveying
UNIT I HYDROGRAPHIC SURVEYING 9
Shore line survey - River survey- Sounding-Gauges & Equipment - Sounding Rods and Lead Lines- Sounding
Chain and lead- Sounding Machine, Fathometers, Signals, Sextants- Methods of sounding- Location of
soundings- Plotting of sounding-The Three point problem-Mechanical, Graphical& Analytical methods.
UNIT II ASTRONOMICAL SURVEYING 9
Celestial sphere - astronomical terms and definitions - motion of sun and stars - apparent altitude and corrections
- celestial co-ordinate systems - spherical trigonometry – latitude and longitude of a place - field observations and
calculations for azimuth- Nautical almanac.
UNIT III AERIAL PHOTOGRAMMETRY 9
Photogrammetry- types and geometry of aerial photograph- Photographic scale- Flying heights and altitude-
Relief and tilt displacement – corrections – Flight Planning-Layout of Photography.
UNIT IV EDM, TOTAL STATION, GPS SURVEYING 9
Electromagnetic distance measurement (EDM) – principle – types – Total station- working principle, GPS Basics
– system overview – working principle of GPS – Satellite ranging –calculating position- GPS Survey- types-
Kinematic and static survey techniques.
UNIT V BASICS OF REMOTE SENSING & GIS 9
Introduction – Historical Background - Electromagnetic Radiation (EMR) - Electromagnetic Spectrum -. Airborne

Platforms-Sensors -Types-optical Remote Sensing ,Microwave remote sensing-Applications of Remote sensing-
LIDAR,GIS-History of Development - Components of GIS- Data models – Raster and Vector data structures- –
Advanced applications of GIS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Satheesh Gopi, “Advanced Surveying”, Pearson Education, 2007

3. SatheeshGopi, “The Global Positioning System and Surveying using GPS”, Tata McGraw, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
2. Bossler, J.D., “Manual of Geospatial Science and Technology”, Taylor and Francis,2002.
3. Burrough, P.A. and McDonnell, R.A., “Principles of Geographic Information System”, Oxford University
Press, 2000.
4. Duggal R.K, “Surveying” Vol. I and II, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.
WEB REFERENCE:
101
L T P C
15CEC03 GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To get exposed to various methods of dewatering techniques
 To be familiar with compaction methods and influencing factors
 To Understand about consolidation and vertical drains
 To distribute Knowledge about various stabilization techniques and its applications
 To learn various strengthening materials and techniques of soil
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Choose the suitable dewatering techniques
 Identify the soil and select suitable compaction method
 Monitor consolidation of soil
 Apply suitable techniques for improving the soil properties in the field
 Use various types of techniques to strengthen the soil
Knowledge on Soil Mechanics & Foundation Engineering
UNIT I DEWATERING 9
Introduction – Ground improvement – scope – necessity – New Technologies – Basic concepts – drainage
methods – ground water lowering by well points – Deep well – Vacuum and electro–osmosis methods.
UNIT II COMPACTION 9
Introduction – compaction mechanics – field procedure – Surface compaction – selection – compaction quality
control – Vibration methods – vibro-compaction, blasting, vibratory probe, vibratory compactors – vibro-
displacement compaction – displacement piles – vibroflotation – Sand compaction piles – stone columns – heavy
tamping.
UNIT III CONSOLIDATION AND VERTICAL DRAINS 9
Introduction – compressibility of soil and consolidation – preloading and surcharge fills – monitoring of
compression – vertical drains – principle, design, types, construction, efficiency and applications.
UNIT IV SOIL STABILIZATION 9
Introduction – Stabilization methods – mechanical stabilization, chemical stabilization-cement, lime, bitumen –

electrical stabilization – stabilization of expansive clays – Prewetting.
UNIT V MISCELLANEOUS METHODS 9
Grouting and injection – aspects, procedure and applications – geosynthetics – types, properties and applications
– soil reinforcement – thermal methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
102
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Klaus Kirsch and Alan Bell “Ground improvement” Taylor and Francis Group, 2013.
2. C.A.Raison, “Ground and Soil Improvement” Thomas Telford Publishing, London, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. M.P.Moseley and K.Kirsch, “Ground Improvement” Spon press, New york, 2004.
2. Purushothama Raj, P., “Ground Improvement Techniques”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
3. Reuben H. Karol, “Chemical grouting and soil stabilization” Taylor and Francis, 2005.
4. Mittal.S, “An Introduction to Ground Improvement Engineering”, Medtech Publisher, 2013.
EXTENSIVE READING
1. Coduto, D.P. “Geotechnical Engineering – Principles and Practices”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd. New
Delhi, 2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/downloads/105108075/
2. http://ebookily.net/pdf/ground-improvement-techniques-notes
3. http://www.cdeep.iitb.ac.in/nptel/Civil%20Engineering/Foundation_Engineering/Course_home36.1.html
L T P C
15CEC04 HYDROPOWER ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide knowledge on basic aspects of hydropower
 To understand various types of hydropower plants
 To acquire knowledge on design of various elements of power
 To gain information on site selection for construction of dams
 To realize the financial implications of hydropower plants
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the importance of hydropower potential
 Select a suitable type of hydropower required for the site
 Design a power canal based on power requirement
 Gain knowledge on selection of site for a dam
 Understand the economic aspects of hydropower plants
Knowledge on Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics
103
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Development of Water Power - Estimation of Hydropower potential - Comparison of hydro, Thermal and Nuclear
power - Sources of energy - status of hydropower - Advantages of hydropower - Place of hydropower in power
system - Analysis of stream flow and demand - Flow duration curve - firm power, Secondary power - Load and
Load duration curves - Load factor, etc
UNIT II TYPES OF HYDRO POWER PLANTS 9
Basic features of Hydropower plants - Classification of hydro power plants - Run-of-river plants - General lay out
of run of river plants - Valley dam plants - storage and pondage - Examples - High head diversion plants -
Diversion Canal Plants - Pumped storage plants - Tidal power plants
UNIT III WATER CONVEYANCE SYSTEM 9
Power Canals- Alignment, Design of Power canals – Flumes - Covered conduits and Tunnels – Penstocks -
Alignment, types of penstocks -Design criteria of penstocks - Economic Diameter of penstocks - Water hammer -
Anchor blocks- Surge tanks- Types - Surge analysis - Types of valves
UNIT IV DAMS & SPILLWAYS 9
Selection of site -, Preliminary Investigations - Final Investigations - Types of Dams - Rigid Dams - Gravity dams -
Arch and buttress dams - Basic principles of design and details of construction – Earthen dams, Design
considerations - spillways – Types - Spillway gates, Design of stilling basins
UNIT V POWER HOUSE DETAILS 9
Fore bay – Intakes - General layout of power house and arrangement of hydropower units - Underground Power
stations – Advantages – Ventilations - Transmission systems - General introduction - Financial implications of
Hydro Power plants.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dandekar and Sharma, “Water power Engineering “ , Vikas Publishing House Pvt .Ltd 2009
2. Madanmohan das, Mimi Das sakia, “Irrigation And Water Power Engineering”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. 2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
3. R S Varshney, “Hydropower structures “, Volume III, Jain book depot, New Delhi , 2014
4. Dr. Darde P N, “Treatise on Hydropower Engineering edition” JBC Press 2012
104
L T P C
15CEC05 AIRPORTS,DOCKS AND HARBOUR ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the fundamentals related to the Planning of Airport components.
 To provide knowledge on various airport facilities such as runway Geometric Design.
 To create awareness about the various processes involved in the Air Traffic Control process.
 To impart knowledge on various planning standards related to harbour construction.
 To provide knowledge on various components of harbour and ports.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Plan the locations of the components of the airports.
 Design the airport components and their geometric design.
 Perform the air traffic control of aircrafts.
 Plan and locate the components of the harbour.

Design the harbour components such as breakwaters and docks.
Knowledge on Highway Engineering
UNIT I AIRPORT PLANNING 9
Aircraft characteristics and its influence on airport planning. Topographical and geographical features-air traffic
characteristics. New airports- factors affecting airport site selection. Airport obstruction-Zoning laws-classification
of obstruction, imaginary surfaces.
UNIT II AIRPORT GEOMETRIC DESIGN 9
Runway orientation- wind rose diagrams - basic runway length-Corrections for runway length- airport
classification - airport capacity- runway configuration- taxiway design- geometric standards-exit taxiways. Holding
aprons - location of terminal buildings - aircraft hangers.
UNIT III AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL 9
Airport marking and lighting of runways - taxiways and approach areas. Terminals - planning of terminal building.
Apron - size of the gate position - number of gate position - aircraft parking system. Air traffic control- air traffic
control aids: Enroute aids - landing aids. Airport Drainage: requirements and advantages.
UNIT IV HARBOUR PLANNING 9
Wind-Waves-tides-Selection of site-draft conditions - entrance and channel requirement- Harbours-Ports-

Difference between port and harbour. Ship characteristics - their influence on ports management – operations.
Harbour layouts.
UNIT V HARBOUR COMPONENTS 9
Harbour components - break waters-types-special blocks-tetrapod – hexapod – tribars. Jetties- wharves- piers -
transit sheds-warehouses. Mooring - accessories - berthing facilities - dolphins. Docks-types - Navigational aids -
105
buoys – lighthouses - lightships – becons - containerisation - containers - container yards and handling
equipments
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Robert M. Horonjeff, Francis X. Mckelvey Planning and Design of Airports, TMH publishers,2010
2. Bindra S.P., Docks &Harbour Engineering, Dhanpat Rai Publications (P) Ltd,New Delhi,2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. S.K.Khanna, M.G.Arora, S.S.Jain, Airport Planning & Design, Nemchand Bros, Roorkee,6th Edition, 2011.
Further Reading:
1. Alonzon De F. Quinn ,Design and Construction of Ports and Marine Structures , McGraw-Hill Inc.,2000.
106
CORE ELECTIVE - I
VI SEMESTER
L T P C
15CEC06 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the rudiments of probability
 To solve problems using elementary probability distributions of one dimensional random variable
 To impart the basics of testing of hypothesis
 To introduce the concept of estimation using statistics and its usage in quality control
 To expose the statistical methods designed to contribute to the process of making scientific judgments in
the face of uncertainty and variation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 To be able to relate the real life problems with the concept of probability
 To be able to solve real life problems that involves randomness
 To be able to decide or check whether the difference in sample is significant or not
 To be able to estimate parameters correctly that ensures quality of a product
 To understand the statistical methods designed to contribute to the process of making scientific
judgments in the face of uncertainty and variation.
Knowledge on Basic arithmetic
UNIT I PROBABILITY 9
Axioms of probability – conditional probability – Total probability – Baye’s theorem - Random variables - Discrete
and continuous random variables - Moments - Moment Generating Functions and their properties.
UNIT II ONE DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLE 9
Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma, Weibull and Normal distributions and their
properties - Functions of a Random variable.
UNIT III TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9
Sampling distributions – Testing of hypothesis for mean, variance, proportions and differences using Normal, t,
Chi-square and F distributions - Tests for independence of attributes and Goodness of fit.
UNIT IV ESTIMATION & STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL 9
Point estimation –Interval estimation – Interval estimates of mean, standard deviation, proportion, difference in
means and ratios of standard deviation - Statistical basis for control charts – control limits – control charts for
variables – charts for defective – charts for defects.
UNIT V DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9
Analysis of variance – One way classification – CRD - Two – way classification – RBD - Latin square.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
107
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Ross. S., “A first Course in Probability”, Pearson Education, Nineth Edition, Delhi 2012.
2. Johnson. R. A., “Miller & Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Pearson Education, Delhi,
7th edition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Walpole, R. E., Myers, R. H. Myers R. S. L. and Ye. K, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers and
th
Scientists”, Seventh Edition, Pearsons Education, 9 Edition, 2011.
2. Lipschutz. S and Schiller. J, “Schaum’s outlines - Introduction to Probability and Statistics”, McGraw-Hill,
st
New Delhi, 1 edition, 2011.
3. Gupta, S.C, and Kapur, J.N., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand, Ninth Edition,
New Delhi ,1996.
L T P C
ARCHITECTURE
15CEC07
3 0 0 3
COURSE PREREQUISITE: Knowledge on Basics of civil engineering and Construction practice
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge on the fundamentals of visual perception and principles.
 To give exposure about architectural principles in the design of buildings.
 To impart knowledge in the national traditions and the local regional heritage in architecture, landscape
design including the vernacular tradition.
 To provide the basic principles and appropriate application and performance of building envelope
materials and assemblies.
 To demonstrate competency in the technical, practical skills of landscape architecture and their role in
investigating complex and innovative ideas.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply the fundamentals of visual perception in two- and three-dimensional design.
 Introduce the architectural principles in the design of buildings and interior spaces.
 Make plan for the buildings by considering our Indian climatic conditions.
 Choose the various building material as per the interior design aspects.
 Perform landscape architecture according to the environmental conditions.
Definition - Architecture – classification - influencing factors - region, culture, climate, topography, building
materials, economic and technology – historic structure - prominent world architecture - Anthropometrics –
Human scale - Space requirements in architecture.
UNIT II ELEMENTS OF ARCHITECTURE 9
Elements - Mass and space visual emotional effects of geometric forms and their derivatives – sphere, cube,
108
pyramid, cylinder and cone – aesthetic qualities of architecture: Proportion, scale, balance, symmetry, rhythm and
axis – contrast in form – Harmony.
UNIT III OREINTATION AND PLANNING OF BUILDINGS 9
General – factors affecting orientation – Sun – Wind – Rain – orientation criteria for Indian conditions – Planning–
Specifications and standards-planning of buildings – Green building- Carbon rating - case studies.
UNIT IV INTERIOR DESIGN 9
General – Decorative materials – Cement bonded boards, water proof cement – paint - industrial glazing and
roofing- masonry - Plaster and dry wall-wall surface materials - effect of colour – Home furnishing – Preparation
of interior design plans - case studies.
UNIT V LANDSCAPE DESIGN 9
Principles - Site planning - Design – Styles - Elements and materials - Plant characteristics and design -
Landscape planning - case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Francis D.K.Ching, “Architecture: Form, Space and Order”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2007.
2. Mohmohan, MuthuShoba G, “Principles of Architecture” Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Arvind Krishnan ,”Climate Responsive Architecture: A Design Handbook for Energy Efficient Buildings” ,
McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2013
2. Simon Unwin, “Analysing Architecture”, Routledge, London, 2003
3. Edward D.Mills, “Planning and Architects Handbook”, Butterworth London, 1995.
4. Paul Alan Johnson, “The Theory of Architecture: Concepts, Themes & Practices”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
1994.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Leland M. Roth, Amanda C. Roth Clark “Understanding Architecture: Its Elements, History, and Meaning”,
Westview Press, 2013.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/architecture/
109
L T P C
15CEC08 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PRACTICES
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the reasons of accidents & hazards.
 To identify method of safety against construction accidents.
 To provide exposure on obligations for the duration of contract.
 To implement plan for safety technology for the protection of workers.
 To know the different way of health practice.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Identify the correct and proper method of managing accidents by analysing the actual situations.
 Implement appropriate safety programmes at the site to make accident free construction
 Adopt the contractual obligations which are essential in the site
 Monitor safety precautions using technology
 Realize the occupational hazards and to take remedial actions.
Knowledge on Construction Practices
UNIT I CONSTRUCTION ACCIDENTS 9
Accidents and causes - Accident prevention - Definition and principles - Potential hazards/risks associated with
construction sites - High risk activities - Use of hoists - Working at height & in confined space - Equipment Safety
-Costs of construction Injuries - Accident management.
UNIT II CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PROGRAMME 9
Introduction - Problem areas in construction safety - Elements of effective safety programme - Job safety analysis
- Fault tree analysis - Job-site safety assessment - Safety regulations at construction sites - Codes of practice -
Human factors in construction safety - Construction safety management - Safety meetings - Safety incentives -
Safety training - Safety policy - Safety committees - Safety inspection - Safety audit.
UNIT III CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS 9
Government's policy in industrial safety - Safety scenario in construction industries - Safety & health legislation
in India - The Factories Act, 1948-Equipment Safety -Safety provisions in construction contracts - Sub
contractual obligation - Workers compensation - Substance abuse - Safety record keeping
UNIT IV DESIGNING FOR SAFETY 9
Safety culture - Safe workers - First line supervisors - Middle managers - Top management practices - Company
activities on safety - Safety personnel - Project coordination and safety procedures - Safety technology -
Principles of risk and loss control - Machinery safety - Machine guarding - Workplace ergonomics including
display screen equipment and manual handling - Personal protective equipment - First aid and emergency
preparedness - Fire safety - Electrical hazards.
110
UNIT V OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH PRACTICE 9
Statutory requirements and regulations related to health hazards - Legal Implications - Dust hazards and control -
Occupational and safety hazard assessment - Noise assessment and control measures - Impact and vibration -
OSHA, ISO 18001 & ISO 14001 code provisions - Case Studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jimmy W. Hinze, “Construction Safety”, Pearson Education, Inc., 2006.

2. Richard J. Coble, Jimmie Hinze and Theo C. Haupt, Construction Safety and Health Management,
Prentice Hall Inc., 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. The Factories Act, 1948, Department of Labour, Government of India

2. Tamilnadu Factory Rules, 1950, Department of Inspectorate of factories, Tamil nadu
3. Darryl C. Hill, “Construction Safety Management and Engineering (2nd Edition)”, American Society
of Safety Engineers, 2014
4. David L. Goetsch, Stephen Beach, “Construction Safety and Health” (2nd Edition), Pearson
Education, Inc., 2012.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://theconstructor.org/practical-guide/safety-management-at-construction-site/1666/
2. http://theconstructor.org/constrution/quality-and-safety-concerns-in-construction/1695/
15CEC09 GROUND WATER HYDROLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand various hydrogeological parameters and their estimation
 To impart knowledge of well hydraulics
 To be familiar with various ground water management techniques
 To provide information on ground water quality and its application
 To emphasis the importance of ground water conservation
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Estimate the various aquifer parameters
 Analyze the steady and unsteady state of flow into a well
 Apply mathematical models for ground water management
 Implement various saline water prevention techniques
 Adopt appropriate rainwater harvesting techniques
111
Knowledge on Hydraulic Engineering
UNIT I HYDROGEOLOGICAL PARAMETERS 9
Introduction – Water bearing Properties of Rock – Type of aquifers - Aquifer properties – Permeability, specific
yield, transmissivity and storage coefficient – Methods of Estimation – Ground water table fluctuation and its
interpretations – Groundwater development and Potential in India – GEC norms.
UNIT II WELL HYDRAULICS 9
Objectives of Groundwater hydraulics – Darcy’s Law - Groundwater equation – steady state flow -
DupuitForchheimer assumption - Unsteady state flow - Theis method - Jacob method -Slug tests - Image well
theory – Partial penetrations of wells.
UNIT III GROUNDWATER MANAGEMENT 9
Need for Management Model – Database for groundwater management –groundwater balance study –
Introduction to Mathematical model – Conjunctive use – Collector well and Infiltration gallery.
UNIT IV GROUNDWATER QUALITY 9
Ground water chemistry - Origin, movement and quality - Water quality standards – Health and aesthetic aspects
of water quality - Saline water intrusion – Environmental concern and Regulatory requirements
UNIT V GROUNDWATER CONSERVATION 9
Artificial recharge techniques – Remediation of Saline intrusion– Ground water management studies – Protection
zone delineation, Contamination source inventory, remediation schemes - Ground water Pollution and legislation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Raghunath H.M.” Ground Water Hydrology”, New Age International (P) Limited, NewDelhi, 2010.
2. Todd D.K., “Ground Water Hydrology”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Fitts R Charles. Groundwater Science. Elsevier, Academic Press, 2002
2. Ramakrishnan, S, “Ground Water Hydrology”, K.J. Graph arts, Chennai, 1998.
L T P C
15CEC10 HOUSING PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To train the students to have a comprehensive knowledge of housing projects.
 To give awareness about the existing housing programmes.
 To train the students to do the planning and design of housing projects
 To give exposure on cost effective construction materials and methods.
 To train the students to perform the project appraisal of housing projects.
112
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Plan and design the housing projects as per D.C.Regulations.
 Design the various housing programme with sustainability concepts.
 Formulate and design the housing layouts by conducting site analysis.
 Evaluate the suitability of various cost effective construction materials.
 Perform the economic analysis. Based project appraisal of housing projects.
Knowledge on Basic Civil Engineering & Engineering Economics and Cost analysis,
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HOUSING 9
Definition of Basic Terms –House, Home, Household -Row houses, Apartments, Multi storied Buildings, Special
Buildings, Objectives and Strategies of National Housing Policies, Principle of Sustainable Housing, Housing Laws
at State level, Bye-laws at Urban and Rural Local Bodies -DC Regulations, Institutions for Housing at National,
State and Local levels.
UNIT II HOUSING PROGRAMMES 9
Basic Concepts, Contents and Standards for various Housing Programmes -Sites and Services, Neighbourhoods,
Open Development Plots, Apartments, Rental Housing, Co-operative Housing, Slum Housing Programmes, Role
of Public, Private and Non-Government Organizations
UNIT III PLANNING AND DESIGN OF HOUSING PROJECTS 9
Formulation of Housing Projects –Site Analysis, Layout Design, Design of Housing Units (Simple design
problems)- Procedure for site analysis and layout planning.
UNIT IV CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES AND COST- EFFECTIVE MATERIALS 9
New Constructions Techniques – Cost Effective Modern Construction Materials, Building Centres – Concept,
Functions and Performance Evaluation.
UNIT V HOUSING FINANCE AND PROJECT APPRAISAL 9
Appraisal of Housing Projects – Housing Finance, Cost Recovery –Cash Flow Analysis, Subsidy and Cross
Subsidy, Pricing of Housing Units, Rents, Recovery Pattern (Problems)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Meera Mehta and Dinesh Mehta, “Metropolitan Housing Markets”, Sage Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
1999.
2. Francis Cherunilam and Odeyar D Heggade, “Housing in India”, Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay,
1997.
113
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Development Control Rules for Chennai Metropolitan Area, CMA, Chennai, 2002.
2. National Housing Policy, 1994, Government of India.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. UNCHS, National Experiences with Shelter Delivery for the Poorest Groups, UNCHS (Habitat), Nairobi,
1994.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. mhupa.gov.in/policies/duepa/HousingPolicy2007.pdf
2. nhb.org.in/Urban Housing/Housing policies.php
3. www.jstor.org/stable/4394929
4. mhupa.gov.in/pdf/guidelines-scheme/urbanemp.../buildingcentres.pdf
5. www.unido.org/.../Environment_friendly_Indian_building_material_tec
6. http://webarchive.nationalarchives.gov.uk/20110118095356/http:/www.cabe.org.uk/files/the-value-of-
housing-design-and-layout.pdf.
7. urbandesignproject.ap.buffalo.edu/pub/pdf/westside screenres.pdf
L T P C
15CEC11 REMOTE SENSING AND GIS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the basics of EMR and its interaction with atmospheric windows.
 To impart the knowledge on basics of platforms and sensors.
 To provide the knowledge on interpretation of images
 To get introduced on basic concepts of GIS.
 To understand the process of storage and analysis of various data.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyze Electromagnetic radiations and their interactions with atmosphere.
 Classify and apply passive and active sensors.
 Interpret and analyze the images.
 Differentiate vector and raster data.
 Analyze data models for different studies.
Knowledge on Surveying
UNIT I EMR AND ITS INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE 9
Definition of remote sensing and its components – Electromagnetic spectrum – wavelengthregions important to
remote sensing – Wave theory, Particle theory– Atmospheric scattering, absorption – Atmospheric windows –
spectral signature concepts – typical spectral reflective characteristics of water, vegetation andsoil.
114
UNIT II PLATFORMS AND SENSORS 9
Types of platforms – orbit types, Sun-synchronous and Geosynchronous – Passive and Activesensors-
resolution concept – Pay load description of important Earth Resources andMeteorological satellites – Airborne
and space borne TIR and microwave sensors.
UNIT III IMAGE INTERPRETATION AND ANALYSIS 9
Types of Data Products – types of image interpretation – basic elements of image interpretation- visual
interpretation keys – Digital Image Processing – Pre-processing – image enhancementtechniques –
multispectral image classification – Supervised and unsupervised.
UNIT IV GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM 9
Introduction – Maps – projections – types – map analysis –GIS definition – basic components of GIS – standard
GIS software – Data type – Spatial and non-spatial data – measurement scales – Data Base Management
Systems (DBMS).
UNIT V DATA ENTRY, STORAGE AND ANALYSIS 9
Data models – vector and raster data – data compression – data input by digitization andscanning – attribute
data analysis – integrated data analysis – Modeling in GIS Highwayalignment studies – Land Information
system.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Satheesh Gopi, “Advanced Surveying”, Pearson Education, 2007.
2. Duggal R.K, “Surveying” Vol. I and II, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
2. Anderson, J.M. and Mikhail, E.M., “Surveying: Theory and Practice”, McGraw Hill, 1998
3. Schofield, W. and Breach M., “Engineering Surveying”, 6th Ed., Butterworth-Heineman,2007
4. Bossler, J.D., “Manual of Geospatial Science and Technology”, Taylor and Francis,2002.
3. Burrough, P.A. and McDonnell, R.A., “Principles of Geographic Information System”, Oxford University
Press, 2000.
WEB REFERENCES:
115
VII SEMESTER
CORE ELECTIVE - III
L T P C
15CEC12 ADVANCED DESIGN OF RC STRUCTURES
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop an understanding on the basic concepts in the behavior and design of reinforced concrete
structures such as Retaining Wall and counterfort retaining wall.
 To provide knowledge on design of various components in the water tank by working stress method.
 To provide knowledge on design of various reinforced concrete structures such as flat slabs and RC walls.
 To explain the basic concepts about the yield line theory for the analysis and design of slab of various cross
sections.
 To explain the behavior of reinforced masonry structures, and be able to design for flexure, shear, axial
forces, combined flexure and axial forces.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Gain knowledge for the design of different types of retaining walls and will able to apply the theoretical
concepts in the real world construction.
 Design and detailing of different types of water tanks along with the staging and foundation.
 Design and detailing of flat slabs and reinforced concrete walls.
 Design square, rectangular, circular and triangular slabs using Yield line theory.
 Design axially and eccentrically loaded brick walls based on the knowledge gained for various loading
conditions.
Knowledge on basics of Structural Analysis and Reinforced Concrete Element
UNIT I RETAINING WALLS 9
Retaining walls - Types - Earth pressure - Effects of surcharge - Stability requirements –Design of cantilever type
retaining wall and Counterfort type retaining wall - Detailing of reinforcement.
UNIT II WATER TANKS 9
General design requirements – Underground and tank resting on ground - Overhead Circular and rectangular tanks -
Analysis and design using Working Stress methods - Detailing of reinforcement - Codal provisions.
UNIT III FLAT SLABS AND RC WALLS 9
Types of flat slab - Design of Interior and Exterior panels using Direct Design Method - Use of design aids (SP16) -
Reinforced concrete walls.
UNIT IV YIELD LINE THEORY 9
Yield line – Assumptions – Characteristics – Upper Bound and Lower Bound Theories - Yield Line Analysis - Design of
slabs.
UNIT V BRICK MASONRY 9
Introduction - Classification of walls - Lateral supports and stability - Effective height of wall and columns - Effective
116
length of walls - design loads, load dispersion - Permissible stresses - Design of axially and eccentrically loaded brick
walls
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
Ltd., New Delhi2009.
2. Dayaratnam, P., “Brick and Reinforced Brick Structures”, Oxford & IBH Publishing House, 1997.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sinha, S.N., “Reinforced Concrete Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi 2014.
2. Varghese, P.C., “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete”, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
2002.
2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
 http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=105105105.
CODE BOOKS:
1. IS 456 – 2000 - Plain and Reinforced Concrete – CODE OF PRACTICE (Fourth Revision).
2. SP 16 - Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS 456:1978.
3. IS 1905 – 1987 Code of Practice for Structural Use of Unreinforced masonry.
L T P C
15CEC13 AIR POLLUTION MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students aware with the sources, effects and control of air pollution.
 To impart the principles of dispersion characteristics of pollution.
 To deliver with the concepts of design of control of air pollution.
 To get knowledge in ideas and terms behind the air pollution management.
 To make the students familiar with noise pollution.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Recognize the different of sources like manmade and natural ,their effects of air pollution
 Publicize the dispersion characteristics and modeling of pollution in air.
 Design the component for control of air pollution.
 Get the ideas and terms like planning, zoning, Monitoring and enforcing laws in air pollution management.
 Aware on the principles behind the sources, effects & control of noise pollution.
117
Knowledge on Environmental Engineering
UNIT I SOURCES AND EFFECTS OF AIRPOLLUTANTS 9
Classificationofairpollutants–Particulatesandgaseouspollutants–Sourcesofair pollution –Source inventory–Effects of

airpollutionon human beings, materials, vegetation, animals–global warming-ozone layer depletion, Sampling and
Analysis – Basic Principles of Sampling– Source and ambient sampling – Analysis of pollutants– Principles.
UNIT II DISPERSION OF POLLUTANTS 9
Elements of atmosphere – Meteorological factors – Wind roses – Lapse rate Atmospheric stability and turbulence –
Plume rise–Dispersion of pollutants–Dispersion models–Applications.
UNIT III AIR POLLUTION CONTROL 9
Conceptsofcontrol–Principlesanddesignofcontrolmeasures–Particulatescontrolby gravitational, centrifugal, filtration,

scrubbing, electrostatic precipitation – Selection criteria for equipment- gaseous pollutant control by adsorption,
absorption, condensation,combustion–Pollutioncontrolforspecificmajorindustries.
UNIT IV AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT 9
Air quality standards–Air quality monitoring–Preventive measures – Air pollution controlefforts–Zoning–

Townplanningregulationofnewindustries–Legislationand enforcement–Environmental Impact Assessment and Air
quality
UNIT V NOISE POLLUTION 9
Sources of noise pollution–Effects–Assessment- Standards–Control methods– Prevention
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rao,C.S.EnvironmentalPollutionControl Engineering,W ileyEasternLtd.,NewDelhi,1996.

2. RaoM.N.,andRaoH.V.N.,AirPollutionControl,Tata-McGraw-Hill,NewDelhi1996.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Lawrence K. Wang, Norman C. Pereira, Yung-Tse Hung, Air Pollution Control Engineering, Humana Press, 2004.
2. W.L.Heumann,IndustrialAirPollution Control Systems,McGraw-Hill,NewYork,1997.
3. Mahajan.S.P., Pollution Control in Process Industries, TMHCompany,NewDelhi,1991.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Garg,S.K.,“EnvironmentalEngineeringVol.II”,KhannaPublishers,NewDelhi
2. Mahajan,S.P.,“PollutionControlinProcessIndustries”,TataMcGraw-Hill,NewDelhi,1991
118
L T P C
15CEC14 BRIDGE ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To get introduced to basic fundamentals of bridge design
 To explore the design methodologies of superstructure of bridges.
 To get familiarized with Substructure of bridges
 To gain knowledge on fundamentals of bearings used in bridges
 To get exposed to the conceptual knowledge on bridge maintenance
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyse various design codes on bridges and execute reconnaissance of the bridge design.
 Design Superstructure of bridges.
 Be proficient in Substructure of bridges
 Evaluate the types of bearings used in bridges
 Execute bridge maintenance and analyze case studies on bridges
Knowledge on Construction Techniques
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BRIDGE ENGINEERING 9
Historical background of bridges and types. Bridge aesthetics and proportioning. Design process. Review of applicable
design codes. Loads on bridges and force distribution. Bridge geometry. Conceptual design. Classification of Bridges.
Bridge Hydrology: determination of design discharge, linear water way, economical span, location of piers and
abutments, afflux, scour depth
UNIT II SUPERSTRUCTURE OF BRIDGES 9
Pigeaud’s method for computation of slab moments; courbon’s method for computation of moments in girders; Design
of simply supported T-beam bridge.
UNIT III SUBSTRUCTURE FOR BRIDGES 9
Piers - Abutments - Wing walls - Setting out for Piers and Abutments - Materials for substructures – Bridge Inspection
– Caissons – Cofferdams – Spread and Pile foundation
UNIT IV BEARINGS 9
Purposes of Bearings – Importance of Bearings – Free and Fixed Bearings - Types of Bearings - Bed Blocks –
Maintenance of Bearings
UNIT V BRIDGE MAINTENANCE 9
Bridge failures – case studies – Maintenance of bridges – Detailed Inspection – Routine Inspection – Posting of
Bridges – Rating of Existing bridges – Rebuilding Bridges – Retrofitting and Rehabilitation of bridges
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
119
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ponnuswamy.S “Bridge Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008.

2. KrishnaRaju.N“ Design of Bridges “, Oxford and IBH , 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bakht.B and Jaegar.L.G., “Bridge Analysis Simplified”, McGraw Hill, 1985.

2. Johnson Victor.D, “Essentials of Bridge Engineering”, Oxford & IBH, 2007.
3. Jagadeesh T.R. and Jayaram .M.A., “Design of Bridge Structures”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd., 2004.
4. Derrick Beckett, “An Introduction to Structural Design of Concrete Bridges”, Surrey University Press, Henley
Homes, Oxford Shire 1973.
5. Raina V.K., “Concrete Bridge Practice”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1994.
6. KrishnaRaju. N “Structural Design and Drawing: Reinforced Concrete and Steel” , University Press (India) Pvt
Limited , 2004
7. Taylor F.W., Thomson S.E., &Smulski E., “Reinforced Concrete Bridges”. John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1955.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Charles.S.Whitney , “Bridges of the World: Their Design and Construction” ,Dover Publications Inc , 2003
2. Wai – Fah Chen and LianDuan , “ Bridge Engineering Hand Book : Super Structure Design ”, CRC Press, 2014.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.fgg.uni-lj.si/~/pmoze/esdep/master/wg01b/l0610.htm
2. http://www.unimasr.net/ums/upload/files/2013/Apr/
3. UniMasr.com_c201d5e6815f239421e61f8ddc0dd7fe.pdf
4. http://publications.lib.chalmers.se/records/fulltext/146546.pdf
5. http://web.iku.edu.tr/courses/insaat/eng002-i/lecturenotes/Bridges%20presentation_Dr%20Kiymaz_ENG002.pdf
CODE BOOKS:
1. IRC: 6 - 2014 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section II - Loads and Stresses
(Fifth Revision).
2. IRC: 21 - 2000 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section III - Cement Concrete
(Plain and Reinforced) (Third Revision).
3. IRC: 22 - 2008 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section VI - Composite
Construction (Limit States Design) (Second Revision).
4. IRC: 24 - 2010 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Steel Road Bridges (Limit State
Method) Third Revision.
5. IRC: 83 - 1999 (Part-I) Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX - Bearings, Part
I: Metallic Bearings (First Revision).
6. IRC: 83 - 1987 (Part II) Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX - Bearings, Part
II: Elastomeric Bearings.
7. IRC: 83 - 2002 (Part III) Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX - Bearings,
Part III: POT, POT-CUMPTFE, PIN and Metallic Guide Bearings.
120
15CEC15 COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To train the students to have a comprehensive knowledge of coastal zone and its components.
 To give exposure on types of waves and their characteristics.
 To educate the students about the variety of coasts and profiles of beaches.
 To provide knowledge on coastal processes happening along the coast.
 To give awareness about the various coastal zone management measures.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Plan and map the elements of the coastal zone.
 Comprehend the characteristics of the waves.
 Apply the knowledge of coastal profiles on design of coastal structures
 Analyse the Coastal processes and their impact on coastal structure.
 Develop new strategies to protect the coastal zone against the natural and manmade disasters.
Knowledge on Coastal Engineering
UNIT I COASTAL ZONE 9
Coastal zone – CZR provisions – beach profile – surf zone, beach, wave breaking zone– off shore – coastal waters –
estuaries – wet lands and lagoons – living and non-living resources.
UNIT II WAVE CHARACTERISTICS 9
Wave classification – deep, shallow water waves – wave pressure, energy and decay – reflection, refraction,
diffraction of waves and breaking of waves –structures – type of barriers.
UNIT III COASTAL PROFILES 9
Seas and Oceans – classification – continental area – coastal zone – coral reefs – mangroves – wetlands –
importance – food, transportation, recreation – reef structure, types, and formation – mangrove distribution-
dynamic beach profile; cross-shore transport- littoral transport -sediment movement .
UNIT IV COASTAL PROCESSES 9
Erosion and depositional shore features – methods of protection – littoral currents – coastal aquifers – sea water
intrusion – impact of sewage disposal in seas.
UNIT V POLLUTION MANAGEMENT 9
Structures near coast –types and selection of break waters –dredging –Domestic Pollution- Water pollution- Industrial
Pollution- effect of mangrove forest—conservation of coast and management strategies – global policies –
conservation strategies in different countries.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
121
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dwivedi, S.N., Natarajan, R and Ramachandran, S., “Coastal Zone Management in Tamilnadu”,2009.
2. Sunil Dighe , “Guideline for Preparation of Coastal Zone Management Plans ,GOI, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Doody, J.P. Coastal Conservation and Management: An Ecological Perspective. Springer, 2000.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.sicommoef.in/Data/Sites/1/docs/sczma%20website.pdf
2. www.iczmpodisha.org/
3. envfor.nic.in/...links/national-coastal-zone-management-authority-nczma envfor.nic.in/legis/crz.htm
L T P C
15CEC16 CONTRACT LAWS AND REGULATIONS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study various elements in the contract document.
 To review different concepts of Tender making process as per contract law.
 To get an information on arbitration procedure during disputes.
 To study the various taxes related to construction business and statutory recommendations.
 To know the complexity of labour laws along with legislation in the construction industries.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Prepare contract document for various government & non-governmental works.
 Make tender as per the current rates along with guidelines from sources.
 Understand the factors of arbitration during the time of court proceedings.
 Exercise correctly the procedure during sell; buy their land & property oriented with various tax provisions.
 Adopt and follow the various acts and laws related to labour in the field.
Knowledge on Legal procedures in construction
UNIT I CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS 9
Indian contracts act - Elements of contracts - Types of contracts - Features - Suitability - Design of contract
documents - International contract documents - Standard contract documents - Law of torts
UNIT II TENDERS 9
Prequalification –Tender notice – Attachments - Bidding - Accepting - Evaluation of tender from technical, contractual
and commercial points of view - Contract formation and interpretation - Potential contractual problems - World bank
procedures and guidelines - Transparency in tenders act.
UNIT III ARBITRATION 9
Arbitration – Need - Conditions of arbitration - Comparison of acts and laws - Agreements - Subject matter -
Violations - Appointment of arbitrators - Powers and duties of arbitrator - Rules of evidence - Enforcement of award.
122
UNIT IV LEGAL REQUIREMENTS 9
Insurance and bonding - Laws governing sale, purchase and use of urban and rural land - Land revenue codes - Tax
laws - Income tax, sales tax, excise and custom duties and their influence on construction costs - Legal requirements
for planning - Property law - Agency law - Local government laws for approval - Statutory regulations
UNIT V LABOUR REGULATIONS 9
Laws for social security - Welfare legislation - Laws relating to wages, bonus, industrial disputes and labour
administration - Insurance and safety regulations - Workmen’s compensation act - Indian factory act - Tamilnadu
factory act - Child labour act - Other labour laws
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. GajariaG.T.,Laws Relating to Building & Engineering Contracts in India,M.M.Tripathi Pvt. Ltd.,Bombay, 1982
2. Jimmie Hinze, Construction Contracts, Second Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Joseph T. Bockrath, Contracts and the Legal Environment for Engineers and Architects, Sixth Edition, McGraw Hill,
2000.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.http://theconstructor.org/?s=construction+law
CORE ELECTIVE - IV
L T P C
15CEC17 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND COST ANALYSIS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To give exposure to basic law of economics.
 To introduce the concepts of demand and supply of the products
 To impart knowledge on financial aspects related to the business.
 To provide exposure on short term and long term financing of business.
 To study the different methods of appraisal of projects.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After successful completion of this course, the students will be able to

 Apply the concepts of managerial economics to study the utility of the product
 Analyse the influence of demand and supply on pricing of products
 Apply the concepts of partnership in companies for its growth.
 Analyse the financial conditions of the company based on the financial instruments
 Formulate the strategies to fix product pricing and study its impact on break even analysis.
Knowledge on Principles of Management and Estimation and costing
123
UNITI BASIC ECONOMICS 9
Definition of economics -nature and scope of economic science - managerial economics -basic concepts -goods -
utility -value - wealth - factors of production - land -its peculiarities - labour -economies of large and small scale -
consumption -wants -its characteristics and classification -law of diminishing marginal utility -relation between
economic decision and technical decision.
UNITII DEMAND AND SUPPLY 9
Demand -demand schedule -demand curve -law of demand -elasticity of demand -types of elasticity -factors
determining elasticity -measurement -its significance -supply -supply schedule -supply curve -law of supply -elasticity
of supply -time element in the determination of value -market price and normal price -perfect competition -monopoly -
monopolistic competition.
UNITIII ORGANISATION 9
Forms of business -proprietorship -partnership -joint stock company -cooperative organisation -state enterprise -
mixed economy -money and banking -banking -kinds -commercial banks -central banking functions -control of credit -
monetary policy -credit instrument.
UNITIV FINANCING 9
Types of financing Short term borrowing -Long term borrowing -Internal generation of funds -External commercial
borrowings -Assistance from government budgeting support and international finance corporations -analysis of
financial statement –Balance Sheet -Profit and Loss account -Funds flow statement.
UNITV COST AND BREAK EVEN ANALYSIS 9
Types of costing –traditional costing approach -activity base costing -Fixed Cost –variable cost –marginal cost –cost
output relationship in the short run and in long run –pricing practice –full cost pricing –marginal cost pricing –going
rate pricing –bid pricing –pricing for a rate of return –appraising project profitability –internal rate of return –payback
period –net present value –cost benefit analysis –feasibility reports-Detailed project reports–appraisal process –
technical feasibility-economic feasibility –financial feasibility. Break even analysis -basic assumptions –break even
chart –managerial uses of break even analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dewett K.K. &Varma J.D., “Elementary Economic Theory” ,S Chand & Co., 2006.
2. Samuelson, P. A. &Nordhaus W.D.,” Economics”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1998.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Adhikary M., “Managerial Economics”, Khosla Educational publishers,Delhi,1999.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Sharma,K.K , “Principle of Economics”, Abishek publications,2002.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.eng.auburn.edu/users/parkcha/cee/
2. www.helsinki.fi/WebEc/
3. economicsonline.co.uk
4. ecedweb.unomaha.edu/
5. ecedweb.unomaha.edu/teach-ec.cfm
124
L T P C
15CEC18 CONCEPTS OF FINITE ELEMENT METHOD
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To equip the students with the Finite Element Analysis fundamentals
 To understand the direct stiffness matrix method to solve civil engineering problems.
 To give exposure to select suitable mathematical model for complex problems.
 To enable to form and solve two dimensional problems.
 To introduce the advanced topics in FEM.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis.
 Use the direct stiffness matrix method for solving civil engineering problems.
 Select suitable mathematical model for complex problems.
 Form and solve two dimensional problems.
 Gain knowledge on advanced topics in FEM.
Knowledge on Matrix methods of Analysis
UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS 9
Concept of an element - various element shapes - one, two and three dimensional elements - finite element
procedure - stresses and equilibrium - boundary conditions - strain displacement relations - stress strain relations
- Potential energy and equilibrium – Weighted residual and weak formulations – Variational approach – Rayleigh
Ritz method.
UNIT II DIRECT STIFFNESS METHOD 9
Steps in direct method of FEA – element stiffness matrix – global stiffness matrix – boundary conditions – simple
problems on beams and trusses.
UNIT III ELEMENT SHAPES, NODAL UNKNOWNS AND COORDINATE 9

SYSTEMS
Discretization - basic element shapes - element properties – node numbering procedure – convergence
requirements – generalised co-ordinates – natural co-ordinates – shape functions for linear & quadratic models –
stiffness matrix – nodal load vector – static condensation – simple problems.
UNIT IV TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 9
Introduction – finite element modelling – constant strain triangle – isoparametric representation – potential energy
approach - element stiffness – force terms – stress calculations – introduction to beam element.
UNIT V ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENTS AND NUMERICAL INTEGRATION 9
Introduction – higher order elements and its applications - concept of sub, iso and super parametric elements –
shape functions - Gaussian quadrature – examples in one and two dimensional elements
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
125
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Chandrupatla, T.R., and Belegundu, A.D., “Introduction to Finite Element in Engineering”, Third Edition,
Prentice Hall, India, 2003.
2. Krishnamoorthy C. S. ,"Finite Element Analysis Theory and Programming", Tata McGraw Hill Education,
1994
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajasekaran, S., "Finite Element Methods in Engineering Design", Wheeler, 1993.

2. Reddy J.N., “An Introduction to Finite Element Method”, McGraw-Hill, Intl. Student Edition, 1985.
3. Zienkiewics, “The finite element method, Basic formulation and linear problems”, Vol.1, 4th Edition,
McGraw-Hill, Book Co., 1987
4. Rao S.S, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Pergaman Press, 2003.
5. David V. Hutton, "Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis", Tata McGraw Hill, 2004
EXTENSIVE READING
1. Daryl L. Logan, "A First Course in Finite Element Method", Cengage Learning, 2012.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.colorado.edu/engineering/cas/courses.d/IFEM.d/
L T P C
15CEC19 PAVEMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the fundamentals related to the pavement failures
 To provide knowledge on various roads and their maintenance operations
 To create awareness about the various types of bituminous surfaces.
 To impart knowledge on various pavement management systems.
 To provide knowledge on pavement distress models.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply the concepts and knowledge of pavement failures in road maintenance.
 Decide over the choices of maintenance operations applicable for the road.
 Analyse the various bituminous surfaces and chose the perfect pavement finishing.
 Formulate the pavement management systems to check the performance.
 Forecast the pavement failure based on the pavement failure models developed.
126
UNIT I PAVEMENT DISTRESSES 9
Distresses in flexible/rigid pavements - causes and remedies - Measurement of Serviceability using

equipments like Bump Indicator, Skid tester & Benkelman Beam - Functional evaluation of pavements-
Serviceability Concepts, Visual Rating, Pavement Serviceability Index, Skid Resistance, Roughness, and
Safety Aspects.
UNIT II MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS 9
Classification of maintenance operations, Routine, Periodic, Special - Common types of maintenance: Potholes,
Cracked surface, Ruts & undulations, Resurfacing and Interface treatments,
UNIT III BITUMINOUS COURSES 9
Seal Coat, Surface Dressing, Premixed carpet, Micro asphalt concrete (MAC), Bituminous Surface
Courses- Semi-Dense Bituminous Concrete, Bituminous Concrete. Road maintenance in high rainfall areas.
Choice of materials. Modified bitumen & geo-fabrics.
UNIT IV PAVEMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Components of PMS and their Activities - Major Steps in Implementing PMS - Inputs, Design, Construction
and Maintenance -HDM package - Highway Financing- Evaluation of Alternate Strategies.
UNIT V PAVEMENT DETERIORATION MODELS 9
Factors that affect performance - Types of prediction models - Prediction deterioration model development -
Method to assess the precision and accuracy -Emerging Technology.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Khanna and Justo, “Principles and practice of Highway engineering”, Khanna Publishers.2005.
2. SK Sharma, “Text book on Highway Engineering”, Chand & Co .publishers,2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Hay W.W., “Introduction to transportation Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, NY, 2005.
2. Papacostas C.S., “Fundamentals of transportation Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India, 2008.
127
L T P C
15CEC20 FUNDAMENTALS OF PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic principles of prefabrication.
 To be thorough with the calculation of handling and erection stresses.
 To know about dimensioning and detailing of joint.
 To acquire knowledge on erection of structures.
 To get familiar with the design principles of prefabricated units
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply the various types of prefabrication systems.
 Calculate the handling and erection stresses.
 Prepare dimensioning and detailing of joints.
 Perform erection ofthe prefab structure.
 Design pre-fabricated units.
Knowledge on Modern Construction Techniques
Modular co-ordination – Components - Prefabrication systems and structural schemes - Types of foundation -
Design considerations - Economy of prefabrication - Prefabrication of load-carrying members - Disuniting of
structures - Structural behaviour of precast structures.
UNIT II HANDLING AND ERECTION STRESSES 9
Handling and erection stresses - Application of pre stressing of roof members – Floor systems - Two way load
bearing slabs - Wall panels
UNIT III DIMENSIONING AND DETAILING OF JOINTS 9
Dimensioning and detailing of joints for different structural connections – Construction joints and expansion joints.
UNIT IV ERECTION OF STRUCTURES 9
Production - Transportation and Erection - Organizing of production - Storing and erection equipment - Shuttering
and mould design - Dimensional tolerances, Erection of R.C. structures -Total prefabricated buildings
UNIT V DESIGN OF PRE FABRICATED UNITS 9
Prefabricated units for Industrial structures, Multi-storied buildings and Water tanks etc., Application of pre
stressed concrete in prefabrication.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
128
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Hubert Bachmann, Alfred Steinle, “Precast Concrete Structures”, Ernst and Sohn GMBH & Co., K.G.,
2011.
2. "Structural design manual", Precast concrete connection details, Society for the studies inthe use of
precast concrete, Netherland BetorVerlag, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. B.Lewicki, “Building with Large Prefabricates”, Elsevier Publishing Company, Amsterdam / London /
New York, 1966.
2. Levit, M., (2000), Precast concrete materials, Manufacture properties and usage, Applied Science
Publishers, London.
3. Kim S. Elliott, “Precast Concrete Structures” Butter – Heinemann, 2002.
4. LassloMokk, “Prefabricated Concrete for Industrial and Public Sectors, AkademiaiKiado”, Budapest,
1964.
EXTENSIVE READING
1. David A.Sheppard, William R. and Philips, “Plant cast precast and prestressed concrete – A design
guide”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi 1992.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://sharepdf.net/find/anna-university-lecture-notes-for-prefabricatedstructures
2. http://www.mamce.org/ematerial/notes/civil/7sem/CE1007-PS-1&2.pdf
L T P C
15CEC21 REPAIR AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Course Objectives:
 To study the reasons of crack formations.
 To Identify the formation of moisture in the structures.
 To Recognize deterioration of concrete buildings.
 To Know Deficiencies in various forms of steel constructions.
 To Aware of Strengthening techniques for prevailing structures.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the various patterns of cracks for different failure.
 Restrict moisture movement internally and externally.
 Select suitable Repair techniques for different deterioration.
 Pick right techniques to eliminate distressing in steel arrangements.
 Comparison of verities of rehabilitation techniques according to requirement.
129
Knowledge on building materials and construction techniques
UNIT I BUILDING CRACKS 9
BUILDING CRACKS: Causes – Diagnosis – Remedial measures – Thermal and Shrinkage cracks – Unequal
loading – Vegetation and trees – Chemical action – Foundation movements – Techniques for repair - Repair
materials
UNIT II MOISTURE PENETRATION 9
Sources off dampness – Moisture movement from ground – Reasons for ineffective DPC – Roof leakage –
Pitched roofs –– Leakage of Concrete slabs –Dampness in solid walls – Condensation – Hygroscopic salts-
Remedial treatments – Ferro cement overlay – Chemical coatings – Flexible and rigid coatings.
UNIT III CONCRETE STRUCTURES 9
Introduction – Causes of deterioration – Diagnosis of causes – Flow charts for diagnosis – Methods of repair –
Repairing spalling and disintegration – Repairing of concrete floors and pavements.
UNIT IV STEEL STRUCTURES 9
Types and causes for deterioration – Preventive measures – Repair procedure – Brittle fracture – Lamellar
tearing – Defects in welded joints – Mechanism of corrosion – Design to protect against corrosion – Design and
fabrication errors – Distress during erection.
UNIT V STRENGTHENING OF EXISTING STRUCTURES 9
General principles – Relieving loads – Strengthening super structures – Plating – Conversion to composite
construction – Post stressing – Jacketing – Bonded overlays - Reinforcement addition – Strengthening
substructures – Under pinning – Increasing load capacity of footing – Design for rehabilitation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.Guha, P.K, “Maintenance and Repairs of Buildings”, New Central Book Agency (P) Ltd, Calcutta, 2011.
2.Ghosh, S.K, “Repair and Rehabilitation of Steel Bridges”, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1988.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.Macdonald, S, “Concrete - Building Pathology”, Blackwell Science Limited, Oxford, 2008.

2.Shetty, M.S, “Concrete Technology – Theory and Practice”, S. Chand and Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.
3.Chudley, R, “The Maintenance and Adaptation of Buildings”, Longman Group Ltd, New York, 2002.
4.Strecker, P.P, “Corrosion Damaged Concrete – Assessment and Repair”, Butterworths, London, 1987.
5. Johnson, S.M, “Deterioration, Maintenance and Repair of structures”, Krieger Publishing Company,
Melbourne, 1980.
130
Core Elective - V
L T P C
15CEC22 SMART MATERIALS AND MEASURING TECHNIQUES
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the fundamentals of the smart materials.

 To understand the measuring techniques using smart materials.
 To give exposure to select suitable sensor for analyzing problems.
 To enable to select and use the different actuator material.
 To introduce signal processing and control system in smart structures.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Understand the fundamentals of Smart material.
 Use the measuring techniques using smart materials for solving civil engineering problems.
 Select suitable sensors for analyzing various measurements.
 Adaptthe different actuator material in structural components.
 Apply signal processing and control system in smart structures.
Knowledge on instrumentation and Modern Materials
Introduction to Smart Materials and Structures – Instrumented structures, functions and response –Sensing
systems – Self-diagnosis – Signal processing consideration – Actuation systems and effectors.
UNIT II MEASURING TECHNIQUES 9
Strain Measuring Techniques using Electrical strain gauges, Types – Resistance – Capacitance – Inductance –
Wheatstone bridges – Pressure transducers – Load cells – Temperature Compensation – Strain Rosettes.
UNIT III SENSORS 9
Sensing Technology – Types of Sensors – Physical Measurement using Piezo Electric Strain measurement –
Inductively Read Transducers – The LVDT – Fibre optic Techniques- Accelerometers- Force Sensors- Load
Cells-Torque Sensors- Pressure Sensors- Microphones- Impact Hammers- MEMS Sensor- Sensor Arrays
UNIT IV ACTUATORS 9
Actuator Techniques – Actuator and actuator materials – Piezoelectric and Electrostrictive Material – Magneto
structure Material – Shape Memory Alloys – Electro rheological Fluids– Electromagnetic actuation – Role of
actuators and Actuator Materials - Displacement Actuators, Force Actuators, Power Actuators, Vibration
Dampers
UNIT V SIGNAL PROCESSING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9
Data Acquisition and Processing – Signal Processing and Control for Smart Structures – Sensors as Geometrical
Processors – Signal Processing – Signal-Conditioning Devices; Constant Voltage, Constant Current and Pulse
Drive Methods; Structural Dynamics and Identification Techniques - Control System – Linear and Non-Linear ,
Passive, Semi-Active and Active Control, Feedback and Feed forward Control Strategies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
131
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Brain Culshaw – Smart Structure and Materials Artech House – Boston. London-1996.
2. J. W. Dally & W. F. Riley – Experimental Stress Analysis – Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. L. S. Srinath – Experimental Stress Analysis – Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.

2. M.V. Gandhi and B.S. Thompson, Smart Materials and Structures, Chapman & Hall, London; New York,
1992 (ISBN: 0412370107).
3. G. Gautschi, Piezoelectric Sensorics: Force, Strain, Pressure, Acceleration and Acoustic Emission
Sensors, Materials and Amplifiers, Springer, Berlin; New York, 2002 (ISBN: 3540422595).
EXTENSIVE READING
1. A.V. Srinivasan, Smart Structures: Analysis and Design, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge; New York,
2001 (ISBN: 0521650267).
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.mide.com
L T P C
15CEC23 INTRODUCTION TO STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the principles of vibration, response of structural systems to dynamic loads and displacements.
 To learn the behaviour and response of structures subjected to harmonic and periodic loading.
 To study the behaviour and response of SDOF structures with Step and pulse dynamic loading.
 To impart knowledge on SDOF earthquake response of linear systems.
 To study the behaviour and response of MDOF structures with various dynamic loading.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course the student will be able to
 Understand the response of structural systems to dynamic loads and displacements.
 Realize the behaviour and response of structures subjected to harmonic and periodic loading.
 Predict the response of SDOF structures with Step and pulse dynamic loading.
 Analyse the earthquake response of SDOF linear systems.
 Analyse the structures with MDOF system under dynamic loading.
Knowledge on Statics
UNITI INTRODUCTION 9
Vibration and its importance to structural engineering problems – Problem Statement- Basic concepts of
structural dynamics-single degree of freedom system - Solution Methods of Single Degree of Freedom Systems
132
(SDOF) - force displacement relationship-damping force- equation of motion- mass-spring-dampersystem-
methods of solution of differential equation.
Free Vibration (SDOF): Undamped free vibration viscously damped free vibration.
UNITII RESPONSE TO HARMONIC AND PERIODIC EXCITATIONS (SDOF) 9
Harmonic vibration of undamped systems- Harmonic vibration with viscous damping-response to

vibrationgenerator- natural frequency and damping from harmonic test- force transmission and vibration isolation-
vibration measuring instruments- Response to periodic force.
UNITIII RESPONSE TO ARBITRARY, STEP AND PULSE EXCITATIONS (SDOF) 9
Response to unitimpulse-response to arbitrary force-step force- ramp force- response to pulse excitations-
solution methods- effects of viscous damping.
Numerical Evaluation of Dynamic Response (SDOF): Time step methods- methods based oninterpolation of
excitation-central difference method- new mark’s method- analysis of nonlinear response by newmark’s method.
UNITIV EARTHQUAKE RESPONSE TO LINEAR SYSTEMS (SDOF) 9
Earthquake excitation- equation of motion- response quantities- response history- responsespectrum concept-
peakstructural response from the response spectrum- response spectrum characteristics.
Generalised Single Degree of Freedom Systems: Generalised single degree of freedom system-system with
distributed mass and elasticity-lumped mass system-shearbuilding- natural vibration frequency by Rayleigh’s
method.
UNITV MULTI -DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS (MDOF) 9
Equation of motions-simple system two storey shear building-general approach for linearsystems-static
condensation.
Free Vibration: Natural frequencies and modes-modal and spectral matrices-Orthogonality of modes-
normalization of modes- Solution of undamped free vibration systems- solution methods for Eigenvalue problem.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. MadhujitMukhopadhyay, “Structural Dynamics Vibrations and Systems”, ANE Books India Publishers, 2010.
2. Mario Paz, Structural Dynamics, “Theory and Computation”, Kluwer Academic Publication, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Anil K.Chopra, “Dynamics of Structures”, Pearson Education Ltd., 2014.

2. Clough R W and Penzien J, “Dynamics of Structures”, McGraw Hill, INC, 1993.
3. Roy R.Craig, Jr, Andrew J. Kurdila, Fundamentals of Structural Dynamics, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
4. Leonard Meirovitch, “Elements of Vibration Analysis”, McGraw Hill, 1986,IOS Press, 2006.
5. Manickaselvam, V.K., “Elementary Structural Dynamics”, DhanpatRai& Sons, 2001.
133
L T P C
15CEC24 WASTE WATER ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students aware with the principles of collection, and planning for wastewater.
 To make the students familiar in conveyance of wastewater.
 To make the students aware with primary treatment of wastewater.
 To make the students conscious on secondary treatment of wastewater.
 To make the students knowledgeable with sludge management and disposal of wastewater.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Realize the Planning and learning of basic concepts of wastewater collection system.
 Understand the water sources and wastewater quality characteristics and stds.
 Identify the concepts behind the Design of appurtenances involved & Transmission main pipes and Pumps.
 Understand the concepts and terminologies behind the various wastewater treatment units.
 Know the principles behind the design using Planning and learning concepts of wastewater disposal & outfall
design and House drainage and plumbing systems.
Knowledge on Water Supply Engineering
UNIT I PLANNING FOR SEWERAGE SYSTEMS 9
Sources of wastewater generation – Effects – Estimation of sanitary sewage flow – Estimation of storm runoff –
Factors affecting Characteristics and composition of sewage and their significance – Effluent standards –
Legislation requirements.
UNIT II SEWER DESIGN 9
Sewerage – Hydraulics of flow in sewers – Objectives – Design period -Design of sanitary and storm sewers –
Small bore systems -Computer applications – Laying, joining & testing of sewers – appurtenances – Pumps –
selection of pumps and pipe Drainage -. Plumbing System for Buildings – One pipe and two pipe system.
UNIT III PRIMARY TREATMENT OF SEWAGE 9
Objective – Unit Operation and Processes – Selection of treatment processes – Onsite sanitation -Septic tank,
Grey water harvesting – Primary treatment – Principles, functions design and drawing of screen, grit chambers
and primary sedimentation tanks– Operation and Maintenance aspects.
UNIT IV SECONDARY TREATMENT OF SEWAGE 9
Objective – Selection of Treatment Methods – Principles, Functions, Design and Drawing of Units -Activated
Sludge Process and Trickling filter, other treatment methods – Oxidation ditches, UASB – Waste Stabilization
Ponds – Reclamation and Reuse of sewage -Recent Advances in Sewage Treatment – Construction and
Operation & Maintenance of Sewage Treatment Plants.
UNIT V DISPOSAL OF SEWAGE AND SLUDGE 9
Standards for Disposal -Methods – dilution – Self-purification of surface water bodies – Oxygen sag curve – Land
disposal – Sewage farming – Deep well injection – Soil dispersion system -Sludge characterization – Thickening
134
– Sludge digestion – Biogas recovery – Sludge Conditioning and Dewatering – disposal – Advances in Sludge
Treatment and disposal.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Garg, S.K., Environmental Engineering Vol. II, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Punmia,B.C.,Jain,A.K.,andJain.A.,Environmental Engineering, Vol.II, Lakshmi Publications, Newsletter,
2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development, Government of
India, New Delhi, 1997.
2. Waste Water Engineering – Treatment and Reuse, Tata Mc.Graw-Hill Company, New Delhi, 2003.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Modi, P.N., “Environmental Engineering II”, Standard Book House, Delhi – 6
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.wastewatereducation.org/
2. www. water.worldbank.org
L T P C
15CEC25 WATER RESOURCES SYSTEM PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart knowledge on water resources of the country
 To understand various components of hydrological cycle
 To realize the importance of utilizing water judiciously
 To be familiar with various flood control techniques
 To provide training on cost benefit analysis
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Collect all kinds of hydrological data and perform the analysis
 Design the optimum rain gauge network
 Prepare the water budget and development plan
 Estimate the sediment load in reservoirs
 Perform economic analysis of water resource projects
Knowledge on Water Supply Engineering
135
Water resources survey – Water resources of India and Tamilnadu – Description of water resources planning –
Economics of water resources planning, physical and socio economic data – National Water Policy – Collection
of meteorological and hydrological data for water resources development.
UNIT II HYDROLOGIC CYCLE 9
Components of Hydrological cycle - system representation– Historical development of hydrology – Weather

system – cloud and cloud seeding - General atmospheric circulation – Types and forms of precipitation –
measurement of rainfall – optimum rain gauge network design
UNIT III WATER RESOURCE NEEDS 9
Consumptive and non-consumptive water use - Estimation of water requirements for irrigation, for drinking and
navigation - Water characteristics and quality – Scope and aims of master plan - Concept of basin as a unit for
development - Water budget and development plan.
UNIT IV RESERVOIR PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT 9
Reservoir - Single and multipurpose – Multi objective - Fixation of Storage capacity –Strategies for reservoir
operation - Sedimentation of reservoirs - Design flood-levees and flood walls - Channel improvement – flood
warning – mitigation measures
UNIT V ECONOMIC ANALYSIS 9
Estimation of cost and Evaluation of Benefits - Discount rate - Discounting factors – Discounting techniques –
Computer Applications
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Linsley R.K. and Franzini J.B, “Water Resources Engineering”, McGraw-Hill Inc, 2000.
2. Douglas J.L. and Lee R.R., “Economics of Water Resources Planning”, Tata McGraw-HillInc. 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Chaturvedi M.C., “Water Resources Systems Planning and Management”, Tata McGraw-Hill Inc., New Delhi,
1997.
2. Goodman Alvin S., “Principles of Water Resources Planning”, Prentice-Hall, 1984
3. Maass et al, “Design of Water Resources Systems”, Macmillan, 1968.
136
L T P C
15CEC26 DESIGN OF PRESTRESSED CONCRETE ELEMENTS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic concepts of prestressing.
 To get familiar with the design principles of prestressed concrete.
 To get exposed to design of prestressed concrete tanks and pipes.
 To have good knowledge on analysis of composite members.
 To acquire knowledge on design of prestressed concrete bridges.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply basic fundamentals of prestressing.
 Design prestressed concrete flexural members.
 Design prestressed concrete tanks and pipes.
 Analyze composite members.
 Design prestressed concrete bridges.
Knowledge on Reinforced Concrete Elements
UNITI THEORY AND BEHAVIOUR 9
Basic concepts – advantages – materials required – systems and methods of prestressing – analysis of sections
– stress concept – strength concept – load balancing concept – effect of loading on the tensile stresses in
tendons – effect of tendon profile on deflections – factors influencing deflections – calculation of deflections –
short term and long term deflections - losses of prestress – estimation of crack width.
UNITII DESIGN CONCEPTS 9
Flexural strength – simplified procedures- codal provision – strain compatibility method – basic concepts in
selection of cross section for bending – stress distribution in end block - design of anchorage zone reinforcement
– limit state design criteria – partial prestressing – applications.
UNITIII CIRCULAR PRESTRESSING 9
Introduction – General features of prestressed concrete tanks –Analysis and Design of prestressed concrete
tanks – Design of cylindrical and non-cylindrical pipe.
UNITIV COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION 9
Types - Analysis for stresses –Differential shrinkage - estimate for deflections – flexural and shear strength of
composite members.
UNITV PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE BRIDGES 9
General aspects –Advantages –pretensionedprestressed concrete bridge decks – Post tensioned prestressed
concrete bridge decks – Principles of design only.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
137
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Krishna Raju N., “Prestressed concrete”, Tata McGraw Hill Company, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Pandit.G.S. and Gupta.S.P., "Prestressed Concrete", CBS Publishers and Distributers Pvt. Ltd, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajagopalan, N, “Prestressed Concrete”, Alpha Science, 2002.

2. Dayaratnam.P., "Prestressed Concrete Structures", Oxford and IBH, 2013.
3. Lin T.Y. and Ned.H.Burns, "Design of prestressed Concrete Structures", Third Edition, Wiley India Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
EXTENSIVE READING
1. David A.Sheppard, William R. and Philips, “Plant cast precast and prestressed concrete – A design
guide”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi 1992.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/105106117/
2. http://www.assakkaf.com/ence_454_lecture_notes.htm
3. http://faculty.delhi.edu/hultendc/AECT480-Lecture%2024.pdf
4. http://www.colincaprani.com/structural-engineering/courses/lecture-notes/
CODE BOOKS:
1. IS: 1343 – 1980 Prestressed concrete – Code of Practice

2. IS: 784 - 2001 - IS Specification for Prestressed Concrete Pipes.IS: 6006-1983 Uncoated Stress
relieved Strand for Prestressed concrete
3. IS: 3370 - 1999 - Part IV - IS Code of Practice for Concrete Structures for the storage of liquids.
138
CORE ELECTIVES
VIII SEMESTER
L T P C
15CEC27 INTERIOR DECORATION
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the fundamentals related to the interior design.
 To provide knowledge on principles of interior design.
 To create awareness about the uses of materials in interior design.
 To impart knowledge on utilization of furniture in various rooms.
 To provide knowledge on various types of staircases.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply the concepts of interior design into practice.
 Analyse the fundamentals of interior design based on site conditions.
 Practice the interior design using locally available materials.
 Design the rooms elegantly with various type of furniture styles.
 Apply the fundamental concepts in the choice of staircases
Knowledge on Housing Planning and Management
UNIT I ELEMENTS OF INTERIOR DESIGN 9
Drawing instruments-materials used-care and maintenance. Introduction to code of practice - general Interior and
Interior drawings-definitions- construction of plan-elevation- section-Use anthropometrics in interiors.
UNIT II PRINCIPLES OF INTERIOR DESIGN 9
Introduction - basic interiors- elements -principles of design - Color & color scheme –choice and use of colours-
balance-order
UNIT III MATERIALS UTILIZATION IN INTERIOR DESIGN 9
Introduction -properties of materials-Types of ceramic materials-glasses and plywood -their utilization in interior
design.
UNIT IV INTERIOR LAYOUT 9
Space selection - furniture styles - selection of furniture- use of furniture templates-design of furniture -different
purposes– bedrooms- dining hall- kitchen-office space -measurement of drawing as per design.
UNIT V STAIRCASES 9
Materials - plan and design of staircase-details of construction-bricks- stone - R.C.C –mezzinine floor-elegance-
order in choice of staircase
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
139
TEXTBOOKS:
1. PratapR.M,“Interior Design principles and practice”, Standard publishers distribution, Delhi,1988.

2. Faulkner, S.-and Faulkner,R, “Inside Today’s Home”, Rine hart publishing company, Newyork. 1987
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Seetharaman P. “Interior Design And Decoration”, Text books zone,2014.
L T P C
15CEC28 RISK AND VALUE MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the fundamentals related to the project risks
 To provide knowledge on various characteristics of human aspects in the project management
 To create awareness about the risk management systems.
 To create awareness about the various methods of qualitative risk assessment
 To impart knowledge on various value engineering methods.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Forecast the factors affecting the project risks.
 Apply the various human aspects of the projects.
 Assess the risk management system
 Apply the various methods of qualitative risk assessment.
 Evaluate the building using the fundamentals of the value engineering
Knowledge on Project Management
UNIT I PROJECT RISKS 9
Definition, dynamic and static risk, uncertainty and risk, Risk and construction project time, money and
technology, the people and the risks, processes and risks, risks and clients, consultants and contractors, risk
allocation in contracting.
UNIT II HUMAN ASPECTS 9
Personnel attitude towards risk, perceptions and risks, individuals and groups, communication in risk
management, concept of utility and risks.
UNIT III RISK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Risk identification, sources of risks, risk classification, types, impact and consequences of risk, risk analysis,
Sensitivity analysis, breakeven analysis ,scenario analysis, risk response: retention, reduction, transfer,
avoidance
140
UNIT IV QUALITATIVE AND QUANTITATIVE METHODS IN RISK 9
MANAGEMENT
Qualitative risk assessment, risk register, probability – Impact matrix, project appraisal, cost benefit analysis,
Monte- Carlo technique, portfolio theory, Delphi method, influence diagrams, decision trees.
UNIT V VALUE ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT 9
Value, Reasons of poor value in constructed facilities, habits, road blocks and attitudes.-job plan, function
analysis, purpose and implications of life cycle costs, Impact of energy on cost of constructed facilities, managing
value engineering study.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Michael F. Dallas, “Value and Risk Management: A Guide to Best Practice” WB; 1 edition,2011.
2. John Kelly, Steven Male& Drummond Graham, “Value Management of Construction Projects”, Wiley-
Blackwell; 2nd Edition, 2014
3. Simon A. Burtonshaw-Gunn, “Risk and Financial Management in Construction” Gower, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. J. Jerry Kaufman, “Value Management: Creating Competitive Advantage” Sakura House Publishing,
2009.
2. Anil Kumar Mukhopadhyaya, “Value Engineering Mastermind: From Concept to Value Engineering
Certification”, SAGE Publications Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
L T P C
15CEC29 SOLID AND HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the effects of poor waste management and types of solid waste
 To Identify the components of a waste collection system
 To recognize the collection system for waste management
 To realize the ideas/ways involving in the processing of solid waste
 To know the impact of waste processing various options for disposal of wastes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Classify solid wastes explain the functional elements of SWM and determine the effects of poor waste
management on public health and the environment.
 Discuss the various components of a waste collection system and to explain the characteristics of waste
containers relative to their use.
 Evaluate how a collection system is planned , implemented and maintain the required data for record
keeping and inventory control.
 Identify the purpose of waste processing and explain the processing techniques for reducing the volume
and size of wastes.
141
 Evaluate the various options for disposal of wastes and their selection criteria.
Knowledge on basics of waste management
UNIT I SOURCES AND TYPES OF MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTES 9
Sources and types of solid wastes - Quantity – factors affecting generation of solid wastes - Characteristics –
methods of sampling and characterization; Effects of improper disposal of solid wastes – public health effects.
Principle of solid waste management – social & economic aspects; Public awareness; Role of NGOs; Legislation.
UNIT II ON-SITE STORAGE & PROCESSING 9
On-site storage methods – materials used for containers – on-site segregation of solid wastes –public health &
economic aspects of storage – options under Indian conditions – Critical Evaluation of Options.
UNIT III COLLECTION AND TRANSFER 9
Methods of Collection – types of vehicles – Manpower requirement – collection routes; transfer stations –
selection of location, operation & maintenance; options under Indian conditions.
UNIT IV OFF-SITE PROCESSING 9
Processing techniques and Equipment; Resource recovery from solid wastes – composting,
Incineration, Pyrolysis - options under Indian conditions.
UNIT V DISPOSAL 9
Dumping of solid waste; sanitary landfills – site selection, design and operation of sanitary - Landfills – Leachate
collection j& treatment
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. George Tchobanoglous et.al, “Integrated Solid Waste Management”, McGraw-Hill Publishers, 1993.
2. B.Bilitewski, G.HardHe, K.Marek, A.Weissbach, and H.Boeddicker, “Waste Management”, Springer, 1994.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Manual on Municipal Solid Waste Management, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development,

Government of India, New Delhi, 2000
2. R.E.Landreth and P.A.Rebers, “Municipal Solid Wastes – problems and Solutions”, Lewis Publishers, 1997.
3. Bhide A.D. and Sundaresan, B.B., “Solid Waste Management in Developing Countries”, INSDOC, 1993.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.w3schools.in/
2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/
142
L T P C
15CEC30 TRAFFIC PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the fundamentals related to the traffic flow.
 To provide knowledge on traffic signals and its operation.
 To create awareness about the control measures for traffic flow and fundamentals of traffic engineering.
 To impart knowledge on accident risk and its’ management
 To provide knowledge on Traffic management measures.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyse the various types of traffic flow.
 Plan and design the traffic signal duration.
 Practice the traffic engineering and practice the control measures.
 Analyse the causes and report the accident.
 Manage the traffic congestion using the available management measures.
UNIT I THEORY OF TRAFFIC FLOW 9
cope - definitions - basic relationship- flow-density- capacity. Speed studies- car following theory and its
application to traffic engineering - probabilistic description of traffic flow-introduction to queuing theory- traffic flow
problems for steady state conditions-simulation -tools.
UNIT II TRAFFIC SIGNALS 9
Traffic signals- types- advantages - optimal cycle time - signal setting for an intersection-fixed time signals. co-
ordination of signals- types- area traffic control - delay at signalized intersection.
UNIT III TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND CONTROL 9
Review of various traffic surveys - traffic Studies-statistical methods - traffic engineering and their applications –
distributions - sampling theory - significance testing - regression and correlation- intersection design-principles -
various available alternatives - rotary design – roundabouts
UNIT IV ACCIDENTS AND ROAD SAFETY 9
Accident – causes - reporting system - types of accidents - recording system- analysis and preventive
measures. accident cost - alternative methodologies for calculation – modeling – collision diagram-road safety-
road users -awareness- road users cost.
UNIT V TRAFFIC SYSTEM MANAGEMENT 9
Traffic system management -various measures – scope - relative merits and demerits. Highway capacity -
passenger car units (PCU) - level of service - factor affecting capacity -level of service- influence of mixed traffic.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
143
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dr. L.R.Kadiyali, “Traffic engineering and transport planning ”,Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 8th Edition ,2014.
2. SubhashSaxena, “A Course in Traffic Engineering and Design”, DhanpatRai& Sons,2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. G.J. Pingnataro, “Principles of Traffic Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 1970.

2. Wohl and Martin, “Traffic System Analysis for Engineering and Planners”, McGraw Hill, 1983.
L T P C
15CEC31 ELEMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the planning and classification of various industries.
 To analyse the functional requirements of industrial structures.
 To get accustomed to the design of steel structures in various industries.
 To get exposed to the design of industrial RC structures.
 To explore the design of Power Transmission line structures
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Evaluate the planning requirements for industries
 Sort out functional requirements for industries
 Execute the design of industrial steel structures
 Design industrial structures with RCC
 Workout the design of Power Transmission Structures
Knowledge on RCC and Steel Elements
UNIT I PLANNING 9
Classification of Industries and Industrial structures –General requirements for industries like cement, chemical and
steel plants – Planning and layout of buildings and components
UNIT II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENT 9
Lighting – Ventilation – Accounts – Fire safety – Guidelines from factories act.
UNIT III DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES 9
Industrial roofs – Crane girders - Design of Bunkers and Silos
UNIT IV DESIGN OF R.C. STRUCTURES 9
Silos and bunkers – Chimneys – Principles of folded plates and shell roofs
UNIT V POWER TRANSMISSION STRUCTURE 9
Towers - Tower foundation - Classification and types of foundation - Testing of towers - Loads of transmission line
towers - Foundation of TL towers Forces - on tower foundation - Types of substation - Power cables and control
cables
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
144
TEXT BOOKS:
1. KrishnaRaju. N “Structural Design and Drawing: Reinforced Concrete and Steel”, University Press (India) Pvt
Limited, 2004.
2. B. C. Punmia, Ashok Kr. Jain, “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete “, 2007
REFERENCES
1. Henn W. Buildings for Industry, vols.I and II, London Hill Books, 1995
2. Handbook on Functional Requirements of Industrial buildings, SP32 – 1986, Bureau of Indian Standards, New
Delhi 1990
3. Course Notes on Modern Developments in the Design and Construction of Industrial Structures, Structural
Engineering Research Centre, Madras, 1982
4. Duggal, “Design of Steel Structures”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2009.
5. ShanthaKumarA.R., “Transmission line structures”, Tata McGraw-HillEducation, 2010
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Water Henn, “ Buildings for industry”, John Wiley and Sons. 1998
2. Glover, “ StructuralPre cast Concrete”, Tata McGraw Hill. 1997
3. Dunham, “Planning of industrial structures”, Tata McGraw Hill2002
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101040/download/Lec-33.pdf
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105106113/2_industrial_building/1_introduction.pdf
3. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105106113/7_transmission_towers/4_tower_design.pdf
CODE BOOKS:
1. IS:802 - Part III - 1978, Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead transmission line tower ,BIS, New
Delhi.
2. IS:4091-1979, Code of practice for design and construction of foundations for transmission line towers and poles,
BIS, New Delhi.
3. IS:6533 – Part II- 1989, Indian standard code of practice for design and construction of steel Chimney, BIS, New
Delhi.
4. IS:6332 - 1984, Code of practice for construction of floors and roofs using precast double curved shell units, BIS,
New Delhi
5. IS:2204 - 1962, Code of practice for construction of reinforced concrete shell roof, BIS, New Delhi
6. SP32 – 1986 Handbook on Functional Requirements of Industrial buildings, BIS, New Delhi
145
ALLIED ELECTIVES – SYLLABUS
Offered by EEE Department
15EEA01 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
 Measurement of force, torque and speed.
 Measurement of industrial parameters like acceleration, Vibration and density.
 Monitoring techniques for pressure in industrial process.
 Advanced techniques for temperature and high temperature measurement.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Analyze Instrumentation systems and explain their applications to various industries.
 Measure the changes in pressure, temperature in an industry.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basics of measurements standards – Instrumentation system – Basic knowledge on industrial process.
UNIT I CHARACTERISTICS, ERRORS & STANDARDS OF INSTRUMENTS 9
Functional elements of generalized instrumentation systems- Static and dynamic characteristics of measuring
instruments- Absolute, gross, systematic, random and limiting errors in measurements - Statistical estimation of
measurements data (Arithmetic mean, Average deviation, Standard deviation, Variance and Probable error of
mean) – Standards and calibration.
UNIT II MEASUREMENT OF ACCELERATION, VIBRATION AND FORCE 9
Accelerometers: - LVDT, Piezoelectric, Strain gauge and Variable reluctance type accelerometers - Seismic
instruments as accelerometer - Vibration sensor. Different types of load cells - Hydraulic, Pneumatic, strain
gauge and Piezoelectric load cells
UNIT III PRESSURE MEASUREMENT 9
Units of pressure – Manometers and their types,-McLeod Gauge-Elastic type pressure gauges: Bourdon tube,
bellows and diaphragms - Capacitive type pressure gauge – Piezo-resistive pressure sensor- Thermal
conductivity gauges – Ionization gauge - calibration of pressure gauges. Dead weight tester.
UNIT IV LOW TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 9
Definitions and standards - Primary and secondary fixed points - Calibration of thermometers - Different types of
filled in system thermometers - Bimetallic thermometers - RTD - characteristics and signal conditioning-3 lead
and 4 lead RTDs - Thermistors.
UNIT V HIGH TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 9
Thermocouples - Laws of thermocouple - Fabrication of industrial thermocouples – Compensating cable- Signal

conditioning for thermocouple - Radiation fundamentals - Radiation methods of temperature measurement - Total
radiation pyrometers - Optical pyrometers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
146
TEXTBOOKS:
2. Doebellin, E.O.and Manik D.N., “Measurement systems Application and Design”, Special Indian Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, 2007.
3. Jones. B.E, "Instrument Technology”, Vol.2, Butterworth-Heinemann, International Edition, 2003.
4. A. K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, “Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation and

Control”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Liptak, B.G., “Instrumentation Engineers Handbook (Measurement)”, CRC Press, 2005
2. Patranabis,D., “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
3. Eckman D.P., “Industrial Instrumentation”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 2003.
4. S.K.Singh., “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw - Hill Education, 2008.
5. Jain, R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1999.
15EEA02 ILLUMINATION ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart in-depth knowledge on illumination and requirements of energy efficient lighting.

 To make the students familiar with measurement of illumination.
 To make the students design a lighting scheme.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to

 Explicate the different types of lighting schemes.
 Elucidate the measurement of light.
 Explain the working of different lamps.
 Demonstrate the ability to design illumination systems for desired specifications.
 Demonstrate the awareness of impact of energy conservation approach to illumination systems.
Basics of Electrical Engineering, awareness about artificial lighting, Energy Conservation, Algebra, Trigonometry.
UNIT I LIGHTING FUNDAMENTALS 9
Nature of light – Importance of lighting – sensitivity of eye – colour sensation – Quantum theory of light – Terms
used in illumination – Polar Curve – Laws of illumination – Illumination at a point – Types of reflection – Types of
lighting schemes – Requirements of good lighting – Stroboscopic effect – Factory lighting – Flood lighting –
Street lighting.
UNIT II PHOTOMETRY 9
Grease Spot Photometer Head – Lummer - Brodhun Photometer Head – Flicker Photometer – Measurement of
MSCP by Integrating Sphere – Photovoltaic cell – Distribution photometry – Illumination Photometer.
147
UNIT III LAMPS AND FITTINGS 9
Filament lamps – Arc lamps – Fluorescent lamps – Mercury Vapour lamps – Sodium Vapour lamps – Halogen
lamps – Neon lamps – Induction lamps – Emergency Lamps – lighting for displays and signaling – neon signs,
Lamp fittings – Symmetrical fittings, Asymmetrical fittings.
UNIT IV LIGHTING DESIGN AND CALCULATIONS 9
Basic design of illumination schemes for residential, commercial, street lighting, and sports ground. Selection of
lamps – Calculation of wattage, number and arrangement of lamps – Space height ratio – Calculation of
illumination level available.
UNIT V ENERGY EFFICIENT LAMPS AND WIRING METHODOLOGY 9
Compact Fluorescent Lamp (CFL) – Selection of CFL – Lumens output – Disposal of waste CFL – Limitations of
CFL – Cold Cathode CFL, LED – Terminologies – Choice of LED Lamps for different lighting requirements –
Benefits of LED lighting – CFL Vs LED lighting, 12V DC home wiring – Solar powered lamps – Importance –
Constraints in 12V DC wiring – Voltage Regulation devices – wiring and distribution, Necessary Appliances.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Joseph B. Murdoch, "Illumination Engineering from Edison's Lamp to the Laser, second edition, Visions
Comm., 1994.
2. Jack L. Lindsey, "Applied Illumination Engineering" The Fairmont Press Inc., 1991.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ronald N. Helms, M. Clay Beicher, "Lighting for Energy Efficient Luminous Environments", Prentice
Hall, 1991.
2. Marc Schiler, "Simplified Design of Building Lighting" John Wiley and Sons, 1992.
3. IES Lighting Handbook, 8th edition, 1993.
4. C.L. Wadhwa, ‘Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy’, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd, Third Edition 2015.
5. J.B. Gupta, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Eleventh Edition
2015.
6. G.C.Garg, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, Khanna Publishers, Ninth Edition 2009.
7. A.Chakrabarti, M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta, U.S.Bhatnagar, ‘A text Book on Power System Engineering”,

Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2009.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://energy.gov/energysaver/articles/induction-lighting-old-lighting-technology-made-new-again
2. http://www.buildings.com/article-details/articleid/18718/title/led-vs-induction-lighting/viewall/true.aspx
3. http://www.edisontechcenter.org/InductionLamps.html
4. http://eartheasy.com/live_energyeff_lighting.htm
5. http://dreamgreenhouse.com/designs/12v/index.php
148
6. http://www.treehugger.com/sustainable-product-design/big-steps-in-building-change-our-wiring-to-12-
volt-dc.html
7. https://www.nelt.co.jp/english/products/ccfl/about.html
15EEA03 SWITCHED MODE POWER CONVERTERS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Different types of power semi-conductor devices and their switching characteristics.
 Operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers.
 Operation, switching techniques and basic topologies of DC-DC switching regulators.
 Different modulation techniques of pulse width modulated inverters and to understand the harmonic
reduction methods.
 Operation of AC voltage controllers
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Identify and select the switching devices for different power converter applications.
 Design a suitable DC power supply for given load specification from AC or DC supply.
 Design and analyze the single or three phase inverter.
 Analyze the AC voltage controller
Semiconductor physics, Steady state operation of single phase AC circuits, Differentiation, Integration and
Fourier series
UNIT I POWER SEMI-CONDUCTOR DEVICES 9
Introduction to Power Electronics - Study of switching devices: structure, operation, static and switching
characteristics of SCR, TRIAC, BJT, MOSFET, IGBT-SCR: Two Transistor model, turn on circuits and
commutation circuits
UNIT II PHASE-CONTROLLED CONVERTERS 9
1-pulse, 2-pulse converters - circuit, operation, waveforms - Estimation of average load voltage and average
load current for continuous current operation - Input power factor estimation for ripple free load current
UNIT III DC TO DC CONVERTER 9
Step-down and step-up chopper - Time ratio control and current limit control – Buck, boost, buck-boost
converter-Isolated Converters: Fly back and Forward converter
UNIT IV INVERTERS 9
0 0
Single phase and three phase inverters (both 120 mode and 180 mode) - PWM techniques: single, multiple,
sinusoidal PWM, modified sinusoidal PWM – Voltage and harmonic control
UNIT V AC TO AC CONVERTERS 9
Single phase AC voltage controllers –Integral cycle control, phase angle control - Estimation of RMS load
voltage, RMS load current and input power factor - Single phase cycloconverter
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
149
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Muhammad H.Rashid, “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Pearson Publication, 4
Edition, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mohan, Undeland, Robbins,” Power Electronics: Converters Applications and Design”, John Wiley &
Sons, 3rd Edition, 2003
2. Robert W. Erickson, Dragan Maksimovic, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Springer Science &
nd
Business Media, 2 edition 2001.
15EEA04 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Power generation through various methods.
 Importance of measuring devices in power plant.
 Boiler control techniques and turbine control techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Demonstrate the measurement of various power plant parameters.
 Implement various Control techniques in power generation process.
Basics of Measurements & instrumentation – Power plant working concepts - Knowledge on power plant
parameters controls – Fundamentals of control system .
UNIT I MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION IN POWER PLANT - I 9

Importance of measurement and instrumentation in power plant. Measurement of water purity- Measurement of
dissolved oxygen in feed water- Measurement of PH value of water- Measurement of O2,CO2, and CO content in
the gases - Measurement of Smoke and Dust- Dosimeters.
UNIT II MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION IN POWER PLANT - II 9
Measurement of feed water flow, air flow, steam flow and coal flow – Drum level measurement – Steam pressure
and temperature measurement – Turbine speed and vibration measurement.
UNIT III BOILER CONTROL 9
Combustion of fuel and excess air – Firing rate demand – Steam temperature control – Drum level control –
Single, two and three element control – Furnace draft control– flue gas dew point control.
UNIT IV BURNER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Burners for liquid and solid fuels – Burner management – Furnace safety interlocks – Coal pulverizer control –
Combustion control for liquid and solid fuel fired boilers – air/fuel ratio control.
UNIT V CONTROL OF TURBINE 9
Types of steam turbines – impulse and reaction turbines – compounding – Turbine governing system – Speed
and Load control- Basics of Automatic Load Frequency Control- Free Governor Mode of Operation (FGMO) -
Restricted Governor Mode of Operation (RGMO).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
150
TEXTBOOKS:
1. S.C.Arora,S. Domkundwar,” Power plant Engineering”Dhanpat Rai &Co (P)Ltd,2015.

2. Sam Dukelow, “Control of Boilers”, Instrument Society of America, 2009.
3. Everett Woodruff , Herbert Lammers, Thomas Lammers, “Steam Plant Operation”,9th Edition
McGraw Hill, 2012.
4. Rajput R.K., “A Text book of Power plant Engineering”. 5th Edition, Lakshmi Publications, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Liptak B.G., “Instrumentation in Process Industries”, Chilton Book Company, 2005.
2. Jain R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2010.
3. P.K.Nag, “Powerplant Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 3rd edition, 2007.
4. Tamilmani, “Power plant instrumentation”, Sams Publishers, 2011.
5. Krishnaswamy.K and Ponnibala.M., “Power Plant Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd., New
Delhi, 2011.
15EEA05 ELECTRICAL MACHINES AND DRIVES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The basic concepts of different types of electrical machines and their performance.
 The different methods of starting D.C motors and induction motors.
 Conventional and solid-state DC and AC drives.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Demonstrate the concepts and different types of electrical machines.
 Deliver the impact of starting D.C motors and induction motors.
 Explain about conventional and solid-state DC and AC drives.
Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO D.C. MACHINES 9
DC Machine – Construction – DC generator - Principle of operation – EMF equation – Self and separately excited
generators – Characteristics of series, shunt and compound generators. DC motor–Principle of operation – Back
emf and torque equation – characteristics - applications.
UNIT II A.C. MACHINES 9
Alternators – Construction – Types – Induced EMF – Voltage regulation – EMF and MMF methods. Three-phase
induction motors – Construction – Types – Principle of operation – slip-torque characteristics. Single-phase
induction motors – Construction–Types– Principle of operation.
151
UNIT III STARTING METHODS 9
Types of D.C Motor starters – Two point, three point and four point starter. Types of A.C Motor starters – DOL,
Auto transformer, Star-Delta and Rotor Resistance starter.
UNIT IV CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL OF D.C. 9

DRIVES (Qualitative treatment only)
Speed control of DC series and shunt motors – Armature and field control, Ward- Leonard control system - Using
controlled rectifiers and DC choppers(Circuit diagram and operation) –applications.
UNIT V CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL 9

OF A.C. DRIVES (Qualitative treatment only)
Speed control of three phase induction motor – Voltage control, V/f control, slip power recovery scheme – Using
inverters and AC voltage regulators (Circuit diagram and operation)– applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. A K Theraja & B L Theraja “A Text Book of Electrical Technology Vol-2,” 23 Edition S.Chand
Publications, 2007.
2. Dubey G.K., “Fundamentals of Electrical Drives”, Narosa Publishing House, Second Edition, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. P.C.Sen.,“Principles of Electrical Machines and Power Electronics”, Second Edition ,Wiley India Pvt.
Lt&Sons. 2013.
2. K. Murugesh Kumar, “Electric Machines”, Vikas publishing house Pvt Ltd, 2002.
3. M.D.Singh, K.B.Khanchandani, “Power Electronics”, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.

4. Vedam Subramanyam, “Electric Drives – Concepts and Applications”, Second Edition, McGraw Hill,
2010.
5. Nagrath .I.J. & Kothari .D.P, “Electrical Machines” ,Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
15EEA06 Real Time Embedded Systems L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The architecture and programming of ARM processor.
 The embedded computing platform design and analysis.
 The basic concepts of real time Operating system.
 The fundamentals of filters.
 The system design techniques and networks for embedded systems
152
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Describe the architecture and programming of ARM processor..
 Explain the basic concepts of real time Operating system design.
 Use the system design techniques to develop software for embedded systems.
 Model real-time applications using embedded-system concepts.
Basics of Microprocessor and Microcontrollers

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED COMPUTING AND ARM 9
PROCESSORS
Complex systems and micro processors– Embedded system design process –Design example: Model train
controller- Instruction sets preliminaries – ARM Processor – CPU: programming input and output- supervisor
mode, exceptions and traps – Co-processors- Memory system mechanisms – CPU performance- CPU power
consumption.
UNIT II EMBEDDED COMPUTING PLATFORM AND DESIGN ANALYSIS 9
CPU buses – Memory devices – I/O devices – Component interfacing – Design with microprocessors –
Development and Debugging – Program design – Model of programs – Assembly and Linking – Basic
compilation techniques – Analysis and optimization of execution time, power, energy, program size – Program
validation and testing.
UNIT III PROCESSES AND OPERATING SYSTEMS 9
Multiple tasks and multi processes – Processes – Context Switching – Operating Systems –Scheduling policies -
Multiprocessor – Inter Process Communication mechanisms – Evaluating operating system performance – Power
optimization strategies for processes.
UNIT IV SYSTEM DESIGN TECHNIQUES AND NETWORKS 9
Design methodologies- Design flows – Requirement Analysis – Specifications-System analysis and architecture
design – Quality Assurance techniques- Distributed embedded systems – MPSoCs and shared memory
multiprocessors.
UNIT V CASE STUDY 9
Data compressor – Alarm Clock – Audio player – Software modem-Digital still camera – Telephone answering
machine-Engine control unit – Video accelerator.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Wayne Wolf, “Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded Computer System Design”, Morgan
Kaufmann Publisher, 2006.
2. Marilyn Wolf, “Computers as Components – Principles of Embedded Computing System Design”, Third
Edition “Morgan Kaufmann Publisher (An imprint from Elsevier), 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jonathan W.Valvano, “Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real Time Interfacing”, Third Edition
Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. David. E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, 1st Edition, Fifth Impression, Addison-Wesley
Professional, 2007.
3. Raymond J.A. Buhr, Donald L.Bailey, “An Introduction to Real-Time Systems- From Design to
Networking with C/C++”, Prentice Hall, 1999.
4. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real-Time Systems”, International Editions, Mc Graw Hill 1997
5. K.V.K.K.Prasad, “Embedded Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design & Programming”, Dream Tech
Press, 2005.
6. Sriram V Iyer, Pankaj Gupta, “Embedded Real Time Systems Programming”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.
153
15EEA07 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRIC POWER UTILIZATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Different types of lamps
 Methods of heating and welding
 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
 Electrolytic processes and storage of electricity
 Electric traction systems
 Electrical energy conservation
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Elucidate the working of various electric lamps and the various types of electric heating, electric welding
and design a heating element
 Explain the working principle of refrigerators and Air Conditioning System
 Explain about electrolytic processes and storage of electricity
 Explain about electric traction.
 Explicate the importance of electrical energy conservation and apply various measures for economic
aspects of utilising electrical energy
Basics of Electrical Engineering, Effects of electric current, Chemical reactions in electrolyte, awareness
about artificial lighting, refrigeration and air conditioning, Characteristics and application of different electric
motors, awareness about traction, Algebra, Trigonometry.
UNIT I ILLUMINATION, INDUSTRIAL HEATING AND WELDING 9
Different types of lamps - incandescent – fluorescent – mercury vapour lamps.

Role of electric heating for industrial applications – resistance heating – induction heating – dielectric heating -
electric arc furnaces.
Brief introduction to electric welding – welding generator, welding transformer and their characteristics.
UNIT II REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 9
Principle of a refrigerator – Vapour Compression System – Mechanical and Electrical circuits – Voltage Regulator
– Water Cooler – Coefficient of Performance – Standard rating – Maintenance and trouble shooting of
refrigerators – Air conditioning system – Types – operation – Mechanical and Electrical circuits – Cooling
capacity – Thermo-electric Refrigeration – Central Air Conditioning System.
UNIT III ELECTROLYTIC PROCESSES AND STORAGE OF ELECTRICITY 9
Electrolysis, Faraday’s laws of Electrolysis – Electroplating – Electrical Equipments – Agitation and Filtration
Plant – Extraction and refining of metals – Storage of Electricity – Lead Acid Battery – Characteristics –
Indications of a fully charged battery – Nickel iron and Nickel cadmium batteries – Applications –Capacity rating
of batteries – Charging and maintenance of batteries – Battery chargers.
UNIT IV ELECTRIC TRACTION 9
Merits of electric traction – requirements of electric traction system – supply systems – traction motors – d.c.
series motor – mechanics of train movement – Speed Time curve –tractive effort – specific energy consumption.
154
UNIT V ECONOMIC ASPECTS OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY UTILISATION 9
Introduction to Energy conservation and Energy auditing - Tools for Energy auditing – Energy conservation in
Chemical industry, Pulp and Paper industry, Sugar industry, Cement industry, Textile industry, Iron and Steel
Industry – Energy Conservation in household and commercial sectors – Energy Conservation Legislation –
Tariffs - Influence of power factor – The most economic power factor - PF improvement.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. C.L. Wadhwa, ‘Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy’, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd, Third Edition 2015.
2. E. Openshaw Taylor, ‘Utilization of Electrical Energy in SI Units’, Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd, Eleventh
Edition 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. H. Partab, ‘Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy’, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, Third
Edition 2014.
2. J.B. Gupta, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Eleventh Edition
2015.
3. G.C.Garg, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, Khanna Publishers, Ninth Edition 2009.
4. A.Chakrabarti, M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta, U.S.Bhatnagar, ‘A text Book on Power System Engineering”,

Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2009.
5. N.V.Suryanarayana, ‘Utilisation of Electric Power : Including Electric Drives and Electric Traction’, New
Age International Publishers, Second Edition 2014.
6. V.K.Mehta, Rohit Mehta, ‘Basic Electrical Engineering’, S.Chand Limited, 2008.
15EEA08 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES AND APPLICATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide an introduction to the emerging area of intelligent control and optimization.

 To impart knowledge on expert systems, fuzzy logic systems, artificial neural networks and optimization
techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Explain the concept of intelligent control and their applications.
 Analyze Fuzzy Logic and Artificial Neural Networks through case studies.
 Design Genetic Algorithms system through case study.
Basic understanding of problem solving, design and analysis of algorithms, Algebra, Elementary differential
Calculus, probability, basic knowledge on human nervous system and nervous cells.
155
Approaches to intelligent control – Architecture for intelligent control – Symbolic reasoning system – rule-based
systems – the AI approach – Knowledge representation – Expert systems.
UNIT II ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Concept of Artificial Neural Network and its basic mathematical model – McCulloch-Pitts neuron model – simple
perceptron – Adaline and Madaline – Feed-forward Multilayer Perceptron – Learning and Training the neural
network – Hopfield network – Self-organizing network – Neural Network based controller.
UNIT III GENETIC ALGORITHM AND ANT-COLONY OPTIMIZATION 9

TECHNIQUE
Basic concept of Genetic algorithm and detailed algorithmic steps – Flowchart – GA operators – adjustment of
GA parameters – Concept of ant-colony search technique for solving optimization problems.
UNIT IV FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEM 9
Introduction to crisp sets and fuzzy sets – basic fuzzy set operation and approximate reasoning – Introduction to
fuzzy logic modeling and control – Fuzzification – inferencing and defuzzification – Fuzzy knowledge and rule
bases.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
Applications of Neural Network to engineering problems – GA applications to engineering optimisation problems

– Fuzzy modeling and control schemes for non-linear systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Sivanandam S.N., Deepa S.N., “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., Reprint 2012.
2. Jang J.S.R., Sun C.T. and Mizutani E., “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing: A Computational Approach
to Learning and Machine Intelligence”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jacek.M.Zurada, “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems”, Jaico Publishing House, 1999.
2. Klir G.J., Folger T.A., “Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1993.
3. Zimmerman H.J., “Fuzzy set theory-and its Applications”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1994.
4. Driankov D., Hellendoorn H., Reinfrank M., “Introduction to Fuzzy Control”, Narosa Publishers, 2001.
5. Goldberg D.E., “Genetic algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine learning”, Addison Wesley,
1989.
6. Padhy N.P., “Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent System, Oxford University Press, 2005.
7. Allain Bonnet, “Artificial Intelligence – Promise and Performance, Prentice Hall International Publishers,
1985.
8. Sivanandam S.N., Paulraj M., “Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt.
Ltd., First Edition, 2003.
9. Donald A. Waterman, “A Guide to Expert Systems”, Addison-Wesley Publishers, Second Edition, 1993.
156
15EEA09 FUNDAMENTALS OF POWER QUALITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Various Power Quality issues.
 Power quality problems and methods of control.
 Various methods of power quality monitoring and suppression.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Analyze the various power quality issues.
 Analyze the power quality events and assessment.
 Mitigate the power quality problems using relevant devices.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO POWER QUALITY 9
Terms and definitions: Overloading, under voltage, sustained interruption; sags and swells; waveform distortion,
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Associations (CBEMA) curve.
UNIT II VOLTAGE SAGS ANDSWELLS 9
Sources of sags and interruptions, estimating voltage sag performance, motor starting sags, estimating the sag
severity, fast transfer switches- Sources of over voltages: Capacitor switching, lightning, ferro-resonance;
mitigation of voltage swells
UNIT III HARMONICS 9
Harmonic distortion: Voltage and current distortion, THD-TDD, harmonic sources from commercial and industrial
loads, locating harmonic sources- resonance-harmonic distortion evaluation, devices for controlling harmonic
distortion, passive filters, active filters
UNIT IV Power Quality Benchmarking 9
Benchmarking Process-RMS voltage variation Indices-Harmonic Indices-Power Quality Contracts-Power Quality

Insurance
UNIT V POWER QUALITY MONITORING 9
Monitoring consideration-Power quality measurement equipment: harmonic / spectrum analyzer, flicker meters,
disturbance analyzer- applications of expert system for power quality monitoring.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Roger.C.Dugan, Mark.F.McGranagham, Surya Santoso, H.Wayne Beaty, “Electrical Power Systems

Quality”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2013.
2. Math H.J.Bollen, “Understanding Power Quality Problems-Voltage Sag & Interruptions”, (New York:
IEEE press, 2000).
157
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. C.Sankaran, “Power Quality”, CRC press, 2002.

2. Arindam Ghosh, “Power Quality Enhancement Using Custom Power Devices”, Springer International
Edition, 2002
3. PSCAD User Manual.
4. J.Arrilaga, N.R.Watson, S.Chen, “ Power System Quality Assessment”, John Wiley & Sons, 2000.
15EEA10 WIRING, ESTIMATION AND COSTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Electrical supply systems and its protection equipments
 Different wiring methods
 Estimation for electrical wiring
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Address Electrical supply systems and its protection equipments
 Explain about different wiring methods
 Estimate for a wiring system
Electrical supply system-Three-phase four wire distribution system-Types of domestic loads-Protection against
Electric shock-Earthing- Domestic Wiring Protection equipments: Fuse-Miniature Circuit Breaker – Residual
Current Circuit Breaker or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker-General requirements of Electrical Installations
UNIT II TYPES AND INSTALLATION OF WIRING SYSTEMS 9
Types of wires, Factors influencing the choice of wiring system, Types of wiring system, Conduit Wiring System,
Accessories, Advantages and Disadvantages of Conduit Wiring Systems, IE rules, 1956: rules 50, 56, 57, 58,
60,61 – Internal wiring systems – Looping-in system – Ring system – tree system - Position of switches, cutouts,
main switch board, sub-distribution boards
UNIT III DESIGN OF SIMPLE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT 9
System of Connection of Appliances and accessories-Schematic diagram and Wiring diagram of Light and Fan
circuits-Wiring diagram of a single tube light controlled by a switch-Alarm circuits without relays-Alarm circuits
with relays
UNIT IV ELEMENTS OF ESTIMATION 9
Introduction -Purpose of Estimating and Costing-Qualities of a good Estimator-Essential Elements of Estimating

and Costing-Tender-Guidelines for Inviting Tenders-Quotation-Other Important Factors of Estimating and Costing
UNIT V DOMESTIC ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AND ESTIMATES 9
Estimation of load requirements-Estimation of connected load, Maximum demand, and type of supply required for
a domestic building and related problem- Determination of size of distribution boards – Different types of
158
commonly available distribution boards-Estimation of Accessories required, wiring materials and labour
requirement for a domestic building and related problem-Pre-commissioning tests for domestic wiring Installation:
Visual Inspection, Testing- Special features applicable for High-Rise apartment buildings
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Uppal S.L, “Electrical Wiring - Estimating and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, 6 Edition, 2011
2. Giridharan M.K., “ Electrical Systems Design”, I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi, 2011
3. Raina K.B., Bhattacharya S.K., “Electrical Design Estimating and Costing”, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd., Publishers, 1991.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. J.B. Gupta, “A Course in Electrical Installation Estimating and Costing”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 9
Edition, 2012
Offered by ECE Department
L T P C
15ECA01 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce analog and digital communication techniques.

 To impart knowledge on data and pulse communication techniques.
 To introduce source and Error control coding.
 To develop knowledge on multi–user radio communication
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to

 Apply analog and digital communication techniques.
 Apply data and pulse communication techniques.
 Analyze Source and Error control coding.
 Utilize multi–user radio communication.
Basic knowledge of Bessels function, Time domain and frequency domain signals representation, Basicelectronic
circuits,
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ANALOG COMMUNICATION 9
Principles of amplitude modulation – AM envelope, frequency spectrum and bandwidth – modulation index
and percent – modulation, AM Voltage distribution, AM powerdistribution – Angle modulation – FM and PM
waveforms – phase deviation and modulation index – frequency deviation and percent modulation – Frequency
analysis of angle modulated waves – Bandwidth requirements for Angle modulated waves.
UNIT II DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES 9
Amplitude shift keying – frequency shift keying – FSK bit rate and baudrate – FSK transmitter – BW
consideration of FSK – FSK receiver – phase shift keying – binary phase shift keying – QPSK – Quadrature
Amplitude modulation – bandwidth efficiency – DPSK.
159
UNIT III DATA AND PULSE COMMUNICATION 9
Data Communication:History of Data Communication – Standards Organizations for Data Communication –

Data Communication Circuits – Data Communication Codes – Error Detection and Correction Techniques –
Data communication Hardware – serial and parallel interfaces.
Pulse Communication: Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) – Pulse Time Modulation (PTM) – Pulse code
Modulation (PCM) – Comparison of various Pulse Communication System (PAM – PTM – PCM).
UNIT IV SOURCE AND ERROR CONTROL CODING 9
Entropy – Source encoding theorem – Shannon Fano coding – Huffman coding – mutual information – channel
capacity – channel coding theorem – Error Control Coding – linear block codes.
UNIT V MULTI–USER RADIO COMMUNICATION 9
Advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS) – Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) – Code division
multiple access (CDMA) – Cellular Concept and Frequency Reuse – Channel Assignment and Hand off –
Satellite Communication – Bluetooth.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Wayne Tomasi, “Advanced Electronic Communication Systems”, 6 Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
th
2. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 4 Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1. Rappaport T.S, "Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice", 2 Edition, Pearson Education,
2007.
rd
2. Martin S.Roden, “Analog and Digital Communication System”, 3 Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
nd
3. B.Sklar,”Digital Communication Fundamentals and Applications” 2 Edition PearsonEducation,
2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.wirelesscommunication.nl/reference/chaptr01/telephon/amps.html
2. http://ecee.colorado.edu/~liue/teaching/comm_standards/gsm/index.html
3. http://edu.eap.gr/pli/pli23/documents/Parallila_Keimena/GSM.pdf
4. https://www.eff.org/files/filenode/global_system_for_mobile_communication_technology.pdf
5. http://users.ece.utexas.edu/~jandrews/publications/cdma_talk.pdf
6. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105080/pdf/M5L8.pdf
7. www.intel.com/education/.../lectures/lecture_06_80211bandBT.ppt
L T P C
15ECA02 MICROPROCESSORS AND APPLICATIONS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To apply knowledge of the architecture for programming of 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.
 To develop skills in interfacing of peripheral devices with 8085 microprocessor.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Write assembly language program for 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.
160
 Interface peripheral devices with 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.
 Design 8085 and 8086 microprocessor based system.
Digital logic circuits, binary and other number systems, electronic circuits, memory and interfacing concepts,
UNIT I 8 BIT MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING 9
Microprocessor based system blocks – Number system – Address bus – data bus – control bus – Tristate bus –
Data Transfer Scheme – 8085 Microprocessor Architecture – Instruction set – Assembly Language Programming
– Interrupts
UNIT II 16 BIT MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE 9
Intel 8086 Internal Architecture – signals– Minimum mode and Maximum mode operation and bus cycles –
Interrupts – Interrupt Service Routines – Memory Interfacing
UNIT III 16 BIT MICROPROCESSOR INSTRUCTION SET AND ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE 9

PROGRAMMING
Programmer’s model of 8086 – operand types – operand addressing – assembler directives,instruction set –
Data transfer group – Arithmetic group – logical group – Flag manipulation group – control transfergroup –
Shift/rotate group – Machine or processor control group – 8086 Assembly Languageprogramming.
UNIT IV MICROPROCESSOR PERIPHERAL CHIP INTERFACING 9
Introduction to I/O Ports – Architecture and interfacing of Programmable Peripheral Interface (8255) – Serial
Communication (8251) – Programmable Interval timers (Intel 8253/8254) – Keyboard and Display Controller
(8279)
UNIT V SYSTEM DESIGN USING MICROPROCESSORS 9
Switches and LEDs – Seven–segment Displays – D to A converter – A to D converter – Relay, Motor Control –
DC & Stepper Motor – Case studies – Microprocessor based Digital Scale system – Temperature controller –
Traffic Light control
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture – Programming and application with 8085”, 4
Edition,Penram International Publishing, New Delhi, 2000.
2. Douglas V Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware” TMH, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Barry B. Brey, “Intel Microprocessors Architecture Programming and Interfacing”, Pearson Prentice Hall,
2009.
2. M. Rafi Quazzaman, “Microprocessors Theory and Applications” Intel and Motorola prentice Hall of India,
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
3. A.K. Ray and K.M.Burchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors & Peripherals”, Tata McGraw–Hill Education,
2013.
4. Sunil Mathur, “Microprocessor 8086: Architecture, Programming and Interfacing”, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd.
2011.
161
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.zseries.in/embedded%20lab/
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108100/pdf/Teacher_Slides/mod1/M1L3.pdf
3. http://nptel.ac.in/downloads/106108100/
15ECA03 MATLAB PROGRAMMING L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To gain knowledge of the MATLAB functions to manipulate complex values, arrays and matrices.
 To develop skills in M File Programming and Elementary Solution Methods.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyze the MATLAB Concepts and Debugging methods.
 Create M–files using IF, SWITCH, FOR, WHILE statements.
 Evaluate the results of Elementary Solution Methods.
Familiarity with using Windows applications, calculus, Boolean laws, probability,arrays and vectors, use of a
scientific calculator,
UNIT I MATLAB CONCEPTS 6+3
Directory and Defined Path – Menus and the toolbar – Saving & Loading Files – Using the command line to call
functions – Computing with MATLAB – Reading and Writing from a file: Reading and Writing data from/to a .mat
file, MATLAB Help System.
Lab Component: Get and Set values – Numerical computations
UNIT II DATA STORAGE AND MANIPULATION 6+3
Rational Operators on Single Values – Boolean Operators on Single Values – MATLAB functions to manipulate
complex values – Arrays and Matrices – Declaring a vector – Dot product – Cross Product.
Lab Component: Matrix generators – Data conversion & Data Normalization.
UNIT III GRAPHICS 6+3
2D Graphics: XY– plotting functions, Subplots and Overlay plots – Special Plot types, Bar, Grid, Legend,
Lineseries properties, Semilogx, Regression – 3D Graphics – Mesh – Contour – Developing GUI.
Lab Component: Multiple data sets in one plot – Setting x and y axis limits to match the actual range of the
data using xlim and ylim.
UNIT IV m FILE PROGRAMMING 6+3
m-files– syntax guidelines – Nested functions – Placing comments – Control Flow: IF statement, SWITCH
statement, FOR statement, WHILE statement – Program Flow: Arithmetic errors – Indexing errors, Assignment
errors, Struct array errors.
Lab Component: Histogram – Interpolation – Break and Continue – Fibonacci series
UNIT V MATHEMATICAL MANIPULATIONS 6+3
Operations – Linear Algebraic Equations : Elementary Solution Methods, Statistics and probability, Special
Matrices– Row reduced echelon form – Inverse, Cofactor, minor
Lab Component: Differential equation solver – factorial finding – Eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
L : 30 ; P : 15 ; TOTAL:45 Periods
162
TEXTBOOK:
1. Linda Coulson, “MATLAB Programming”, Global Media, Delhi,2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. William J. Palm III,” Introduction to Matlab 7 for Engineers”, McGraw Hill, 2005.
rd
2. G. H. Golub and C. F. Van Loan,” Matrix Computations”, 3 Editon, Johns Hopkins University
Press,1996.
th
3. Stephen J. Chapman, “MATLAB Programming for Engineers”, 4 Edition ThomsonLearning,2007
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.mathworks.com/academia/student_center/tutorials/launchpad.html
2. http://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res–18–002–introduction–to–matlab–spring–2008/
L T P C
15ECA04 ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the working principles of various types of antenna.
 To study various antennas, arrays and radiation patterns of antennas.
 To know various techniques involved in various antenna parameter measurements.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyze the properties and parameters of antenna
 Analyze the operation of different antennas
 Design antenna array systems
electromagnetic field theory, analog electronics, Maxwell's equations, electromagnetic wave propagation,
polarization
UNIT I ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION AND ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS 9
Review of electromagnetic theory: Vector potential – Solution of wave equation – retarded vector and scalar
potential –Hertzian dipole. Antenna characteristics: Radiation pattern, Beam solid angle, Directivity, Gain, Input
impedance, Polarization, Beam width, Bandwidth, Reciprocity – Equivalence of Radiation patterns – Equivalence
of Impedances – Effective aperture – Effective length – Antenna temperature.
UNIT II WIRE ANTENNAS 9
EM radiation and working of Short dipole – Radiation resistance and Directivity – Half wave Dipole – Monopole –
Small loop antennas.
UNIT III ANTENNA ARRAYS 9
Linear Array and Pattern Multiplication – Two–element Array – Uniform Array – Polynomial representation –
Array with non–uniform Excitation – Binomial Array.
163
UNIT IV APERTURE ANTENNAS 9
Magnetic Current and its fields – Uniqueness theorem – Field equivalence principle – Duality principle –
Method of Images – Pattern properties – Slot antenna, Horn Antenna – Pyramidal Horn Antenna – Reflector
Antenna –Flat reflector – Corner Reflector
UNIT V SPECIAL ANTENNAS AND ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS 9
Long wire – V and Rhombic Antenna –Yagi–Uda Antenna – Turnstile Antenna – Helical Antenna – Axial mode
helix, Normal mode helix –Biconical Antenna – Log periodic Dipole Array – Spiral Antenna –Microstrip Patch
Antennas.
Antenna Measurements: Radiation Pattern measurement – Gain and Directivity Measurements – Impedance
measurement and Anechoic Chamber measurement.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. John D.Kraus, Ronald J Marhefka and Ahmad S Khan, “Antennas for all Applications”, 3 Edition, Tata
McGraw–Hill Book Company, 2012.
nd
2. Constantine A. Balanis,”Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, 2 Edition, John Wiley, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. E.C.Jordan and Balmain, “Electromagnetic waves and Radiating Systems”, Pearson Education / PHI,
2006
2. A.R.Harish, M.Sachidanada, “Antennas and Wave propagation”, Oxford University Press, 2007.
3. G.S.N.Raju, “Antenna Wave Propagation”, Pearson Education, 2004.
4. R.E.Collins, “Antenna and Radiowave propagation”,McGraw–Hill, 1985
5. W.L Stutzman and G.A. Thiele, “Antenna analysis and design”, John Wiley, 2000.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/Ani_Kate–508171–wave–propagation/
2. http://classes.soe.ucsc.edu/cmpe123a/Fall07/doc/AntBrief123A12–6–07.ppt
3. http://muse.widener.edu/~rpj0001/courses/ENGR647/ClassNotes/LECT04.ppt
4. http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/aSGuest125391–1319926–unit–antenna–engineering/
15ECA05 TELEVISION ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the construction details of TV Receiver Picture Tubes, Television Camera tubes and
Composite Video Signal details
 To understand principles of operation of Monochrome Television Transmitter and Receiver systems.
 To study PAL Color Television system operation.
164
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyse the transmission of video signals and importance of television standards
 Analyse the functioning of circuits related to broadcasting applications.
 Apply the knowledge gained in digital video and television transmission.
Electromagnetic spectrum, electromagnetic wave propagation, basic modulation theory, transducers, electronic
circuits, signals representation.
UNIT I TELEVISION SIGNALS 9 COMPOS
Audio and video transmission – scanning principle – TV broadcasting, system – Aspect ratio – Resolution –
Video bandwidth. Video signals – composite video signal – blanking signal – horizontal, vertical blanking and
sync pulses.
UNIT II TELEVISION CAMERAS AND SIGNAL TRANSMISSION 9
Image orthicon –Vidicon–plumbicon– characteristics of camera tubes –video processing of camera pickup signal
–Picture signal transmission – positive and negative modulation – VSB transmission – Sound signal transmission
– Standard channel bandwidth
UNIT III TV TRANSMITTER & RECEIVER 9
TV standards – TV transmitter – Block diagram of TV Reciever – Receiver controls – RF tuners – Video

channel and picture tube – AGC and synchronization circuits – Deflection circuit (Horizontal and vertical ) –
video detector – Sound section
UNIT IV COLOUR TV PRINCIPLES 9
Compatibility –colour fundamentals – chromaticity diagram –colour picture tubes (Delta – gun, P.I.L &trintron) –
purity and convergence. Colour Signal Transmission and Reception – modulation of colour difference signals –
formation of chrominance signal – NTSC, PAL and SECAM colour systems.
UNIT V DIGITAL TV SYSTEMS 9
Cable TV – Cable Signal Sources – Cable Signal Processing, Distribution & Scrambling – DVB – Video
Recording – Video Disc recording and playback – Digital television –Transmission and reception –Projection
television – Flat panel display TV receivers – Digital TV – LCD and Plasma screen receivers – LEDTV – 3DTV
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. R.R.Gulati, “Monochrome Television Practice, Principles, Technology and servicing” , 3 Edition, New Age
International (P) Publishers, 2006
2. R.R.Gulati,”Monochrome & Color Television,” New Age International Publisher, 2003.
3. Bernard Grob, Charles Herndon, “Basic television and video systems” , McGraw–Hill, 1998
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1. A.M Dhake, “Television and Video Engineering”, 2 Edition, TMH, 2003.
th
2. R.P.Bali, “Color Television, Theory and Practice,” 4 Edition, Tata McGraw–Hill, New York, 1997.
165
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://seminarprojects.net/q/principles–of–television–engineering–ppt\
2. www.focalpress.com/
3. www.hobbyprojects.com
15ECA06 REMOTE SENSING TECHNIQUES L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To familiarize the principles of Remote Sensing

 To gain fundamental knowledge on the physics of remote sensing
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Apply the Electromagnetic Radiation principles for Remote Sensing Applications
 Analyse various imaging systems
 Interpret Multispectral and Hyperspectral data for Land cover/ Land use studies
 Classify the data for application specific analysis
fundamental principles of electromagnetic wave propagation and scattering, Optics, satellite communication
fundamentals, basics of communication engineering
UNIT I PHYSICS OF REMOTE SENSING 9
Electro Magnetic Spectrum – Physics of Remote Sensing – Effects of Atmosphere – Scattering – Different types
–Absorption – Atmospheric window – Energy interaction with surface features – Spectral reflectance of
vegetation, soil ,and water –atmospheric influence on spectral response patterns.
UNIT II REMOTE SENSING SYSTEMS 9

Satellites and orbits – Polar orbiting satellites – Spectral – radiometric and spatial resolutions – Temporal
resolution of satellites – Multispectral – thermal and hyperspectral Sensing. Remote Sensing platforms –
airborne and space borne sensors. Some remote sensing satellites, Radars and their features.
UNIT III IMAGE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES FOR REMOTE SENSING 9
Geometric corrections – Co–registration of Data – Ground Control Points (GCP) – Atmospheric corrections –
Solar illumination corrections. Image Enhancement: Concept of color – Color composites – Contrast stretching –
linear and non–linear stretching – Filtering techniques – Edge enhancement – Density slicing –Thresholding –
Intensity–Hue–Saturation (IHS) images – Time composite images – Synergetic images.
UNIT IV INFORMATION EXTRACTION FROM REMOTE SENSED DATA 9
Multispectral classification – Ground truth collection – Supervised and unsupervised classification – Change
detection analysis – Principal component analysis – Ratio images – Vegetation indices. Introduction to Image
Processing Softwares: MATLAB – Introduction to Multispectral classification algorithms.
UNIT V REMOTE SENSING APPLICATIONS 9
Watershed management – Rainfall–runoff modeling – Irrigation management – Flood mapping – Drought

assessment –Environmental monitoring.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
166
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Lillesand T.M., and Kiefer R.W., “Remote Sensing and Image interpretation”, 6 Edition, John Wiley
&Sons, 2000.
nd
2. Jensen, J.R., “Remote sensing of the environment”, 2 Edition,Prentice Hall, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John A.Richards, “Remote Sensing Digital Image Analysis”, Springer,1999.

nd
2. John R.Jensen, “Introductory Digital Image Processing: A Remote Sensing Perspective”, 2 Edition,
Prentice Hall, 1995.
3. Paul Curran P.J., “Principles of Remote Sensing”, ELBS, 1995.
4. Charles Elachi and Jakob J. van Zyl, “Introduction to the Physics and Techniques of Remote Sensing”,
Wiley Series in Remote Sensing and Image Processing, 2006.
5. Sabins, F.F.Jr,” Remote Sensing Principles and Image interpretation”, W.H.Freeman& Co, 1978.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.itc.nl/~bakker/rs.html
2. rst.gsfc.nasa.gov
3. www.isprs.org
4. www.nrsa.gov.in
L T P C
15ECA07 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce embedded systems, its hardware and software.

 To introduce devices and buses used for embedded networking.
 To explain programming concepts and embedded programming in C and C++.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Apply the knowledge applications
 Develop an embedded product.
 Validate the program for system development.
Basics of Assembly Language, C, C++, Python, basic knowledge of electronics, digital electronics, knowledge of
microcontrollers, I/O, analog and digital interfacing, and peripherals.
UNIT I EMBEDDED COMPUTING 9

Embedded system examples – Parts of Embedded System – Processor – Power supply – clock – memory
interface – interrupt – I/O ports – Buffers, Programmable Devices – ASIC – interfacing with memory and I/O
devices – Memory Technologies – EPROM, Flash, OTP, SRAM,DRAM, SDRAM
UNIT II EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Embedded System product Development Life cycle (EDLC) – Hardware development cycles – Specifications –
Component selection – Schematic Design – PCB layout – fabrication and assembly. Product enclosure Design
and Development.
167
UNIT III EMBEDDED SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT 9
Reset Circuit – Brown–out Protection Circuit – Oscillator Unit – Real Time Clock – Watchdog Timer.
Development and Debugging – Program design – Model of programs– Assembly and Linking – Basic compilation
techniques– Program validation and testing.
UNIT IV OPERATING SYSTEMS 9
Concept of firmware – Operating system basics – Real Time Operating systems – Tasks, Processes and
Threads – Multiprocessing and Multitasking – Task scheduling – Task communication and synchronization –
Device Drivers.
UNIT V SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 9
Design Example: Alarm Clock – Elevator Controller – Ink jet printer– Hardware Design and Software Design –
Set–top Boxes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Shibu K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems “,Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
2. Marylin wolf, “Computer as Components” Elsevier, 2013,
nd
3. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems”, 2 Edition, TMH, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, “Embedded System Design”, John Wiley,2001

2. Lyla, “Embedded System”, Pearson, 2013.
3. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real – Time Systems”, McGraw – Hill International Editions, 1997
4. David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson Education, 2007.
5. Rajib Mall, ”Real–time systems: theory and practice”, Pearson Education, 2007
rd
6. Philip.A.Laplante, “Real Time System Design and Analysis”, 3 Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102045/
2. http://www.learnerstv.com/Free-Engineering-Video-lectures-ltv118-Page1.htm
L T P C
15ECA08 OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the basic elements of light sources, Wavelength and frequencies of light
 To understand the different kind of fibers, losses, and fiber slicing and connectors
 To learn different types of photo detectors and its operation
 To learn the fiber optical receivers and its measurements
 To learn, Optical networks, operational principles of WDM
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyze the different kinds of light sources and Detectors used in any applications
 Design any optical communication system
 Analyze the performance measure of the optical parameters
168
Electromagnetic spectrum and its uses, Snells law, optical signal propagation methods and electromagnetic
theory
UNITI OPTICAL SOURCES 9
Light sources : Sunlight, Torch light, LED and Laser light – Optical frequencies and Wavelength – LED internal –
quantum efficiency –Relationship between speed of light, wavelength and frequency – light as an
Electromagnetic waves – comparison of LED and Laser diode
UNITII OPTICAL FIBER 9
Refractive Index –Ray theory of transmission – Total internal reflection – Acceptance angle – Numerical aperture
– Attenuation Fiber Bend losses and Dispersion – Structure of an optical fiber – Optical domain signal –
electrical domain signal Optical pulses for the digital data – Optical fiber connectors – Fiber alignment and Joint
Losses – Fiber Splices – Fiber connectors – Fiber couplers
UNIT III OPTICAL DETECTORS 9
Optical Detectors: PIN Photo detectors, Avalanche photo diodes – construction, characteristics and properties –
Comparison of performance, Photo detector noise –Noise sources – Signal to Noise ratio – Detector response
time.
UNITIV FIBER OPTIC RECEIVER AND MEASUREMENTS 9
Fundamental receiver operation – Pre amplifiers – Error sources – Receiver Configuration – Probability of Error –
Quantum limit.
Fiber Attenuation measurements– Dispersion measurements –Optical Spectrum Analyzer–OTDR
UNITV OPTICAL NETWORKS 9
Basic Networks – Broadcast and select Networks – WDM Networks –Bus topology – Star topology –
Wavelength Routed Networks – Routing and wavelength Assignment – Different types of wavelength
Assignment
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Gerd Keiser, "Optical Fiber Communication" 5 Edition, McGraw Hill International, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. J.Gower, “Optical Communication System”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.

nd
2. Rajiv Ramaswami, “Optical Network”, 2 Edition, Elsevier, 2004.
rd
3. Govind P. Agrawal, “Fiber–optic communication systems”, 3 edition, John Wiley & sons, 2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in/courses/117101002/downloads/Lec19.pdf
2. www.ece466.groups.et.byu.net/notes/notes_source.ppt
169
15ECA09 MOBILE COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the fundamentals concepts of mobile communication systems.
 To provide the student with an understanding of advanced multiple access techniques.
 To give the student an understanding digital cellular systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the completion of this course, students will be able to
 Analyze the cellular radio concepts such as frequency reuse, handoff and how interference between
mobiles and base stations affects the capacity of cellular systems.
 Apply the concepts on basic diversity, equalization and spread spectrum techniques in mobile
communication.
 Analyze the current and future cellular mobile communication systems (GSM, IS95, WCDMA, etc.)
Radio frequency propagation fundamentals,basics ofdigital communications, basic telephony
UNIT I CELLULAR MOBILE SYSTEMS 9
Historic perspective and overview of Mobile Communication Systems – A basic cellular system – operation of
cellular systems – overview of generations of cellular systems – concept of frequency reuse – co–channel
interference reduction factor – desired C/I from a normal case in an omni directional antenna system – co–
channel interference and Non–co–channel interference – design of antenna system – antenna parameter and
their effects – diversity receiver –Traffic theory – Erlang B system
UNIT II CELL COVERAGE, CELL SITE, FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT AND 9

HANDOFF
Cell coverage for signal and traffic – cell site and mobile antennas – frequency management and channel
assignment – Handoff – dropped calls and cell splitting
UNIT III MODULATION METHODS AND CODING FOR ERROR DETECTION AND 9
CORRECTION
Digital modulation methods in cellular wireless systems – OFDM – Block Coding – convolution coding and Turbo
coding.
UNIT IV SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MULTIPLE ACCESS TECHNIQUES 9
Spread Spectrum Techniques – DSSS – FHSS – Frequency division multiple access (FDMA) – Time–division
multiple access (TDMA) – code division multiple access (CDMA) – CDMA capacity – probability of bit error
considerations – CDMA vs TDMA.
UNIT V SECOND And THIRD GENERATION WIRELESS SYSTEMS 9
GSM, IS–136 (D–AMPS), IS–95 – Third generation wireless systems – GPRS – EDGE – WCDMA – LTE.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
170
TEXT BOOKS:
nd
1. William, C. Y. Lee, “Mobile Cellular Telecommunications”, 2 Edition, McGraw Hill, 2006.
2. Mischa Schwartz, “Mobile Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, UK, 2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. Jerry D. Gibson, “Mobile Communication Hand Book”, 3 Edition, IEEE Press,2012.
nd
2. Theodore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communication Principles and Practice”, 2 Edition, Pearson
Education, 2010.
3. Lawrence Harte, “3G Wireless Demystified”, McGraw Hill Publications, 2001.
4. KavehPahlavan and Prashant Krishnamurthy”, Principles of Wireless Networks”, Prentice Hall PTR,
2002
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://webmail.aast.edu/~khedr/Courses/Graduate/Wireless%20Communications_F08/Lecture%20four%
20channel%20II.pdf.
2. http://staff.neu.edu.tr/~fahri/wireless_chp6.pdf.
15ECA10 VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To understand the characteristics of CMOS systems
 To discuss the delay models and interconnects in CMOS circuits
 To study the HDL fundamentals
Course Outcomes:
 Analyze the operation of various CMOS circuits
 Apply the techniques for circuit characterization
 Synthesize the combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog HDL
Basic electronic devices and circuits, CMOS circuits, integrated circuits
UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9
PN junction diode – forward and reverse bias characteristics – Bipolar Junction Transistors – Input and Output
characteristics of CE, CB& CC Configuration.
UNIT II FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR 9
JFETs – Drain and Transfer characteristics – Pinch off voltage and its significance – MOSFETCharacteristics –
DMOSFET – E MOSFET.
171
UNIT III IC FABRICATION 9
IC classification – fundamental of monolithic IC technology – epitaxial growth, masking and etching – diffusion of
impurities. Realisation of monolithic ICs and packaging – Fabrication of diodes – capacitance, resistance and
FETs.
UNIT IV MOS DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS 9
Ideal I–V and C–V characteristics – non ideal I–V effects – DC transfer characteristics – Scaling of Devices.
UNIT V HARDWARE DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE 9
Verilog HDL fundamentals – Types of Modeling – HDL for Logic Gates – Half Adder – Full Adder – Half / Full
Subtractor – Comparators.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Donald A Neaman, “Semiconductor Physics and Devices”, 3 Edition, Tata McGrawHill Inc. 2007
nd
2. D.RoyChoudhary, SheilB.Jani, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, 2 Edition, New Age, 2003.
rd
3. N.H.E.Westeetal, “CMOS VLSI Design”,3 Edition, Pearson, 2005
4. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL – A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Pearson, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA– based System Design”, Pearson, 2004

2. Mark Gordon Arnold, “Verilog Digital – Computer Design”, Prentice Hall (PTR), 1999.
3. MichealD.Ciletti, “Modeling, Synthesis and Rapid Prototyping with the Verilog HDL”, Prentice Hall, 1999.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.eolss.net/sample-chapters/c05/e6-195-04.pdf
2. http://web.ewu.edu/groups/technology/Claudio/ee430/Lectures/L1-print.pdf
3. http://www.circuitstoday.com/integrated-circuits
4. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/vlsi_design/vlsi_design_digital_system.htm
Offered by CSE Department
15CSA01 INTERNET PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To identify the basics of Internet and its protocol
 To learn HTML5 controls for the creation of static web pages
 To present HTML documents using Cascading Style Sheets (CSS).
 To learn to create user interactive web pages using JavaScript and DOM
 To handle the clients’ requests at the server end using PHP
172
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Exploit the basics of Internet and realize the significance of HTTP protocol in the WWW.
 Develop website using HTML5
 Design interesting and appealing HTML pages using CSS
 Validate the users’ data using JavaScript
 Access and process various elements of web pages using DOM
 Generate dynamic response to client request using PHP
PREREQUISITES:
Programming Principles
UNIT I BASICS OF NETWORK AND WEB CONCEPTS 9
Types of Network – Reason for Networks – Communication between Computers – Serial and Parallel
Communication – Asynchronous and Synchronous Communication – Simplex, Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex
Communications – Data Rate, Bandwidth and Throughput – Switched Connections – Topologies used in
Networking – Basic Internet Protocols – The World Wide Web – HTTP Request Message – HTTP Response
Message – Web Clients – Web Servers
UNIT II HTML5 9
Introduction to HTML5 – Editing HTML5 – W3C HTML validation service – Headings – Linking - Images – Special
characters and horizontal rules – Lists – Tables – Forms – Internal linking - Meta elements – New HTML5 Form
input types – Input and datalist elements and auto complete attribute – Page structure elements – Introduction to
Canvas – Canvas Coordinate System – Rectangles – Drawing arcs and circles – Shadows
UNIT III CSS3, JAVASCRIPT 9
Types of CSS – Conflicting style sheets – Positioning Elements – Element Dimension – Box model and Text Flow
– Media types – Media Queries – Drop-Down Menus – Text shadows – Rounded corners – Color – Box
Shadows. Introduction to JavaScript – Syntax - Variables and Data types – JavaScript Control Statements –
Operators – Literals - Functions – Objects – Arrays – Built-in objects
UNIT IV DOCUMENT OBJECT MODEL 9
Introduction to the Document Object Model – Intrinsic Event Handling – Modifying Element Style – The Document
Tree – Properties of window – DOM Collections – Using Timer and Dynamic Styles to create animated effects –
JavaScript Event Handling – Reviewing the load, mousemove, mouseover, mouseout events – Form processing
with focus, blur, submit, reset – Event Bubbling – More Events
UNIT V PHP 9
Introduction – Converting Between Data Types – Arithmetic Operators – Initializing and Manipulating Arrays –
String Comparisons – String processing with regular expressions – Form Processing and Business Logic –
Reading from a database – Using Cookie – Dynamic Content
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. P.J. Deitel, H.M. Deitel, “Internet and World Wide Web – How to program”, Pearson Education
Publishers, Fifth Edition, 2009.
2. Jeffrey C. Jackson, "Web Technologies - A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John Cowley, "Communications and Networking An Introduction", Springer, Second Edition, 2013
2. Robert. W. Sebesta, "Programming the World Wide Web", Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2007.
3. Kogent Learning Solutions Inc., “Html5 Black Book: Covers CSS3, JavaScript, XKL, XHTML, AJAX,
PHP and jQuery”, Dreamtech Press, 2011.
4. Bates, “Developing Web Applications”, Wiley, 2006.
173
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://www.echoecho.com/javascript.htm
3. http://www.w3schools.com/php/
4. http://www.theshulers.com/whitepapers/internet_whitepaper/index.html
5. http://www.protocols.com/pbook/tcpip2/#UDP
15CSA02 FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To explore the fundamental concepts of software engineering
 To learn the requirements engineering process and planning for software development
 To understand the software design principles
 To know coding standards and different testing strategies
 To learn the project management principles and quality assurance standards
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply software engineering principles for software development.
 Formulate software requirement specification and plan for software development
 Design software according to the specification
 Code the software using guidelines / standards and conduct testing
 Manage and maintain the software process by assuring the quality
Knowledge of Problem Solving Techniques is preferred
UNIT I SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE ENGINEERING 8
The Nature of Software - Software Engineering - Software Myths – Process Models: Prescriptive Process
Models, Specialized Process Models, Personal and Team Process Models – Overview of Agile Process -
Overview of CMMi
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS ENGINEERING AND PLANNING 10
Requirements Engineering: Establishing the Groundwork - Eliciting Requirements - Negotiating Requirements -
Validating Requirements - Requirements Analysis using scenario based modeling. Process and Project Metrics:
Software Measurement - Metrics for Software Quality. Estimation: The Project Planning Process – Resources -
Software Project Estimation - Decomposition Techniques - Empirical Estimation Models - Project Scheduling
UNIT III MODELLING AND DESIGN 9
Modelling: Data Modeling Concepts - Class-Based Modeling - Flow-Oriented Modeling - Creating a Behavioral
Model Design Concepts - Architectural Design: Software Architecture, Architectural Styles, Architectural Design,
Architectural Mapping Using Data Flow - User Interface Design: The Golden Rules, User Interface Analysis and
Design, Interface Analysis
UNIT IV CODING AND SOFTWARE TESTING 9
Coding standards and guidelines - Testing: Strategic approach to Software Testing - Test Strategies for
Conventional Software - Validation Testing - System Testing – Debugging – White-box Testing - Basis Path
Testing - Control Structure Testing - Black-box Testing
UNIT V PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND SOFTWARE QUALITY 9
Project Management Concepts: The Management Spectrum, People, Product and Process – Software
Configuration Management – Risk Management - Quality Management: Software Quality, Achieving Software
Quality - Elements of Software Quality Assurance - The ISO 9000 Quality Standard
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
174
TEXTBOOK:
1. Roger S. Pressman and Bruce R. Maxim, “Software Engineering – A practitioner’s approach”, McGraw
Hill Publications, Eighth Edition, 2014
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pankaj Jalote, ”An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering”, Springer, Third Edition, 2005
2. Ian Sommerville, “Software engineering”, Pearson Education Asia, Seventh Edition, 2007.
3. Watts S.Humphrey, ”A Discipline for Software Engineering”, Pearson Education, 2007.
4. James F.Peters and Witold Pedrycz, ”Software Engineering, Engineering Approach”, Wiley-India, 2007.
5. Stephen R.Schach, “Software Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.
6. S.A.Kelkar, ”Software Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt, 2007
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.mhhe.com/pressman
2. www.rspa.com/spi/
3. http://www.comp.lancs.ac.uk/computing/resources/IanS/
4. http://www.ee.umanitoba.ca/~cilab/main.html
5. http://www.wiley.com/college/comp/peters189642
15CSA03 INTRODUCTION TO DATABASE L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To correlate the role of database management systems in information technology applications
 To structure data using relational model
 To explore the features of structured query language
 To reduce the anomalies using Normalization
 To manage transaction and concurrency control techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Draw the ER Diagram for enterprise applications
 Design databases using relational model
 Query the database using SQL
 Apply normalization techniques on the databases
 Perform transaction and concurrency control techniques.
Knowledge of Data Files is preferred
UNIT I DATABASE FUNDAMENTALS 9
Purpose of Database Systems – View of Data - Database System Architecture – Database Users and
Administrators – Data Models – Structure of Network Model – Structure of Hierarchical Model – Entity
Relationship Model – Constraints – Removing Redundant Attributes in Entity Sets – E-R Diagrams - Design
Issues – Extended E-R Features – Introduction of Relational Model – E-R Reduction to Relational Schemas
UNIT II RELATIONAL DATABASE MODEL 9
Structure of Relational Databases – Database Schema – Schema Diagrams – Relational Query Languages -
Relational Algebra – Tuple Relational Calculus -– Domain Relational Calculus
UNIT III STRUCTURED QUERY LANGUAGE 9
Overview of SQL query language – SQL Data definition – Basic Structure of SQL Queries – Additional Basic
Operations – Set Operations – Null values – Aggregate Operations – Nested Subqueries – Joins – Views –
Integrity Constraints – Authorization. Introduction to Advanced SQL: Functions and Procedures – Triggers
175
UNIT IV NORMALIZATION 9
Functional Dependencies – Non-loss Decomposition – Dependency Preservation - First, Second, Third Normal
Forms – Boyce Codd Normal Form
UNIT V TRANSACTION AND CONCURRENCY CONTROL 9
Transaction Model – ACID properties – Transaction States – Serializability - Conflict serializability – View
Serializability – Testing Serializability. Concurrency Control – Lock Based Protocols – Deadlocks – Multiple
Granularity – Time Stamp Based Protocols – Validation Based Protocols
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz, S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”, McGraw Hill, Sixth
Edition, 2011.
2. C.J. Date, A. Kannan and S. Swamynathan, ”An Introduction to Database Systems”, Pearson
Education, Eighth Edition, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Pearson Education/Addison Wesley,
Sixth Edition, 2010.
2. Thomas Cannolly and Carolyn Begg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach to Design,
Implementation and Management”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2009.
3. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, “Database Management Systems”, McGraw Hill, Third Edition
2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://www.1keydata.com/datawarehousing/data-modeling-levels.html
3. http://www.cs.uwaterloo.ca/~gweddell/cs448/Arch.pdf
4. http://www.sql-tutorial.net/SQL-tutorial.asp
5. http://sqlzoo.net/
6. http://www.service-architecture.com/database/articles/ acid_properties.html
15CSA04 INTRODUCTION TO DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basics of problem solving techniques and analysis of algorithms
 To learn the various searching and sorting techniques
 To impart knowledge on ADTs such as List, Stack, Queue
 To explore the binary trees and priority queues
 To get exposure on hashing techniques and graphs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyze recursive and non recursive algorithms for complexity
 Apply various searching / sorting algorithms for solving real-world problems
 Implement List, Stack and Queue with appropriate data structures
 Work with binary trees and heap based priority queue
 Exploit the hashing technique and graph algorithms
Knowledge of Memory Organization, Fundamentals of C Programming
176
UNIT I ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS 9
Introduction to Algorithms and algorithmic problem solving – Problem types. Analysis of Algorithms: Analysis
Framework - Asymptotic Notations – Best case, worst case and average cases - Mathematical analysis of
non-recursive algorithms - Recurrence equations – Solving recurrence equations - Mathematical analysis of
recursive algorithms.
UNIT II SEARCHING AND SORTING ALGORITHMS 9
Search Algorithms: Linear search - binary search - Analysis of Search algorithms. Sorting Algorithms: Bubble
sort - Exchange sort - Insertion sort – Merge sort – Quick sort – Heap sort - Analysis of Sorting Algorithms.
UNIT III LISTS, STACKS AND QUEUES 9
Abstract Data Types – The List ADT – Singly Linked List – Doubly Linked List – Circular Linked List –
Applications and analysis of List. The Stack ADT – Applications and Analysis of Stack. The Queue ADT –
Applications and Analysis of Queues.
UNIT IV TREES AND HEAPS 9
Preliminaries – Binary Trees – Expression Trees- Traversals. The Search Tree ADT – Binary Search Trees –
Applications of BST. Priority Queues – Binary heap – Heap operations - Applications of heaps.
UNIT V HASHING AND GRAPHS 9
Hashing – Closed hashing: Separate Chaining – Open Addressing - Linear probing. Graph ADT – Representation
of graph – Graph Traversals: DFS and BFS. Applications of Graph - Finding Shortest Path - Connected
components.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Anany Levitin, “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithm”, Pearson Education Asia, 2003.
2. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, Pearson Education Asia, Second
Edition, 1997.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffry D. Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2006
2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Dinesh Mehta, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”, Orient
Longman, Second Edition, 2008.
3. Jean-Paul Tremblay and Paul G. Sorenson, “An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications”, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, Second Edition, 1991.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106101059/
2. http://www.personal.kent.edu/~rmuhamma/Algorithms/algorithm.html
3. http://www.mif.vu.lt/~algis/dsax/DsSort.pdf
4. http://cslibrary.stanford.edu/103/LinkedListBasics.pdf
5. www.cs.cornell.edu/courses/cs312/2005sp/lectures/rec19.html
15CSA05 FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATING SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To acquire basic knowledge of operating system structures and its functioning
 To study the concept of process management
 To learn the basics of memory management
 To understand the structure of file systems
 To familiarize with different operating systems
177
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Identify the components of operating system and their functionalities
 Analyze the various process management algorithms
 Evaluate the performance of various memory management techniques
 Design a simple file system and analyze the performance
 Work with some popular operating systems like Linux, Windows
Working Principles of Computers
UNIT I OPERATING SYSTEMS OVERVIEW 9
Introduction to operating systems – Computer system organization - architecture – Operating system structure -
operations – Process, memory, storage management – Open source operating systems – OS services – User
interface – System calls – System programs – Process concept - scheduling – Operations on processes –
Cooperating processes – Inter-process communication – Threads
UNIT II PROCESS MANAGEMENT 9
Basic concepts – Scheduling algorithms – Algorithm evaluation – The critical section problem – Synchronization
hardware – Semaphores – Classic problems of synchronization – Deadlocks – Deadlock characterization –
Methods for handling deadlocks – Deadlock prevention – Deadlock avoidance – Deadlock detection – Recovery
from deadlock.
UNIT III MEMORY MANAGEMENT 9
Memory management – Swapping – Contiguous memory allocation – Paging – Segmentation - Virtual memory:
Background – Demand paging – Copy on write – Page replacement – Allocation of frames – Thrashing
UNIT IV FILE MANAGEMENT 9
File concept – Access methods – Directory structure – File-system mounting – Protection – Directory
implementation – Allocation methods – Free space management – Disk scheduling – Disk management
UNIT V CASE STUDY 9
The Linux system – History – Process management – Scheduling – Memory management – File systems – Inter
Process Communication
Windows OS - History – Design principles
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts Essentials”, John
Wiley & Sons Inc., 8th Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, Addison Wesley, Second Edition, 2001.
2. Charles Crowley, “Operating Systems: A Design-Oriented Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Education,
1996.
3. D M Dhamdhere, “Operating Systems: A Concept-based Approach”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education,
Second Edition, 2007.
4. William Stallings, “Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition,
2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://cseweb.ucsd.edu/classes/fa06/cse120/lectures/120-fa06-l13.pdf
3. http://www.cs.kent.edu/~farrell/osf03/oldnotes/
178
15CSA06 FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOUD COMPUTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the basics and challenges of Cloud Computing
 To introduce the virtualization concepts and cloud file system
 To get an exposure on third-party cloud solutions
 To understand the cloud security and efficiency issues
 To explore the possibilities of applying cloud solutions in various applications
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Identify the challenges in Cloud Computing adoption
 Implement virtualization and work with cloud file system
 Identify the various cloud-based solutions available with different providers
 Secure and optimize the cloud for delivering better performance
 Identify and provide cloud-based solution for the problem under consideration
Knowledge of Computers, Networking is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CLOUD COMPUTING 9
Overview of Distributed computing - Introduction to Cloud Computing: Definitions - Central idea - Properties and
Characteristics - Benefits - Cloud service and deployment model - Organizational scenario - Architecture -
Vocabulary - Challenges - Supporting services - Management and administration of Cloud services
UNIT II VIRTUALIZATION AND FILE SYSTEM 9
Virtualization Techniques: Virtualization Technology - Overview of x86 virtualization - Types of virtualization -
Virtualization products - VLAN - SAN - VM Migration - VM Consolidation and Management - Cloud interoperability
standards
Cloud File System: Distributed file system - GFS - HDFS
UNIT III CLOUD SOLUTIONS 9
Different Cloud Providers and service comparison: Infrastructure service providers - Comparison between
infrastructure service providers - Identification of business requirement - Cloud infrastructure setup procedure -
Platform service providers - Comparison between platform service providers - Identification of business
requirement - Cloud platform setup procedure - Cloud application development - Software service providers -
Comparison between software service providers
Cloud Database - Cloud programming model - Private cloud computing platforms
UNIT IV CLOUD SECURITY - MIDDLEWARE AND TESTING 9
Cloud Security: Fundamentals - Cloud Risk - Division - Security Architecture - VM Security Challenges -
Vulnerability assessment tool for cloud - Open source security solution products
Cloud Middleware: Need for Cloud Middleware - QoS issues in cloud - Data migration and Streaming -
Performance monitoring tools in cloud - Best practices
Cloud Testing: Types - Testing strategy
UNIT V CLOUD APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES 9
Advanced Cloud Applications - Sharing and Collaborative services in cloud - Outside the cloud services - Cloud
Analytics - Software plus services - Cloud Content Delivery Network services (CDN) - Mobile cloud computing -
Sky computing - Cloud governance
Case Study: Cloud infrastructure adoption case study - Cloud platform adoption case study - Cloud software
services adoption case study - Cloud simulation tools - Future of cloud computing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
179
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rishabh Sharma, ”Cloud Computing Fundamentals, Industry Approach and Trends”, Wiley India, 2015.
2. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox, Jack G Dongarra, “Distributed and Cloud Computing from Parallel
Processing to the Internet of Things”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ronald L. Krutz, Russell Dean Vines, “Cloud Security – A comprehensive Guide to Secure Cloud
Computing”, Wiley – India, 2010.
2. John W.Rittinghouse and James F.Ransome, “Cloud Computing: Implementation, Management, and
Security”, CRC Press, 2010.
3. George Reese, “Cloud Application Architectures: Building Applications and Infrastructure in the Cloud”
O'Reilly
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://whatiscloud.com/basic_concepts_and_terminology/cloud
2. http://www.vmware.com/in/virtualization/overview
3. http://www.csoonline.com/article/2125258/cloud-security/cloud-security--the-basics.html
4. http://thecloudtutorial.com/cloudvendors.html
5. http://thecloudtutorial.com/freecloudcomputingapplications.html
15CSA07 PRINCIPLES OF MULTIMEDIA L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the basic concepts related to Multimedia
 To explain the basic multimedia building blocks and application development tools.
 To demonstrate online multimedia application creation tools
 To understand computer animation basics and needs
 To demonstrate various computer animation techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Identify the architectural components for multimedia applications.
 Work with various elements of multimedia.
 Develop audio, video, and images using multimedia tools.
 Identify issues and solutions in implementing security for multimedia applications.
 Model and render the 3D objects using animation tools.
 Develop interactive animations using multimedia tools
Fundamental Knowledge of Graphics, Data is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MULTIMEDIA 9
Multimedia overview: Components , Hypermedia ,File formats – Color models – Digital Audio representation –
Digital music making – MIDI - Digital Video: Video compression techniques – Multimedia for portable devices
UNIT II MULTIMEDIA BUILDING BLOCKS 9
Multimedia building blocks: Text, Graphics, Video Capturing, Sound capturing and editing - Introduction to 2D &
3D graphics – Surface characteristics and texture – Lights – Animation: key frames & tweening – Techniques –
Principles of animation – 3D animation – File formats
180
UNIT III MULTIMEDIA APPLICATIONS 9
Databases: Properties of MMDBMS, Multimedia queries, Management of continuous data, document modeling,
Media Servers- Security: Digital Signatures, steganographic methods: single images, motion pictures, audio data,
3D scenes, copyright protection.
UNIT IV COMPUTER ANIMATION BASICS 9
History of Computer Animation - Modeling digital objects : Modeling Concepts - Modeling Techniques –
Rendering Concepts : Lights, Camera and Materials - color- Rendering Process - Hidden surface removal - Z-
Buffer - Ray tracing
UNIT V COMPUTER ANIMATION TECHNIQUES 9
Principles of animation - Computer Animation techniques: keyframe Techniques, camera animation, light
animation, animation file formats - Advanced Computer Animation techniques: Motion Capture, Facial animation,
crowd animation - Visual effects techniques: Crowd replications, 3-d morphing, motion control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. John F. Koegel Bufend, “Multimedia systems”, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2002
2. Parekh R, “Principles of Multimedia”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006.
3. Isaac V.Kerlow, “The Art of 3D Computer Animation and Effects”, Wiley Publications, 4th Edition,2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mohammed Dastbaz, “Designing Interactive Multimedia”, McGraw Hill Publication, 2002.
2. Ralf Steinmetz and Klara Nahrstedt, “Multimedia Applications”, Springer, 2007
15CSA08 INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the fundamental concepts of genetic algorithms
 To solve optimization problems using advanced GA operators
 To understand the multi objective optimization concepts
 To learn the significance of evolutionary algorithms
 To study the applications of genetic algorithms
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Explore the basics of genetic algorithms
 Solve real world problems using advanced operators of GA
 Work with multi objective optimization problems
 Identify the different evolutionary algorithms for solving problems
 Apply genetic algorithms to solve real-world domain problems
Knowledge of Problem Solving Techniques towards Optimization is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Introduction - Comparison of Biological and GA terminology – Mutation – Selection – Elitism – Crossover -
Initialization
UNIT II ADVANCED OPERATORS OF GA 9
Combinatorial optimization – Constraints - Multicriteria optimization - Hybrid algorithm - Alternative selection and
crossover methods - Meta Gas – Mutation - Parallel GA
181
UNIT III MULTIOBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION 9
Multi objective optimization problem - Principles of Multi objective optimization problem - Difference with single
objective optimization - Dominance and Pareto optimality - Optimality conditions
UNIT IV EVOLUTIONARY ALGORITHMS 9
Difficulties with classical optimization algorithms - Genetic algorithms - Evolution strategies - Evolution
programming - Genetic programming – Multi-model function optimization
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Image registration - Recursive prediction of night light levels - Estimation of the optical parameter of liquid
crystals - Design of energy - efficient buildings - Multi objective network rehabilitation of Messy GA
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. David A Coley, “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithms for Scientists and Engineers”, World Scientific
Publishing Company,1997.
2. Kalyamoy Deb,” Multi objective optimization using Evolutionary Algorithms”, John Wiley & Sons, First
Edition, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Melaine Mitchell “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, First MIT Press paperback edition, 1998.
2. S.N. Sivanandam, S.N. Deepa “Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, Springer, 2008.
3. David E. Goldberg “Genetic Algorithms”, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2009.
4. Koza, John, Wolfgang Banzhaf, Kumar Chellapilla, Kalyanmoy Deb, Marco Dorigo, David Fogel, Max
Garzon, David Goldberg, Hitoshi Iba, and Rick Riolo(Eds.), "Genetic Programming", Academic Press.
Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 1998.
5. John R.Koza, Forrest H Bennett III , David Andre, Martin A Keane, "Genetic Programming III: Darwinian
Invention and Problem Solving" Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 1999.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/~nd/surprise_96/journal/vol1/hmw/article1.html
2. http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/genetic-algorithms/
3. http://intelligence.worldofcomputing.net/machine-learning/genetic-algorithms.html#.VtVvblLlwgQ
4. http://epubs.siam.org/doi/abs/10.1137/0202009
5. http://study.com/academy/lesson/genetic-algorithms-examples-lesson.html
6. http:// www.csbdu.in/pdf/Practical_Genetic_Algorithms.pdf
7. http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/genetic-algorithms/ga-basic-description.php
8. https://www.cs.wmich.edu/~elise/courses/cs6800/Genetic-Algorithms.ppt
15CSA09 XML PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the basics of markup languages and CSS
 To acquire knowledge on XML and its DTD structure.
 To understand XML schema creation.
 To familiarize with DOM-based and SAX-based parsers.
 To study XSLT documents and different custom markup languages.
182
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Construct / design web pages using HTML and CSS
 Experiment XML document validation using DTD
 Validate XML documents using schemas
 Conduct experiments on XML documents using DOM / SAX parsers
 Transform XML documents to HTML using XSLT and review other custom markup languages
Basic Principles of Programming is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MARKUPS AND CSS 9
History of WWW – History of SGML – History of XML – Review of HTML tags: Lists – tables – links – images -
frames. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS): Inline styles – creating CSS with style, element – external CSS.
UNIT II XML MARKUP CREATION AND DTD 9
XML Markup introduction – Parsers, well-formed and valid XML documents – Parsing XML document with msxml
– characters – markup – XML namespaces - Document Type Declaration - Element Type Declarations - Attribute
Declarations – Simple DTD creation.
UNIT III XML SCHEMAS 9
Schema versus DTDs - Microsoft XML Schema: Describing elements - Describing attributes – Data types –
Simple XML schema creation.
UNIT IV DOM AND SAX PARSERS 9
DOM with JavaScript – DOM components – Traversing the DOM – SAX-based parsers – Events – Simple SAX
program – DOM versus SAX
UNIT V EXTENSIBLE STYLESHEET LANGUAGE TRANSFORMATION (XSLT) 9
Templates – Creating elements and attributes – Iteration and sorting – Conditional processing – Combining
stylesheets – Variables.
Introduction to Custom Markup Languages: Mathematical Markup Language (MathML) - Chemical Markup
Language (CML) - Wireless Markup Language (WML) - NewsML.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
2. H.M. Deitel, P.J. Deitel, T.R. Nieto, T.M. Lin, and P. Sadhu, “XML How to program”, Pearson Education
India, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Heather Williamson, “XML: The Complete Reference”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2001.
2. Cliff Binstock, “The XML Schema Complete Reference”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 2003.
3. Steven Holzner, “Inside XML”, New Riders, 2001.
4. Erik T. Ray, “Learning XML”, Second Edition, O'Reilly Media, Inc., 2003.
5. Elliotte Rusty Harold, W. Scott Means, “XML in a Nutshell”, O'Reilly Media Inc., 2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.w3schools.com/xml/default.asp
2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/xml/
3. http://www.xmlmaster.org/en/article/d01/
4. http://www.javatpoint.com/xml-tutorial
183
15CSA10 INTRODUCTION TO UML L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce object oriented modelling concepts and the role of UML
 To learn to model the requirements and work flows
 To explore the ways to model logical structure
 To know how to how to represent dynamic behavior in UML
 To understand the representation of behavior modelling in UML
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Model a scenario using Object Oriented Modelling
 Identify use cases and draw Use case and activity diagrams
 Represent logical design using class and object diagrams
 Represent dynamic behavior using sequence and collaboration diagrams
 Model the behaviors using state transition diagram
Knowledge of Modelling, Object Oriented Principles is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND OBJECT ORIENTED MODELLING 9
Introduction to UML - UML and Process - Perspectives of UML - Object Oriented Paradigm-Models - Object
Modelling - Models and Diagrams - Views of a Model
UNIT II MODELLING REQUIREMENT AND WORKFLOW 9
Modelling Requirements as Use cases - Use Case Diagrams – Relationships - Levels of Use Cases - Use cases
and features. Activity Diagrams: Basics – Activities and Action - Decisions and merges - Swim lanes -
Concurrency
UNIT III MODELLING LOGICAL STRUCTURE 9
Classes – Objects – Class relationship - Class Diagram – Multiplicity - Types – Implementation classes –
Interfaces – packages and subsystems – Object diagrams.
UNIT IV MODELLING ORDERED INTERACTION 9
Sequence Diagrams – Participants - Time-event, signals and messages - Use case and sequence diagram -
Collaboration Diagram
UNIT V BEHAVIOUR MODELLING 9
State Diagrams: States, Transitions, Advanced state diagrams. Component and Deployment Diagrams -
Extension using stereo types and properties
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Kim Hamilton and Russell Miles, “Learning UML 2.0”, O'Reilly, 2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sinan Si Alhir, “Learning UML”, O'Reilly, 2003.
2. Martin Fowler, “UML Distilled”, Addison Wesley, Third Edition, 2004.
3. Grady Booch, James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, “The Unified Modeling Language User Guide”,
Addison-Wesley, 2005.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.uml.org/
2. http://www.omg.org/ocup-2/coveragemap-found.htm#FoundationRefs
184
3. https://www.gliffy.com/uses/uml-software/
4. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/uml/
15CSA11 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER ORGANIZATION L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To have a knowledge on basic digital principles.
 To understand the basic structure and operation of a digital computer.
 To explore the basic processing unit
 To study the hierarchical memory system.
 To learn the pipelining architecture concepts.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply digital principle concepts to design logical circuits
 Design the arithmetic circuits for faster operations
 Analyze the main processing units of a computer.
 Analyze memory hierarchy and its impact on computer cost/performance.
 Design a pipeline for consistent execution of instructions with minimum hazards
Knowledge in Working Principles of Computers is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL PRINCIPLES 9
Boolean functions – Simplifications of Boolean functions using Karnaugh map- Implementation of Boolean
functions using logic gates - Decoders and encoders - Multiplexers and demultiplexers
UNIT II BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS 9
Functional units – Basic operational concepts – Performance – Instructions and instruction sequencing –
Addressing modes – RISC and CISC Styles – Arithmetic: Design of fast adders – Multiplication of unsigned and
signed numbers – Fast Multiplication – Floating point numbers and operations.
UNIT III BASIC PROCESSING UNIT 9
Fundamental concepts – Instruction Execution – Hardware Components - Instruction Fetch and Execution Steps
– Control Signals – Hardwired control
UNIT IV MEMORY SYSTEM 9
Basic concepts – Memory hierarchy - Semiconductor RAM – Read-only Memories – Direct Memory Access –
Cache memories – Performance considerations – Virtual memory
UNIT V PIPELINING 9
Basic concepts – Pipeline organization and issues – Data dependencies – Memory and branch delays –
Performance evaluation
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky, and Naraig Manjikian, “Computer Organization and
Embedded Systems”, McGraw Hill Higher Education, Sixth Edition, 2011.
2. M.Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, Pearson Education, 3rd edition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design: The
Hardware/Software interface”, Elsevier, Third Edition, 2005.
185
2. “Computer Organization”, ISRD Group, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
3. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance”, Pearson
Education, Sixth Edition, 2003.
4. Charles H.Roth, Jr. “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Jaico Publishing House, Cengage Earning, 4th
Edition, 2005.
5. Donald D.Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.ics.p.lodz.pl/~dpuchala/CompArch/Lecture_6.pdf
2. http://www.dauniv.ac.in/downloads/CArch_PPTs/
3. www.nptel.ac.in
4. http://cse.iitk.ac.in/users/karkare/courses/2011/cs220/html/notes.html
Offered by Mechanical Department

SEMESTER V
15MEA01 AUTOMOTIVE MAINTENANCE AND POLLUTION CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The concepts of automobile maintenance
 The methods of pollution control in automobiles
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the basic concept of engine maintenance
 Acquire knowledge about the Chassis Drive-line Maintenance
 Understand the Maintenance and servicing of auxiliaries
 Understand concept of Air Pollution due to Automobile Exhaust and its control methods
 Understand about Exhaust Emission Control
 Thermal Engineering and Automobile Engineering
UNIT I ENGINE MAINTENANCE 9
Engine troubles, effects & remedies, different major & minor services for engine, inspection and checking of
components visually and dimensionally, reconditioning methods of engine components, engine tune-up, special
tools & advanced equipment.
UNIT II CHASSIS DRIVE-LINE MAINTENANCE 9

Maintenance, repair and servicing of clutches, Fluid flywheel, gear boxes, Automatic transmission, Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) unit, propeller shaft, differential unit, front axle and rear axle, suspension systems,
servicing of brake systems- hydraulic, air systems, brake bleeding and brakes adjustments, maintenance and
servicing of steering system-Manual & Power Steering system, wheel balancing, wheel alignment, maintenance
of tyres, tyre rotation, frame defects, chassis frame alignment.
186
UNIT III MAINTENANCE, SERVICING OF AUXILIARIES 9
Cooling system service, anti-corrosion additives, anti-freezing solutions, dry & wet liners, petrol fuel and diesel
fuel system maintenance, Multi-Point Fuel Injection (MPFI) maintenance, lubrication system services, chassis
lubrication, lubrication chart, maintenance and care of storage batteries, battery testing methods, maintenance of
ignition systems, tyre service & reconditioning.
UNIT IV AIR POLLUTION DUE TO AUTOMOBILE EXHAUST 9

Sources of Emission, Exhaust gas constituents & analysis, Ingredients responsible for air pollution, Smoke,
odour, Smog formation, Sources of pollution, effects, Analysis of air pollutants, Air pollution control models and
equipment.
UNIT V EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL 9

Basic methods of emission control, catalytic converter, After burners, reactor manifold, air injection, crank case
emission control, evaporative loss control, Exhaust gas recirculation, Fuel additives. Pollution Norms: European
pollution norms, Indian pollution norms as per Central Motor Vehicle Rules (C.M.V.R.), Measurement Devices for
HC, CO,NOX,Smoke.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. John B. Heyhood, “Internal Combustion Engines Fundamentals”, McGraw Hill, 1989.

2. Stone.R, “Introduction to Internal Combustion Engines”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Newton, Steeds and Garet, “Motor Vehicles”, Society of Automotive Engineers, U.S., 13th revised
Edition, 2002.
2. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics”, East-West Press, 2nd Edition, 2004.
3. Martin W. Stockel and Martin T Stockel, “Automotive Mechanics Fundamentals,” Goodheart-Willcox Co;
Instructor's Manual Edition 2005.
4. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology”, SAE International Publications USA, 2003.
15MEA02 FUNDAMENTALS OF ENERGY RESOURCES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to understand the interaction between different parts of the energy system.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the basics of energy systems.
 Apply the fundamentals of energy conversion for practical applications.
 Realize the importance of non-conventional energy systems.
 Understand the concepts of Biomass energy.
 Know about energy conservation techniques.
187
 Power plant Technology.
 Heat Transfer.
UNIT I ENERGY 9
Introduction to energy – Global energy scene – Indian energy scene - Units of energy conversion factors, general
classification of energy, energy crisis, energy alternatives.
UNIT II CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 9

Conventional energy resources, Thermal, hydel and nuclear reactors, Thermal, hydel and nuclear power plants,
Efficiency, merits and de-merits of the above power plants, combustion processes, fluidized bed combustion.
UNIT III NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 9

Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water heating, solar cooling,
solar distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar thermal power generation, solar energy
application in India, energy plantations. Wind energy, types of windmills, ocean wave energy conversion, ocean
thermal energy conversion, tidal energy conversion, geothermal energy.
UNIT IV BIOMASS ENERGY 9

Biomass origin - Resources – Biomass estimation. Thermochemical conversion – Biological conversion,
Chemical conversion – Hydrolysis & hydrogenation, bio-crude, biodiesel power generation, gasifier, biogas,
integrated gasification.
UNIT V ENERGY CONSERVATION 9

Energy conservation - Act; Energy management importance, duties and responsibilities; Energy audit – Types
and methodology, reports, instruments. Material and energy balance, thermal energy management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rao, S. and Parulekar, B.B., “Energy Technology”, Khanna Publishers, 2005.
2. Rai, G.D., “Non-conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2010.
3. Nagpal, G.R., “Power Plant Engineering”, Khanna Publishers, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press, U.K., 3rd
Revised Edition 2012.
2. Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., “Renewable Energy Sources”, EFN Spon Ltd., UK, 1986.
3. Tiwari G.N., “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Narosa Publishing
House, New Delhi, 2002.
4. Freris L.L., “Wind Energy Conversion systems”, Prentice Hall, UK, 1990.
188
15MEA03 MANUFACTURING FOR INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Electronics manufacturing.
 Surface Mount Technology and Packing Technology.
 Defects, Inspection techniques employed in SMT assembly process.
 Repair, rework and quality aspects of Electronics assemblies.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the basics of Electronics manufacturing and fabrication steps.
 Know the types of Mounting and Packaging Technologies.
 Know various Defects, Inspection techniques employed in SMT assembly process.
 Learn repair, rework and quality aspects of Electronics assemblies.
 Crystal Structure, Semi-conducting materials.
 Atomic Structure, Miller Indices, Periodic table, Crystal defects.
 Various Joining processes, filing and assembly tools.
 Silicon and its chemistry.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION OF SEMICONDUCTORS 9
Semiconductor materials, devices – Process technology – Basic fabrication steps – Oxidation,
Photolithography, Etching, Diffusion, Ion implantation, Metallization – Material characterization – Wafer
shaping – Crystal characterization.
UNIT II ETCHING AND DIFFUSION 9

Etching – Definition – Types - Wet chemical etching – Silicon, Silicon Dioxide, Silicon Nitride and Polysilicon,
Aluminum, Gallium Arsenide – Dry etching – Reactive plasma etching – Techniques and equipment –
Applications – Diffusion – Definition – Basic diffusion process – Extrinsic diffusion – Lateral diffusion.
UNIT III SURFACE MOUNT TECHNOLOGY AND PACKAGING 9

Introduction to packaging, types – Pin grid array package, Ball grid array package – Attachment
methodologies – Wire bonding, Tape automated bonding, Flip chip bonding – Surface mount technology –
Introduction – Through hole components.
UNIT IV INSPECTION AND TESTING 9

Inspection techniques, equipment and principle - AOI, X-ray. Defects and Corrective action - Stencil printing
process, component placement process, reflow soldering process, under fill and encapsulation process -
Electrical testing of PCB assemblies- In circuit test, functional testing - Fixtures and jigs.
UNIT V REPAIR, REWORK, QUALITY AND RELIABILITY OF ELECTRONICS 9

ASSEMBLIES
Repair tools – Methods - Rework criteria and process - Thermo-mechanical effects and thermal management -
Reliability fundamentals - Reliability testing - Failure analysis - Design for manufacturability - Assembly –
Reworkability – Testing - Reliability and environment.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Gary S. May, Simon M. Sze, “Fundamentals of Semiconductor Fabrication”, Wiley Student Edition,
2004.
2. Ray Prasad,” Surface Mount Technology – Principles and practice”, Second Edition, Chapman and
Hall, New York, 1997.
189
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Puligandla Viswanadham and Pratap Singh, Chapman and Hall, “Failure Modes and Mechanisms in
Electronic Packages”, New York, N.Y, 1998.
2. Ning - Cheng Lee, “Reflow Soldering Process and Trouble Shooting SMT, BGA, CSP and Flip Chip
Technologies”, Elsevier Science, 1995.
3. Zarrow, Phil, “Surface Mount Technology Terms and Concepts”, Elsevier Science and Technology,
1997.
4. C.A.Harper, “Electronic Packaging and Interconnection Handbook”, McGraw Hill Inc.,New York,
N.Y.,2004.
15MEA04 HUMAN FACTORS IN ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To recognize the important issues concerned with the human factors aspects of tasks, products and
environments.
 To study human behaviour during working.
 To know the methods of quantifying and predicting human comfort, human performance and human health.
 To recognize the role of standards, recommendations and regulations applicable to tasks, products and
environments.
 To recognize limitations to predict human responses, including inter-subject variability and intra-subject
variability.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Able to explain the various aspects of human sensory and cognitive attributes that influence human performance.
 Able to design the working space, work station ergonomically by considering human body dimensions.
 Able to predict the human behaviour, human comfort and human performance during working.
 Able to design man machine system effectively.
 Able to assess human skill and capabilities.
 Basics of ergonomics, various work postures and risk factors.

 Interest to study the human behaviour such as motivation talk, personality and determination of attitudes.
 Ability to understand the concept behind man-machine system, theory behind Ergonomics system and virtual
environments.
 Design of systems, tools and equipment, Knowledge of Man-Machine systems.
 Work study, Method study, Motion study.
UNIT I ERGONOMICS AND ANATOMY 9

Introduction to ergonomics: The focus of ergonomics, ergonomics and its areas of application in the work system, a brief
history of ergonomics, attempts to humanize work, modern ergonomics,
Posture stability and posture adaptation, low back pain, risk factors for musculoskeletal disorders in the workplace,
behavioral aspects of posture.
UNIT II HUMAN BEHAVIOR 9
Individual differences, Factors contributing to personality, fitting the man to the job, Influence of difference on safety,
Method of measuring characteristics, Accident Proneness.
Motivation, Complexity of Motivation, Job satisfaction. Management theories of motivation, Job enrichment theory.
Frustration and Conflicts, -Determination of attitudes, changing attitudes. Motivational requirements.
190
UNIT III ANTHROPOMETRY AND WORK DESIGN FOR STANDING AND SEATED 9
WORKS
Designing for a population of users, percentile, sources of human variability, anthropometry and its uses in ergonomics,
principles of applied anthropometry in ergonomics, application of anthropometry in design, design for everyone,
anthropometry and personal space, effectiveness and cost effectiveness
Fundamental aspects of standing and sitting, an ergonomics approach to work station design, design for standing
workers, design for seated workers, work surface design, visual display units, guidelines for design of static work,
effectiveness and cost effectiveness, research directions
UNIT IV MAN- MACHINE SYSTEM AND REPETITIVE WORKS AND MANUAL 9

HANDLING TASK
Applications of human factors engineering, man as a sensor, man as information processor, man as controller – Man Vs
Machine.
Ergonomics interventions in Repetitive works, handle design, key board design- measures for preventing in work related
musculoskeletal disorders (WMSDs), reduction and controlling, training.
Anatomy and biomechanics of manual handling, prevention of manual handling injuries in the work place, design of
manual handling tasks, carrying, and postural stability.
UNIT V HUMAN SKILL & PERFORMANCE AND DISPLAY, CONTROLS AND 9

VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENTS
Human strength capabilities - Features of the human body- measures of the physiological functions-strength and
endurance- speed of movements.
Principles for the design of visual displays- auditory displays- design of controls- combining displays and controls- virtual
(synthetic) environments, research issues.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Bridger R.S., “Introduction to Ergonomics”, CRC Press; 3rd Edition, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Michael O’Neill, “Ergonomic Design for Organizational Effectiveness”, CRC Press; 2ndEdition 1998.
2. Mark S. Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering & Design”, McGraw-Hill Higher Education; 7th Edition, 1992.
3. Philip Jacobs, Dan McLeod & Nancy Larson, “The Ergonomics Manual”, Saunders group, UK, 1990.
4. Thomas A. Hunter, “Engineering Design for Safety”, McGraw-Hill, 1992.
15MEA05 DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To review and clarify the fundamental terms, concepts associated with Decision Support Systems,
computerized decision aids, expert systems, group support systems and executive support systems.
 To discuss the modelling and analysis of the Decision Support Systems.
 To understand the enterprise DSS and knowledge management.
 To understand the intelligent systems used in DSS.
 To discuss organizational and social implications of Decision Support Systems.
191
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Demonstrate an understanding of the theory of decisions and decision analysis including probability,
decisions under uncertainty, risk taking, and real-world problems.
 Demonstrate the different models used in the DSS.
 Analyze, design and build an information system using emerging tools and technologies for a given
business problem.
 Recognize the relationship between enterprise information needs and decision making.
 Explain the components and concepts of DSS, their characteristics and capabilities.
 Analyze typical decision situations to determine whether it is practical to support them with computer
technology and, if so, how.
 Gain an appreciation of working on systems development projects in a team environment and obtain
experience with project management.
 Describe and understand the concept of decision support systems including collection of data, database
management, modeling, group and organizational decision support systems, executive information
systems, and expert systems.
 Operation analysis, Reasoning skills and critical thinking and Deductive problem solving techniques.
UNIT I DECISION MAKING AND COMPUTERIZED SUPPORT 9

Decision Making: Introduction and Definitions - Managers and Decision Making - Managerial decision making and
Information Systems - Managers and computerized support Need - framework for decision support – concept of
decision support systems (DSS) –executive support systems - preview of the modeling process-phases of decision
making process.
UNIT II MODELING AND ANALYSIS 9

DSS components- DSS classifications - Data warehousing, access, analysis, mining and visualization - modeling
and analysis- Static and dynamic models – influence diagrams – Optimization via mathematical programming –
Heuristic programming – simulation – multidimensional modeling – model base management.
UNIT III ENTERPRISE DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS AND 9

KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT
Group decision making – Group support systems- Technologies – Creativity and Idea generation - enterprise
information systems (EIS) – Comparing and Integrating EIS and DSS - supply and value chain and DSS- supply
chain problems and solutions – Computerized systems - knowledge management methods, technologies and
tools.
UNIT IV INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS 9

Artificial intelligence (AI) – Concepts and Definitions – AI versus natural intelligence - expert systems-concepts,
structure, types and benefits and problems – knowledge Engineering - knowledge acquisition and validation -
knowledge representation – Techniques – Inference techniques
UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION, INTEGRATION, AND IMPACTS 9

Implementation – Major issues of implementation – implementation strategies – Models of integration – Intelligent
DSS – Intelligent modelling and model management – problems and issues in integration - impact of management
support systems - overview – personnel management issues – impact of Individuals – Impacts on productivity,
quality and competitiveness – Issues of legality, privacy and ethics – Other societal impacts.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
192
TEXTBOOK:
1. Efraim Turban and Jay E Aronson, “Decision Support and Intelligent Systems”, Prentice Hall, 6thEdition,
2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. George M. Marakas, “Decision Support Systems”, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2002.
2. Daniel J. Power, “Decision Support Systems: Concepts and Resources for Managers”, Greenwood
Publishing Group, 1st Edition, 2002.
3. Quazi Khabeer, “Business Process Management and Decision Support Systems”, Alpha Science
International Limited, 1stEdition, 2013.
4. Elain Rich, Kevin Knight and Shivashankar B. Nair , “Artificial intelligence”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Limited, 3rd Edition, 2009.
15MEA06 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND COST ANALYSIS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about the basics of economics.
 To make cost analysis related to engineering so as to take economically sound decisions.
 To learn about different types of maintenance analysis.
 To learn about depreciation and inflation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the completion of the course the students will be able to
 Understand the concept of Engineering Economics, types of costs and make economic analysis.
 Remember, understand and apply various Interest formulae and their applications for different
investment situations.
 Compare and analyze various investment alternatives and make appropriate decisions.
 Make replacement and maintenance analysis to take optimal decisions.
 Understand the concept of depreciation, and inflation.
 Economics basics.
 Profit and Loss.
 Concept of money, loans.
 Interest rate, maintenance
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS 9

Introduction to economics-Flow in an economy-Law of supply and demand, Concept of engineering
economics-Engineering efficiency, economic efficiency, Scope of engineering economics – Elements of costs,
marginal cost, marginal revenue, sunk cost, opportunity cost, break-even analysis- V ratio, Elementary
economic analysis – Material selection for product design selection for a product, process planning.
UNIT II VALUE ENGINEERING 9
Make or buy decision, Value engineering – Function, aims, Value engineering procedure. Interest formulae
and their applications –Time value of money, Single payment compound amount factor, Single payment
193
present worth factor, Equal payment series sinking fund factor, Equal payment series payment Present worth
factor- equal payment series capital recovery factor-Uniform gradient series annual equivalent factor, Effective
interest rate, Examples in all the methods.
UNIT III CASH FLOW 9
Methods of comparison of alternatives – present worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram),
Future worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow diagram), Annual
equivalent method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow diagram), rate of return
method, Examples in all the methods.
UNIT IV REPLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE ANALYSIS 9
Replacement and Maintenance analysis – Types of maintenance, types of replacement problem,
determination of economic life of an asset, Replacement of an asset with a new asset – capital recovery with
return and concept of challenger and defender, Simple probabilistic model for items which fail completely.
UNIT V DEPRECIATION 9
Depreciation- Introduction, Straight line method of depreciation, declining balance method of depreciation-Sum
of the years digits method of depreciation, sinking fund method of depreciation/ Annuity method of
depreciation, service output method of depreciation-Evaluation of public alternatives- introduction, Examples,
Inflation adjusted decisions – procedure to adjust inflation, Examples on comparison of alternatives and
determination of economic life of asset.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1.Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 2nd Edition,
2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India, 6th Edition2015.
2. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavelle, “Engineering Economics and analysis”, Oxford University
Press, 12th Edition, 2013.
3. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Pearson, 6th Edition2014.
4. Grant.E.L, Ireson.W.G, and Leavenworth, R.S, “Principles of Engineering Economy”, Wiley, 8th
Edition1990.
5. Smith, G.W., “Engineering Economy”, Iowa State Press, 4th Edition1987.
15MEA07 NANO TECHNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics behind the nanotechnology.
 To impart knowledge on the synthesis of various nanomaterials.
 To acquire knowledge on the characterization tools used in nanotechnology.
 To have exposure on nanomaterials patterning technologies.
 To gain knowledge on nanodevices and their purpose in the engineering applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Demonstrate the classification and properties of nanomaterials.
 Able to synthesis various nanomaterials.
 Identify the various characterization techniques using sophisticated techniques.
194
 Understand the patterning and lithographic techniques.
 Apply the perceptions of the nanotechnology for various technical applications.
 Material Science.
 Basic knowledge in Physics and Chemistry.
 Fundamentals and technological importance of new materials.
Nanoscale architecture -Classification of nanostructures - Surface to volume ratio -Fraction of surface atoms –
Surface energy- changes to the system total energy - effect of nanoscale dimensions on various properties –
thermal, chemical, mechanical, magnetic, optical and electronic properties.
UNIT II PREPARATION METHODOLOGIES 9

Fabrication methods – top down processes – milling, ECAP process – bottomup process – vapour phase
deposition methods – plasmaassisted deposition process - MBE and MOMBE - liquid phase methods -
colloidal and solgel methods – methods for templating the growth of nanomaterials – ordering of nanosystems
- self-assembly.
UNIT III CHARACTERISATION 9

Analytical and imaging techniques - Electron Microscopy: Scanning Electron Microscopy, Transmission
Electron Microscopy - Scanning Tunnelling Microscopy - Atomic Force Microscopy – X-Ray diffraction
techniques – Spectroscopy techniques – Raman spectroscopy – surface analysis and depth profiling.
UNIT IV PATTERNING AND LITHOGRAPHY TECHNIQUES 9

Optical lithography – Electron lithography - X-ray Lithography - Ion lithography. Plasma properties – Feature
size control and anisotropy etch mechanism – Lift off techniques – Plasma reactor – Fl2 & Cl2 based etching –
Relative plasma etching techniques and equipments.
UNIT V NANODEVICES 9
Single Electron devices: Nano scale MOSFET – Resonant tunnelling transistor – Single electron transistors -
Single electron dynamics - Nano robotics and Nano manipulation DNA based nano devices – Gas based nano
devices - Quantum structures and devices - Quantum layers, wells, dots and wires - Carbon nanotube based
logic gates, optical devices - Connection with quantum devices- Single molecule electronic devices – photonic
band gap systems - applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Timp Gregory, “Nanotechnology”, Springer, 2012.

2. Guozhong Cao, “Nanosrtuctures and nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and applications”, Imperial
College Press, 2004.
3. Robert Kelsall, Ian Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, “Nanoscale Science and Technology”, John Wiley &
sons, Inc., 2005.
4. Michael Kohler, Wolfgang Fritzsche, “Nanotechnology: An Introduction to Nano structuring
Techniques”, Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH, 2009.
5. Charles. P. Poole, Frank. J. Owens, “Introduction to Nanotechnology”, John Wiley, 2010.
6. Stefan Landis, “Nano Lithography”, Wiley, 2011.
7. Pradeep T., “A Text book of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
195
15MEA08 FUEL CELL & HYDROGEN ENERGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To familiarize the need and production of Hydrogen.

• To impart basic knowledge about Fuel cell.
• To analyze the fuel cell from the thermodynamics perspective.
• To understand the different components and types of fuel cell.
• To know the heat and mass transfer analysis and current issues of fuel cell.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

• To acquire the basics involved in the production of Hydrogen and its storage.
• To understand the working principle of fuel cell.
• To gather knowledge about the thermodynamics, and electrochemical engineering perspectives of
fuel cell technology.
• To acquire fundamental knowledge in the development of fuel cell technology.
• Gathered the fundamental knowledge about the heat and mass transfer in fuel cell.
• Basic chemistry.
• Thermodynamics
UNIT I HYDROGEN ENERGY 9
Hydrogen: Its merit as a fuel; Applications, Hydrogen production methods - Production of hydrogen from fossil
fuels, electrolysis, thermal decomposition, photochemical and photo-catalytic methods. Hydrogen storage
methods - Metal hydrides, metallic alloy hydrides, carbon nano-tubes, sea as source of deuterium.
UNIT II FUEL CELL BASICS 7

Fuel cell definition, Difference between batteries and fuel cells, fuel cell history, components of fuel cells,
principle of working of fuel cells
UNIT III FUEL CELL THERMODYNAMICS 10

Second law analysis of fuel cells, efficiency of fuel cells, fuel cell electrochemistry - Nernst equation,
Electrochemical kinetics, Butler-Volmer equation, Fuel cell types - Classification by operating
temperature/electrolyte type, Fuel Cell Performance, Activation, Ohmic and Concentration over potential
UNIT IV FUEL CELL DESIGN AND COMPONENTS 9

Cell components, stack components, system components, Overview of intermediate/high temperature fuel
cells - Solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC), Molten carbonate fuel cells (MCFC), Phosphoric acid fuel cells (PAFC),
Polymer Electrolyte fuel cells (PEFC)
UNIT V HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER IN FUEL CELLS 10

Heat and mass transfer in polymer electrolyte fuel cells, water management in PEFCs, Current issues in
PEFCs Direct methanol fuel cells (DMFC) - Electrochemical kinetics methanol oxidation, Current issues in
DMFCs, Fuel crossover in DMFCs, Water management in DMFCs, high methanol concentration operation,
limiting current density
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
196
TEXTBOOKS:
1. J. Larminie and A. Dicks, “Fuel Cell Systems Explained”, SAE International and John Wiley &
Sons,2nd Edition, 2003.
2. Xianguo Li, “Principles of Fuel Cells”, Taylor and Francis, New York, 2005.
3. S. Srinivasan, “Fuel Cells: From Fundamentals to Applications”, Springer US, CBS Publishers: New
Delhi, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ryan O'Hayre, Suk-Won Cha, Whitney Colella and Fritz B. Prinz, “Fuel Cell Fundamentals”, Wiley,
2nd Edition, 2008.
2. Allen J. Bard and Larry R. Faulkner, “Electrochemical Methods: Fundamentals and Applications”,
John Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition, 2001.
3. Amir Faghriand Yuwen Zhang, “Transport Phenomena in Multiphase Systems”, Academic Press; 1st
Edition, 2006.
15MEA09 BIO-MECHANICS AND HUMAN BODY VIBRATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the functions of various muscular skeletal system and anthrometry.
 To correlate the human body vibration and muscular skeletal system.
 To know about various bio mechanical models and acquire knowledge on work capacity.
 To know about the various types of vibration and its relevant criteria.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students would
 Analyse the various types of vibration and its relation to the bio mechanical models.
 Acquire knowledge on Anthrometric data and Bio mechanical studies in the industries.
 Acquire the knowledge on evaluation of work capacity vibration measurement.
 Basic knowledge on biology.
 Fundamentals of Engineering Mechanics.
UNIT I VIBRATION 9
Introduction, vibration exciters, control systems, Performance specification, motion sensors and transducers
UNIT II MUSCULARSKELETAL SYSTEM AND ANTHROPOMETRY IN 9

BIOMECHANICS
Introduction, structure and function of musculoskeletal system - Connective Tissue, Skeletal Muscle, Joints
Measurement of body segment, physical properties, Anthropometric data for biomechanical studies in
industry
UNIT III MECHANICAL WORK CAPACITY EVALUATION AND 9

BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Joint motion, human motion analysis system, applied electromyography, intradiscal pressure measurement,
intrabdominal measurement, force platform system, whole body vibration measurement.
UNIT IV BIOMECHANICAL MODELS 9

Planar static biomechanical models, static 3D modelling, dynamic biomechanical models, special purpose
biomechanical models.
197
UNIT V WHOLE BODY AND SEGMENTAL VIBRATION 9
Vibration on human body, whole body vibration, Hand-Transmitted Vibration, segmental vibration, vibration
exposure criteria.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Vibration and Shock Handbook, Clarence W. De Silva, Taylor and Francis Group, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOK:
1.Occupational Biomechanics, Don B. Chaffin and Gunnar B.J.Andersson, John Wiley and sons, Inc.
15MEA10 FUNDAMENTALS OF THERMAL SCIENCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The interaction between different concepts of thermodynamics and heat transfer.
 The application of thermodynamics and heat transfer to various industries.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the basic concepts of thermodynamics.
 Acquire knowledge about the power plants.
 Know the applications of psychrometry.
 Understand the basic concepts of Refrigeration.
 Understand the basic concepts of Air conditioning.
 Engineering Thermodynamics
 Power plant technology
 Thermal Engineering
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO THERMODYNAMICS 12

Basic Concepts: System, Control Volume, Surrounding, Boundaries, Universe, Types of Systems,
Thermodynamic Equilibrium, Property, Process, Cycle – Reversibility – Quasi-static Process, Irreversible
Process, Types, Work and Heat, Point and Path function, Concept of quality of Temperature, Principles of
Thermometry, Steady Flow Energy Equation, Limitations of First Law of Thermodynamics, Second law of
Thermodynamics, entropy (Elementary treatment only).
UNIT II POWER PLANTS 7

Introduction to thermodynamic cycles, Steam, Hydel, Diesel, Tidal, Geothermal, Wind, Solar power plants-
schematic and working.
UNIT III PSYCHROMETRY 7

Properties of air-water vapour mixtures: Dry Bulb Temperature, Wet Bulb Temperature, Relative Humidity, dew
point temperature, degree of saturation, thermodynamic wet bulb temperature, enthalpy of moist air, sensible
heating and cooling, Adiabatic humidification and dehumidification, By-pass factor, Cooling load calculations
using psychrometric table and chart.
198
UNIT IV REFRIGERATION 12
Vapour compression refrigeration cycle- super heat, sub cooling – Performance calculations - working principle
of vapour absorption system, Ammonia –Water, Lithium bromide –water systems (Description only) - Alternate
refrigerants – Comparison between vapour compression and absorption systems
UNIT V AIR CONDITIONING 7

Air conditioning system: Types, Working Principles – Cooling Load calculations – Concept of Room Sensible
Heat Factor, Grand Sensible Heat Factor, Effective Sensible Heat Factor.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Note: Use of standard thermodynamic tables, Mollier diagram, Psychrometric chart and refrigerant property
tables are permitted in the examination
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Sarkar, B.K, “Thermal Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2007.
2. Kothandaraman.C.P, Domkundwar.S, Domkundwar. A.V., “A course in thermal engineering“, Dhanpat
Rai & sons, 5th Edition, 2012.
3. Nag.P.K, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Nag P. K, “Power Plant Engineering”, Tata McGraw- Hill, 3rdEdition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajput. R. K., “Thermal Engineering” S.Chand Publishers , 2010

2. Cengel, “Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach” TataMcGraw Hill, New Delhi, 5th Edition,
2006.
3. EI-Wakil M.M, “Power Plant Technology”, Tata McGraw-Hill 2001.
15MEA11 FUNDAMENTALS OF LITHOGRAPHY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Lithography is a study of printing micron to nano scale features on silicon wafer. Complete understanding of
the course makes the student technically strong in nano fabrication.
 To impart sound knowledge about the fundamentals of clean room and nano fabrication by optical
projection lithography.
 To emphasize about the importance of mask and maskless lithography.
 To motivate the pattern transfer technique with high energetic electron beam concepts.
 This course provides information about printing the pattern with ion beam sources.
 To enable the knowledge about printing with soft lithographic concepts and etching the
unwantedportions.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After studying this course students will be able to:
 It emphasize about the fabrication of integrated circuits on microchip using optical principles.
 Understand about the extreme UV light and zone plates as maskless techniques.
 Applying scanning electron beam techniques in nano fabrication.
 Imparts knowledge about the use of Ion beam/focused ion beam as tools for developing nano objects.
 Provides impression about soft lithography techniques and various modes of etching.
199
 Fundamentals of Nanoscience and Technology.
 Microelectro mechanical systems and Nano electro mechanical systems.
 Fundamentals of Micro fabrication.
 Fundamental principles of optical lithography.
UNIT I PHOTOLITHOGRAPHY AND PATTERNING OF THIN FILMS 10
Introduction to lithography – lithography processes; mask making, wafer pre-treatment, resist spinning – pre-
bake, exposure, development and rinsing, post-bake, resist stripping, positive and negative photoresists – lift
off profile - introduction to semiconductor processing - necessity for a clean room - different types of clean
rooms - maintenance of a clean room – micro fabrication process flow diagram – chip cleaning, coating of
photoresists, patterning, etching, inspection – process integration - etching techniques - reactive Ion etching -
magnetically enhanced RIE- Ion beam etching - other etching techniques.
UNIT II PHOTOLITHOGRAPHY AND PATTERNING OF THIN FILMS 9
Lithography - optical lithography - different modes - optical projection lithography - multistage scanners –
resolution and limits of photolithography – resolution enhancement techniques - photo mask- binary mask -
phase shifting mask - attenuated phase shift masks - alternating phase shift masks - off axis illumination -
optical proximity correction - sub resolution assist feature enhancement - optical immersion lithography.
UNIT III DIRECT WRITING METHODS - MASKLESS OPTICAL LITHOGRAPHY 7

Maskless optical projection lithography – types, advantages and limitations – required components - zone
plate array lithography - extreme ultraviolet lithography – light sources - optics and materials issues.
UNIT IV ELECTRON BEAM LITHOGRAPHY, ION BEAM & X-RAY 10

LITHOGRAPHY
Scanning electron - beam lithography - electron sources and electron optics system – maskless EBL- electron
beam projection lithography - scattering with angular limitation projection e-beam lithography - projection
reduction exposure with variable axis immersion lenses - Ion beam lithography - focusing ion beam lithography
- ion projection lithography – X-ray lithography – X-ray masks, resists, merits and demerits - atom lithography.
UNIT V NANOIMPRINT LITHOGRAPHY AND SOFT LITHOGRAPHY 9
Nano imprint lithography - hot embossing - soft Lithography- moulding/replica moulding: PDMS stamps -
printing with soft stamps - edge lithography - dip-pen lithography - set up and working principle – self-
assembly – LB films.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Chris Mack, “Fundamental principles of optical lithography: The science of micro fabrication”, Wiley,
2008.
2. M. Madou, “Fundamentals of micro fabrication”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2002.
3. Stepanova, Maria, “Nano fabrication techniques and principles”, Dew, Steven (Eds.) Springer, 2012.
4. John A. Rogers & Hong H. Lee, “Unconventional nano patterning techniques and applications”, A
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2009.
5. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, “MEMS and NEMS: Systems, devices and structures”, CRC Press LLC,
2002.
200
6. Zheng Cui, “Nano fabrication – Principles, capabilities and limits”, Springer Science, 2008.
7. Mark J. Jackson, “Micro fabrication and nano manufacturing”, CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group,
2006.
15MEA12 FUNDAMENTALS OF FIRE SAFETY ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide an in depth knowledge about the fundamentals of fire and explosion.
 To understand the causes and effects of fire and explosion.
 To know the various fire and explosion prevention systems and protective equipment.
 To understand the protection of building from fire.
 To understand the various fire prevention techniques to be followed in a building.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 To make familiar about basic concepts of fire and explosion science.

 To k n o w t h e d i f f e r e n t causes and effects of fire and explosion.
 To understand the operation of various types of fire fighting equipment.
 To understand the prevention of explosion.
 To equip the students to effectively employ fire protection techniques in building.
 Fundamentals of Thermodynamics.
 Various modes of heat transfer.
 Fluid mechanics, Engineering Chemistry, Engineering Physics.
 Building materials used for construction.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF FIRE 9
Combustion process & concepts, combustion in solids, liquid, gases- smouldering fires- Spontaneous
combustion - rapid fire progress phenomena- Properties influencing fire hazard – properties of solid, liquid
and gaseous fuels - classification of fires.
UNIT II FIRE CONTROL 9

Fire extinguishers – Location and operation of extinguishers - Extinguishing methods- extinguishing agents:
water, foam, chemical powder, CO2, sand, steam, saw dust – Fire detectors – Fire tender - Automatic fire
extinguishing system - Fixed fire fighting installations - Risk analysis: risk assessment, consequence analysis,
risk reduction – Fire drill – Emergency procedures.
UNIT III PRODUCTS AND EFFECTS OF COMBUSTION 9

Heat: Conduction, convection, radiation- effects of heat- effects of flames – different fire gases and their
effects – effects of smoke on humans– Smoke movement control and venting - Effects of explosion – Negative
pressure wave – Fragmentation – case studies.
UNIT IV BUILDING FIRE SAFETY 9

Objectives of fire safe building design, Fire load, fire resistant material and fire testing – concept of egress
design - exits – width calculations -– fire safety requirements for high rise buildings – Behavior of materials &
structures in fire – Concrete and steel. Flame spread in high rise building – Statutory requirements.
201
UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF EXPLOSION 9
Introduction – Explosion fundamentals – Types – Physical, BLEVE, Chemical explosion – Vapour cloud
explosion – Dust explosion – Explosion prevention – Explosion mitigation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Purandare D.D., Abhay D. Purandare, “Hand Book on Industrial Fire Safety”, 1st Edition, P & A
Publications.
2. Derek, James, “Fire Prevention Hand Book”, Butter Worths and Company, London, 1986.
3. Jain V.K., Fire Safety in Building, New Age International (P) Ltd. Publishers, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gupta, R.S., “Hand Book of Fire Technology” Orient Longman, Bombay, 2010.
2. “Accident Prevention manual for industrial operations” N.S.C., Chicago, 1982.
3. Dinko Tuhtar, “Fire and explosion protection – A system approach”, Ellis Horwood Ltd, 1989.
4. “Fire fighters hazardous materials Reference Book Fire Prevention in Factories”, Nostrand Rein
Hold, New York, 1991.
5. Lees F.P., “Fire Prevention and firefighting”, Loss prevention Association, India.
15MEA13 HIGH ENERGETIC MATERIAL - PROPELLANTS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study about the process of conversion of the high energy released by materials due to
decomposition into useful work.
 This course deals with the study of the application of the released energy into different categories like
explosives, propellant and pyrotechnics.
 To understand the background aspects of the different products of explosives, pyro techniques and
propellant by any engineering student.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the classification of high energy materials according to the process.
 Apply the release of energy into useful work in different categories.
 Understand the basic characteristics and ingredients of Propellant.
 Know about the basic process of pyro techniques.
 Understand the various processing techniques of explosives in an ethical manner.
 Materials: Inorganic materials, Ferrous and Non-ferrous materials.
 Organic materials, Polymers.
 Fundamentals of Combustion.
 Chemistry of burning.
 Hazardous materials.
UNIT I EXPLOSIVE MATTER 9
High energetic material – Definition – Classifications – Explosives – Reactive explosive materials – Primary
explosives – Secondary explosives – Military explosives – Industrial explosives – Nitro explosives – Liquid
oxidizers and explosives.
202
UNIT II GUN PROPELLANT 9
Low explosives - Gun propellant – Features - Deflagration – Ballistic property – Homogeneous propellant -
Single base propellant – Nitrocellulose – Stabilizer – Characteristics - Double base propellant – Nitrocellulose
and nitroglycerin – Additives - Extruded Double-Base Propellants - Cast Double-Base Propellants – Liquid
propellant.
UNIT III ROCKET PROPELLANT 9
Rocket Propellant - Composite propellant – Features - Ingredients - Fuels, oxidizers, binders – Additives –
Cross linking agents – Plasticizers – Stabilizers – Burn rate modifier – Characteristics - Inhibition – Neutral and
Progressive burning– Inhibition techniques.
UNIT IV PYROTECHNICS 9
Pyrotechnics – General features - Ingredients of Pyrotechnic Formulations – Fuel, Oxidizers, Binders,
Coolants, Retardants, Dyes, Color Intensifiers, Moderators – Characteristics- Pyrotechnic formulations -
Illuminating formulations - Delay formulations - Smoke formulations - Incendiary formulations.
UNIT V PROCESSING TECHNIQUES FOR EXPLOSIVES 9
Extrusion - Casting types– Normal, Melt, Vibration, Squeeze casting, Pressing – Unidirectional, Double Action,
Incremental, Hydrostatic, Iso-static pressing – Stability of explosives – Vacuum stability test – Heat test –
Impact sensitivity test.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. “High Energy Materials – Propellants, Explosives and Pyrotechnics” Jai Prakash Agarwal, WILEY-
VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA, Weinheim, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. "High Energy Oxidisers for Advanced Solid Propellants and Explosives - Advances in Solid Propellant
Technology”, First International HEMSI Workshop, Ranchi, India, 2002, 87-106.
2. “The Chemistry of Powder and Explosives”, Davis, Tenney L. – Open source downloadable.
15MEA14 DIRECT DIGITAL MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Direct Digital Manufacturing technology and the associated Aerospace, Architecture, Art, Medical and
industrial applications.
 Different types of Image capturing and Image processing techniques and its applications in various
fields.
 Study of production of x-rays and its application to different medical Imaging techniques and different
types of Radio diagnostic techniques.
 Study of digitization and special imaging techniques used for visualizing the cross sections of the body.
 Understanding of various geometric modeling and meshing techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Learn about the principle of Direct Digital Manufacturing (DDM) techniques, and along with their
potential applications to customized manufacturing.
 Understand the basic concepts of reverse engineering and various image processing techniques.
 Effectively employ the free form fabrication technique in launching a new product in market within a
short span of time.
203
 Trained to find innovative solutions to fabricate highly intricate complex shapes by suitable digital
manufacturing technique.
 Get exposure to various diagnostic applications of the medical imaging integrated with 3D Printing and
SDM technique.
 Digitization Techniques.
 Geometric modeling techniques.
 Processing CAD Data (Selection of Orientation, Supports generation, Slicing, Toolpath generation).
 Data Exchange Formats.
 Reverse Engineering Techniques.
 Medical Image sources, Medical Image Representation.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND CAD MODELING 11
Introduction of DDM - Need - Development of DDM systems – DDM process chain - Impact of DDM on Product
Development in various fields –Digital & Virtual prototyping -Benefits- Applications. Digitization techniques –
geometric modeling techniques: Wire frame, surface and solid modeling – Part orientation and support
generation, direct and adaptive slicing, Tool path generation.
UNIT II REVERSE ENGINEERING AND MEDICAL IMAGING SYSTEM 9

Basics of Medical Image Sources: Radiology - Computed Tomography- Magnetic Resonance Tomography –
Medical Image Representation: Pixels and voxels - Image file formats- DICOM- Other formats- Medical image
analysis: Image segmentation - Image representation and analysis - Feature extraction and representation.
UNIT III POWDER BASED DDM SYSTEMS 9

Selective Laser Sintering(SLS): Principle, process, Indirect and direct SLS- Powder structures, modeling of SLS,
materials, post processing, post curing, surface deviation and accuracy, Applications. Laser Engineered Net
Shaping (LENS): Processes, materials, products, advantages, limitations and applications– Case Studies.
UNIT IV LIQUID BASED AND SOLID BASED DDM SYSTEMS 9

Stereo Lithography (SLA): Apparatus: Principle, per-build process, part-building, post-build processes, photo
polymerization of SL resins, part quality and process planning, recoating issues, materials, advantages,
limitations and applications. Solid Ground Curing (SGC): working principle, process, strengths, weaknesses and
applications. Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM): Principle, details of processes, process variables, types,
products, materials and applications. Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM): Working Principles, details of
processes, products, materials, advantages, limitations and applications - Case studies.
UNIT V 3D PRINTING AND SHAPE DEPOSITION MANUFACTURING 7

TECHNIQUES
Three dimensional Printing (3DP): Principle, basic process, Physics of 3DP, types of printing, process
capabilities, material system. Solid based, Liquid based and powder based 3DP systems, strength and
weakness, Applications and case studies. Shape Deposition Manufacturing (SDM): Introduction, basic process,
shape decomposition, Mould SDM and applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications”, World Scientific
Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2010.
2. Andreas Gebhardt, “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, 1st Edition, 2003.
3. Steve Webb, “The Physics of Medical Imaging”, Medical Science Series, Institute of Physics Publishing,
Bristol, 1992.
204
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. LiouW.Liou, Frank W.Liou,”Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for prototype
development”, CRC Press, 2007.
2. Ali K. Kamrani, EmadAbouel Nasr, “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 2006.
3. Peter D.Hilton Hilton/Jacobs, Paul F.Jacobs, “Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications”,
CRC press, 2000.
4. Wolfgang Birkfellner, “Applied Medical Image Processing – A Basic course‟, CRC Press, 2nd Edition,
2014.
5. R.C.Gonzalez and R.E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing‟, Pearson-Prentice-Hall, 2nd Edition, 2009.
15MEA15 INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS OF MATERIALS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know about the basic principles of spectroscopy.

 To understand about the molecular spectroscopy.
 To acquire knowledge about NMR and mass spectroscopy.
 To inculcate about the separation techniques.
 To measure and evaluate about the surface properties.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Obtaining fundamental knowledge about optical spectroscopy.
 Gaining knowledge about molecular and atomic spectroscopy.
 Gathering enough knowledge in the field of nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy.
 Studying about the separation of various constituents present in a mixture by chromatographic

techniques.
 Acquiring knowledge about electrochemical analysis.
 Material science, physics and chemistry.

 Basic information on scattering processes involving X-rays,visible light, electrons.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION OF SPECTROMETRY 9

Properties of electromagnetic radiation- wave properties – components of optical instruments – Sources of
radiation – wavelength selectors – sample containers – radiation transducers – Signal process and read outs –
signal to noise ratio - sources of noise – Enhancement of signal to noise - types of optical instruments – Principle
of Fourier Transform optical Measurements.
UNIT II MOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY 9
Molecular absorption spectrometry – Measurement of Transmittance and Absorbance – Beer’s law –

Instrumentation - Applications -Theory of fluorescence and Phosphorescence Instrumentation – Applications –
Theory of Infrared absorption spectrometry – IR instrumentation - Applications – Theory of Raman spectroscopy
– Instrumentation – applications.
205
UNIT III MAGNETIC RESONANCE SPECTROSCOPY AND 9
MASSSPECTROMETRY
Theory of NMR – environmental effects on NMR spectra –chemical shift-NMR spectrometers – applications of 1H
NMR- Molecular mass spectra – ion sources – Mass spectrometer. Applications of molecular mass – Electron
paramagnetic resonance- g values – instrumentation.
UNIT IV SEPARATION METHODS 9
General description of chromatography – Band broadening and optimization of column performance- Liquid
chromatography – Partition chromatography - Adsorption chromatography – Ion exchange chromatography -
principles of GC and applications – HPLC- Capillary electrophoresis – Applications.
UNIT V ELECTRO ANALYSIS AND SURFACE MICROSCOPY 9
Electrochemical cells- Electrode potential - EMF – potentiometry-reference electrode – ion selective and
molecular selective electrodes– Voltammetry – Cyclic and pulse voltammetry- Applications of voltammetry -
Study of surfaces – Scanning probe microscopes – AFM and STM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. D.A. Skoog, F. James Holler, Stanky, R.Crouch, “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”, Cengage Learning,
2007.
2. G. Aruldhas, “Molecular Structure and Spectroscopy”. PHI Learning Pvt Ltd, 2007.
3. Elsa Lundanes, Leon Reubsaet, TygeGreibrokk. “Chromatography: Basic Principles, Sample

Preparations and Related Methods”, John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
4. Fritz Scholz, “Electroanalytical Methods: Guide to Experiments and Applications”, Springer Science &
Business Media, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. James Keeler, “Understanding NMR spectroscopy”, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
2. Jack Cazes, “Encyclopedia of Chromatography”, Volume 2, CRC Press, 2005.
3. Challa S.S.R. Kumar,“Surface Science Tools for Nanomaterials Characterization”, Springer, 2015.
15MEA16 BASICS OF AIRCRAFT AND SPACE TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide in depth knowledge in the evolution of aircrafts.

 To give understanding of concept of aerospace engineering.
 To get exposed to the various aircraft materials and aircraft structures.
 To develop knowledge in satellites and satellite launching vehicles.
 To analyse the current trends in the field of Manned Mission.
206
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 This course would make familiar of basic concepts of aviation.

 Course would be helpful to understand the basic principle behind the aircraft structures.
 Students would be trained in the current engineering materials and structures of an aircraft.
 One would be able to make use of knowledge for the design of rocket, satellites, and space shuttles in
the field of inter-discipline.
 This Course would equip the students to effectively enhance the concepts of aircrafts and spacecrafts
 Basics of Earth science, solar science.

 Keen interest in Aerospace.
 Basics of Material science.
 Polymers, Ceramics.
 Fuels-Liquids, solids and gases.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AVIATION 9
Astronomy: overview of astronomy – know the sky – coordinate system – telescopes – flux, magnitudes – stars,
formation – solar system.
Atmospheric Science: Earth’s atmosphere, structure, classification, constituents– standard atmosphere-
Introduction to space environment-Historical perspective of aviation.
UNIT II AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 9
Aerodynamic forces – lift generation – aerofoils and wings – drag – anatomy of an aircraft – mechanism of thrust
production – propeller – jet engines and their operation – helicopters – aircraft performance – aircraft
instruments-fatigue failure in aircrafts – Airplane Disasters.
UNIT III AIRCRAFT MATERIALS & STRUCTURES 9
Light-weight materials- FRP: GFRP, CFRP- Applications of FRP in principal parts of aircrafts.
Radome-fuselage-wings-landing gears-black box-Research Issues: smart skins in aircraft-structural health
monitoring (SHM) of aircrafts.
UNIT IV ROCKETS & SATELLITES 9
Introduction to rockets – rocket propulsion engines – types of rockets- nozzles – propellants –rocket engines–
elements of liquid propulsion systems – solid rocket motors – rocket testing – launch preparation.
Types of satellites- present-day satellites- satellite structures- satellite operations-application of shape memory
alloy (SMA) in satellites.
UNIT V LAUNCH VEHICLES FOR MANNED MISSION 9
Overview of Re-entry vehicles and Manned missions-Shuttle components -Orbiter Vehicle (OV), a pair of
recoverable solid rocket boosters (SRBs)-expendable external tank (ET) –Space shuttle disasters: A case study.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
207
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Megson, T. H. G., “Aircraft Structures for Engineering Students”, 4th Edition, Butterworth-Hein-emann,
2007.
rd
2. Turner, M. J. L., “Rocket and Spacecraft Propulsion: Principles, Practice and New Developments”, 3
Edition, Springer, 2009.
3. Anderson, D. F. and Eberhardt, S., “Understanding Flight”, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Wiesel, W. E., “Spaceflight Dynamics”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1997.

2. Kaplan, M. H., “Modern Spacecraft Dynamics and Control”, John Wiley and Sons, London, 1976.
3. Thompson, W. T., “Introduction to Space Dynamics”, Dover Publications, New York, 1986.
4. Cornelisse, J. W., “Rocket Propulsion and Spaceflight Dynamics”, Pitman, London, 1979.
5. Anderson, J. D., “Introduction to Flight”, 7th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2011.
Szebehely, V. G. and Mark, H., “Adventures in Celestial Mechanics”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 1998.
15MEA17 INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB WITH ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Basic concept of Matlab.
 Matlab codes and programming.
 Exploit of the plotting.
 Writing program for solving linear system, curve fitting, numerical integration & one dimensional
equation, which are needed for engineering disciplines.
 Concept of Simulink, for solving engineering problem.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Extrapolate the basic of Matlab commands.
 Write codes for simple applications.
 Programming for solving linear system, Gaussian elimination, finite difference method, finite element
method.
 Plot the graphs using code.
 Familiar with the concepts of Simulink for engineering applications.
 Basic programming concepts.
 Analytical skills.
 Matrix manipulations.
 Linear algebra.
 Plots.
 Basics of modelling and simulations.
208
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB 9
Basic of Matlab- Matlab window, Input-Output, File Types, Platform dependence – Matrices and Vectors: Input,
Indexing, Matrix Manipulation, creating vectors- Matrix and Array Operations: Arithmetic, Relational, Logical,
Elementary math function, Matric function, character string.
UNIT II PROGRAMMING IN MATLAB (SCRIPTS AND FUNCTIONS) 9

Script Files- Function Files: Executing a function, More on functions Language, Sub-functions, Compiled
function (P code) – Language Specific Features: variables, Loops, branches, control-flow, Interactive input,
Recursion, Input/output - Advanced Data Objects: Multidimensional matrices, Structures, Cells– programming
for simple problem like conversion of temperature.
UNIT III GRAPHICS-PLOTTING 9

Basic2-D Plots: Style options, Labels, title, legend, and other text objects, Axis control, zoom-in, and zoom-out,
Modifying plots with Plot Editor, Overlay plots-3-D Plots: View, Rotate view, Mesh and surface plots, Vector field
and volumetric plots, Interpolated surface plots - Saving and Printing Graphs.
UNIT IV APPLICATIONS 9
Computer implementation - development of codes- Linear Algebra: Solving a linear system, Gaussian
elimination, Finding eigenvalues & eigenvectors - Curve Fitting and Interpolation: Polynomial curve fitting, Least
squares curve fitting - Interpolation - Numerical Integration (Quadrature): Double integration - Ordinary
Differential Equations (ODE): first-order linear ODE, second-order nonlinear ODE.
UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO SIMULINK AND ITS APPLICATIONS 9

Simulink and its Relation to MATLAB- library: sink, source, maths operation, logic & bit operations, discrete -
Modeling the Solution of Three Equations with Three Unknowns - Modeling a Fourth−Order Differential Equation
- Modeling an Electric Circuit - Applications: Moving Ladder, Conical Water Reservoir, Heat Flow, Cantilever
Beam Deflection, Feedback Control Systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rudra Pratap "Getting Started with MATLAB", Oxford University Press, 2002.
®
2. Steven T.Karris, "Introduction to Simulink with Engineering Applications", Orchard Publications, 2nd
Edition, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Moore Holly, "Matlab for Engineers" Prentice Hall, 2009.
2. William J. Palm, "Introduction to MATLAB for Engineers”, 3rd Edition, 2010.
3. Amos Gilat, "MATLAB: An Introduction with Applications", 3rd edition, 2008.
4. Ferreira Ajm, "Matlab Codes for Finite Element Analysis - Solids and Structures", Springer, 2014.
15MEA18 MICRO AND NANO FABRICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Able to define the concepts involved in IC chip manufacturing.

 Gain knowledge on various Nano deposition technologies.
 To learn the etching technologies used in semiconductor industry.
 Emphasize on the importance of doping and surface modification.
 To define the concept of self-assembled monolayers for Nano device fabrication.
209
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Gain knowledge on the wafer preparation techniques in IC industry.

 Able to fabricate thin films for the fabrication of micro and nanodevices.
 Able to apply the etching techniques in any prepared substrates for nanofabrication.
 Learn the wafer technology applications and surface modification techniques.
 Can design the self-assembled monolayers for nanofabrication.
 Knowledge in electronics, physics, chemistry, materials science with mathematical background.

UNIT I CRYSTAL GROWTH, WAFER PREPARATION AND EPITAXY 9
Basic steps in IC fabrication - Electronic grade silicon – crystal plane and orientation – Defects in the lattice –
Czochralski crystal growing – Silicon shaping – Processing consideration – Vapour phase epitaxy – Liquid phase
epitaxy - selective epitaxy - Molecular beam epitaxy - Epitaxial Evaluation.
UNIT II DEPOSITION TECHNOLOGIES 9
Deposition processes- Thermal, Plasma and Arc physical vapour deposition, Chemical vapour deposition
process- Atomic layer deposition process-Liquid phase deposition by spin coating, Spray coating, Dip coating,
Sol-gel Technology, Electrochemical and Chemical reaction deposition.
UNIT III ETCHING TECHNOLOGIES 9
Etching Technology basics, Wet chemical etching – process, etching of single crystal silicon, etching of
insulators, semiconductors and conductors – Dry etching – physical etching, Chemical dry etching, Physical-
Chemical process, Chemical etching – powder blasting, gas cluster ion beam etching (GCIB) technology.
UNIT IV DOPING AND SURFACE MODIFICATION 9
Importance of doping and surface modification-Introduction into doping-Doping by diffusion-Doping by

implantation-Doping applications-MEMS applications, Wafer Technology applications- Thermal oxidation of
silicon- oxidation mechanisms, oxidation equipments and process.
UNIT V NANOFABRICATION BY SELF-ASSEMBLY 9

Self-Assembly process- Introduction to self-assembly, Chemical, Physical and Colloidal Self-Assembly, Static
and dynamic Self-assembly, Directed self-assembly-Basics, Mechanisms-Surface topography and surface
wetting, Role of defects in self-assembly. Self-assembled monolayers (SAMs).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Hans H. Gatzen, Volker Saile, JurgLeuthold, “Micro and Nano Fabrication: Tools and Processes”,
Springer, 2015.
2. Sami Franssila, “Introduction to Microfabrication”, Wiley Publications, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mark J. Jackson, “Microfabrication and Nano manufacturing”, Taylor andFrancis Group, 2006.
2. Bo Cui, “Recent advances in Nanofabrication Techniques and Applications”,InTech Publisher, 2011.
3. Milton Ohring, “Materials Science of Thin Films: Deposition and Structure”, Academic Press, 2002.
4. Rointan F. Bunshah, “Handbook of Deposition Technologies for Films andcoatings, science, Technology
and applications”, Noyes Publications, 1994.
210
15MEA19 FUNDAMENTALS OF NATURE INSPIRED ALGORITHMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The intention of this course is to
 Give an overview of the fundamentals of a special category of algorithms developed from the
inspiration of natural things.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the fundamentals of heuristic search algorithms.
 Apply the concept of the natural behavior of agents in the optimization.
 Understand different types of search algorithms.
 Apply the behavior of ant in solving large sized computational problems.
 Understand the basics of population base algorithms.
 Calculus, Functions.
 Linear and Non-linear Function.
 Discrete and Continuous variables.
 Maximum and minimum values of continuous function.
 Discrete function.
UNIT I HEURISTIC SEARCH ALGORITHMS 9
Introduction to Heuristic Algorithm – Robustness of traditional optimization and search methods – Goal of
optimization – Combinatorial optimization – Problem complexity – Classification of Search algorithms – Nature
inspired algorithms – Single point search algorithms – Population based algorithms.
UNIT II SINGLE POINT SEARCH ALGORITHMS 9

Memory less single point search – Local search – Neighborhood search – Variable neighborhood search –
Iterated local search Simulated Annealing – Memory based search algorithms –Tabu search – Hybrid
algorithms.
UNIT III EVOLUTIONARY ALGORITHMS 9

Search algorithm – Genetic algorithm – Coding methods –Phenotype and phenotype representation of
solution and mathematical foundation of Genetic Algorithm. Mapping of objective function – Fitness function –
Computer implementation of Genetic Algorithm– Data structure – Roulette Wheel selection – Genetic
operators – Cross over operators – various types – Mutation operators.
UNIT IV ANT COLONY OPTIMIZATION 9

Advanced Population based search algorithms – Introduction to Ant Colony Optimization – Ant System –
Pheromone trail – Desirability factor – Variants in ant colony optimization – Simple applications.
UNIT V PARTICLE SWARM OPTIMIZATION 9

Swarm intelligence – Particles and swarm – Objective and fitness function – Velocity of particle – Cognition
component – Social component – gbest and pbest concept – Evolution of PSO – Simple applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. David Goldberg, "Genetic Algorithm in search, Optimization and Machine learning", Addison–
Weseley Publishers.
2. David Corne, et al. "New Ideas in Optimization" McGraw Hill Publishers. 1999.
211
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. James Kennedy, Russell C. Eberhart, with Yuhui Shi, “Swarm Intelligence”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2001.
2. AndriesEngelbrecht, “Computational Intelligence – an Introduction”, John Wiley and sons Ltd., 2007.
3. Eric Bonabeau, Marco Dorigo, and Guy Theraulaz, “Swarm Intelligence: FromNatural to Artificial
Systems”, Oxford University Press, 1999.
15MEA20 ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDINGS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Design, construction and operation of energy efficient buildings.
 Utilization of energy efficient technologies.
 Energy efficient building codes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to understand and apply
 The concepts and techniques of energy efficient buildings.
 The concepts and techniques of different energy efficient technologies and energy conservation
measures in different equipment's used in buildings.
 The concepts and techniques of indoor environmental quality.
 The energy transfer in different buildings.
 The policies, rules and regulation for energy efficient building thereby facilitating towards sustainable
development.
 Basic knowledge in Refrigeration and Air-conditioning.
 Sun, Earth movement.
 Climate change.
The sun-earth relationship and the energy balance on the earth's surface, climate, wind, solar radiation, and
solar temperature, sun shading and solar radiation on surfaces, energy impact on the shape and orientation of
buildings, thermal properties of building materials. Technology Roadmap on Energy-efficient Buildings.
UNIT II ENERGY EFFICIENT TECHNOLOGIES 9

Passive cooling and day lighting, active solar and photovoltaic, building energy analysis methods, building
energy efficiency standards, different lighting technologies. Refrigeration and air conditioning systems, energy
conservation in pumps, fans and blowers, refrigerating machines, heat rejection equipment, energy efficient
motors, and insulation. Energy Efficiency Trends in Residential and Commercial Buildings, Energy Efficiency
in traditional buildings.
UNIT III INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY 9

Psychrometry, comfort conditions, thermal comfort, ventilation and air quality, air conditioning requirement,
visual perception, auditory requirement, illumination requirement, choice of lighting, lighting standards, control
of lighting, lighting economics and aesthetics, energy saving, impacts of lighting efficiency, electronic ballast.
Ventilation – Requirements – Minimum standards for ventilation – Ventilation Design – Energy conservation in
ventilating systems.
212
UNIT IV ENERGY TRANSFER IN BUILDINGS 9
Concepts of energy efficient buildings and energy efficient HVAC systems. Calculation of heating and cooling
loads of the building. Heating and Cooling Equipment. Building’s energy balance accounting for solar energy
gain – Heat losses - Internal heat sources. Study of climate and its influence in building design for energy
requirement. Low energy and zero energy buildings.
UNIT V GREEN BUILDINGS 9

Ecological sustainable design, working group sustainable construction methods & techniques. Barriers to
green buildings, green building rating tools, material selection, embodied energy, operating energy, façade
systems, transportation, water treatment systems, water efficiency, building economics, LEED and IGBC
codes. Energy efficiency requirements in building codes, energy efficiency policies for new buildings.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. John Littler and Randall Thomas, “Design with Energy: The Conservation and Use of Energy in
Buildings”, Cambridge University Press, 1984.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Edward G Pita, “An Energy Approach- Air-conditioning Principles and Systems”, Pearson Education,
2003.
2. Colin Porteous, “The New Eco-Architecture”, Spon Press, 2002.
3. Lever More G J, “Building Energy Management Systems”, E and F.N Spon, London, 2000.
4. Means R.S., “Green building: project planning and cost estimating”, Kingston, 2006.
5. Kibert C.J. “Sustainable Construction: Green Building Design”, Wiley, 2nd Edition, 2007.
6. Eicker U., “Low Energy Cooling for Sustainable Buildings”, Wiley, 2009.
7. Attmann O., “Green Architecture”, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.bee-india.nic.in
2. http://www.iea.org
3. http://www.unep.org
15MEA21 WATER TREATMENT TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the quality of water parameters.

 To know about the purification of water by filtration process.
 To impart the knowledge about usage of membranes in water purification system.
 To know about biological membrane system used in water purification.
 To study about the fouling and other problems associated with membranes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understanding the quality of water parameters will be achieved.

 Acquiring knowledge about different kinds of filtration techniques.
 Gathering idea about usage of membranes in water purification system.
 Understanding the effect of biological membrane system used in water purification.
 Studying about the fouling and other problems associated with membranes.
213
 Knowledge in physics, chemistry, materials science, environmental engineering, and safety engineering.
UNIT I WATER QUALITY CHARACTERISTICS 9
Physical, Chemical and Biological Characteristics of Water. Standard methods of determination of important
physical and chemical parameters of water qualities- PH, turbidity, electrical conductivity, total Solids, alkalinity,
hardness, Dissolved oxygen, BOD and COD - Units of measurements and expression of results- Estimation of
hardness (EDTA method only)- Bacteriological Indicators.
UNIT II WATER PURIFICATION BY FILTRATION 9
Solid Liquid separation systems-Filtration systems- Theory of Membrane separation – mass Transport
Characteristics Cross Flow filtration-Membrane Filtration- Types and choice of membranes, porous, non-porous,
symmetric and asymmetric – Plate and Frame, spiral wound and hollow fibre membranes – Liquid Membranes.
UNIT III MEMBRANE PROCESSES AND SYSTEMS 9
Microfiltration – Ultrafiltration- Nano Filtration – Reverse Osmosis – Electro dialysis- Evaporation -Membrane
manufactures – Membrane Module/Element designs – Membrane System components – Design of Membrane
systems - pump types and Pump selection – Plant operations – Economics of Membrane systems
UNIT IV MEMBRANE BIOREACTORS 9
Introduction and Historical Perspective of MBRs, Bio-treatment Fundamentals, Biomass Separation MBR
Principles, Fouling and Fouling Control, MBR Design Principles, Design Assignment, Alternative MBR
Configurations, Commercial Technologies, Case Studies.
UNIT V MEMBRANE FOULING 9
Membrane Fouling – Pretreatment methods and strategies – monitoring of Pretreatment – Langlier Index, Silt
Density Index, Chemical cleaning, Biofoulant control – Types of foulants and scalants – Natural organic matter
fouling - Impact of membrane material on fouling - Reversible and irreversible fouling- Prevention of fouling and
Fouling control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Klaus-Viktor Peinemann, Suzana Pereira Nunes, " Membranes for Water Treatment”, Volume 4, Wiley
publishers, 2010.
2. Peter Hillis “Membrane Technology in Water and Wastewater Treatment”, RSC (Special Publications)
1st Edition, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Angelo Basile, Alfredo Cassano, NavinRastogi, “Advances in membrane technologies for water
treatment: Materials, process and applications”, Woodhead Publishing, 2015.
2. Water Environment Federation (WEF), “Membrane Systems for Wastewater Treatment”, McGraw-Hill,
USA, 2005.
3. Symon Judd, “The MBR Book – Principles and application of Membrane Bioreactors in water and
wastewater treatment”,Elsevier, 2006.
4. Jorgen Wagner,” Membrane Filtration handbook, Practical Tips and Hints”, Osmonics Inc.,2nd Edition,
Revision2, 2001.
214
5. Mulder M, “Basic Principle of Membrane Technology”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1996.
6. Noble, R.D. and Stern, S.A., “Membrane Separations Technology: Principles and Applications”,
Elsevier, 1995.
Offered by IT Department
L T P C
15ITA01 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER GRAPHICS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the output primitives like line, circle and ellipse using algorithms.
 To study the 2-D and 3-D viewing and transformations.
 To understand various, color models modeling and animation techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply the line, circle and ellipse drawing algorithms
 Apply the two dimensional geometric transformations and clipping
 Apply the three dimensional geometric transformations
 Work with color and illumination models
 Apply different methods for Modeling
 C Programming
Introduction-Applications-Graphics systems-Output Primitives-representing Image-Straight Line-Line drawing

Algorithms-DDA Algorithm-Bresenhams’ Line Algorithm-Circle Generating Algorithm- Bresenhams’ Circle Algorithm-
Midpoint Circle Algorithm-Ellipse Generating Algorithm-Midpoint Ellipse Algorithm.
UNIT II TWO DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATIONS 9
Introduction-Representation of points-Matrix Algebra and Transformation-Transformation of points- Straightlines-

Midpoint Transformation-Transformation of parallel lines-Intersecting lines- Rotation - Reflection and scaling of
straight lines-Combined Transformations-Translation and Homogeneous Coordinates-Rotation about Arbitrary point-
Reflection about Arbitrary line-Windowing and clipping
UNIT III THREE DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATION 9
Introduction-3D Transformation-Rotation about an axis parallel to coordinate Axis-Reflection about an arbitrary axis in
space-Reflection through an arbitrary plane-3D Modeling schemes-Projection-Orthographic-Isometric-oblique-
perspective-3D clipping
UNIT IV COLOR AND ILLUMINATION MODELS 9
Introduction –colors-Illumination model and light sources-specular Reflection-Intensity Attenuation-Shadow-

Reflectivity and refractivity- Radiosity Model-Texturing-Surface-Bump mapping-Environment Mapping-Shading
Methods
UNIT V MODELLING CONCEPTS AND TECHNIQUES 9
Introduction - structures and Hierarchical Modeling-Advanced Modeling Techniques-Procedural Models-Fractals-

Grammar based Models-Physical based Modeling-Animation-Devices-Computer assisted-video formats-Frame by
Frame animation-Real Time Animation Techniques
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Amarendra N Sinha, Arun D Udai, ”Computer Graphics”,Tata Mc-Graw Hill ,2008
215
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Foley, van Dam, Feiner and Hughes ,”Computer Graphics Principles and Practice”, Addison Wesley,2004
2. D Hearn and P M Baker ,”Computer Graphics”, Prentice Hall of India Second Edition,2008
3. F .S. Hill, “Computer Graphics using OPENGL”, Second edition, Pearson Education 2003
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-837-computer-graphics-fall-
2003/
2. http://www.moshplant.com/direct-or/bezier/
3. http://www.cs.mtu.edu/~shene/COURSES/cs3621/NOTES/spline/B-spline/bspline-curve-prop.html
4. http://nptel.ac.in/
L T P C
15ITA02 RICH INTERNET APPLICATION
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To create websites combining HTML/CSS

 To develop an understanding in the basics of html like forms, lists, frames etc
 To develop a design with CSS
 To increase the quality of website design by formatting with styles
 To evaluate a web page design and consider the issues
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Design a website in HTML

 Apply concepts of element header in HTML
 Design a webpage using frames, forms, images etc..
 Create styles for the HTML document
 Apply presentation techniques for webpage with CSS
NIL
UNIT I INTRODUCTION : MARKUP WITH HTML 9
HTML & XHTML – markup instructions & Language – Rules of XHTML - HTML Values and Units – Tag
Attributes- Text and Comments – Uniform Resource Indicators - Document Structure – Head & Body – Styles
Definition – Block Elements – Inline Elements – Organisational Elements – Link – Images - Comments
UNIT II ELEMENT HEADER 9
Head – Document Title – Script & Style sections – Document background color and image – Text Structuring –
Character Formatting – Lists – Ordered – Unordered – Definition Lists – Links to a web page – Tables – Borders
and Rules – Rows and Cells – Formatting with Tables
UNIT III FRAMES, FORMS AND MULTIMEDIA 9
Framesets – frame – links to frames – nested framesets – Forms – GET and POST – Form attributes – Textbox –
checkbox – radiobutton – listbox – Buttons – Hidden fields – Images - Insert a Image – sizing – image maps –
multimedia – animated images & videos – embedding media
UNIT IV PRESENTATION WITH CSS 9
Styles and HTML – defining styles – cascading styles – style definitions – understanding selectors –
understanding style inheritance – pseudo-class – pseudo-elements – CSS value and units – inheritance and
cascade
216
UNIT V FORMATTING WITH CSS 9
CSS Inheritance and cascade – Font properties – Text Formatting – CSS lists – Padding, margin and borders –
CSS layouts – CSS positioning – Pseudo-elements and generated content – Dynamic HTML with CSS
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Steven M.Schafer, “ HTML, XHTML and CSS”, Wiley Publishing, Inc., Fifth edition 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Chuck Musciano Bill Kennedy, “HTML & XHTML: The Definitive Guide”, O’Reilly, 6th Edition, October
24, 2006
2. Thomas A. Powell, “Web Design: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, June 2000
3. Jeffrey C.Jackson, "Web Technologies--A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2006
4. Thomas Powell,”HTML & CSS: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, Mar 2010
5. Jon Duckett ,”Beginning Web Programming with HTML, XHTML, and CSS”, Wrox Publications, 2008
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.codecademy.com
2. http://www.w3schools.com/html/
3. http://www.w3schools.com/css/
4. https://www.khanacademy.org/computing/computer-programming/html-css
5. http://tutorialehtml.com/en/
6. http://www.alternetwebdesign.com/htmltutorial/lesson1.htm
7. http://www.htmlhelp.com/reference/css/
L T P C
15ITA03 INTRODUCTION TO JAVA
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution, methods,
etc.
 Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in Java, including defining classes, invoking
methods, using class libraries, etc
 Have the ability to write a computer program to solve specified problems
 Be able to use the Java SDK environment to create, debug and run simple Java programs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Write basic programs using fundamental structures.

 Create basic programs using object oriented concepts.
 Create classes that can handle exception and various errors handling mechanism.
 Create Simple applications with GUI
 Develop applications using applet and graphics.
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
 Object Oriented Programming using C++
UNIT I JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 9
Overview of JDK framework – Identifiers – variables – Assignment statements and Expressions – Constants -
Numeric data types, operations and conversions – String Type – Scanner class – if switch statements – while – do
217
while – for loop – nested loop- Defining a method- Calling a method – Passing parameters by values – Overloading
methods.
UNIT II OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING CONCEPTS 9
Class Fundamentals-Using predefined classes--Constructors-Access control-Modifiers -Methods-Dealing with Static

Members and Methods-Method Overloading-Interfaces-Importing Packages-Understanding Class Path-Implementing
Packages-Java Doc Comments-Inheritance-Polymorphism.
UNIT III EXCEPTION / ERROR HANDLING 9
Garbage Collection-Finalize () Method-Exceptions & Errors-Types of Exception-Control Flow In Exceptions-Use of try

-catch-finally-throw-throws in Exception Handling -In-built and User Defined Exceptions-Checked and Un Checked
Exceptions
UNIT IV APPLICATION PROGRAMMING WITH GUI 9
Event-Driven Programming- Event and Event Sources – Listeners, Registration and handling events – Mouse events
– Key events -Introduction to Swings-Frame-Components-Text Input-Choice Components-Menus-Dialog Box-Layout
Management
UNIT V APPLETS AND GRAPHICS 9
Applet class – JApplet class – Enabling applets to run as application – Passing string to applets – Html file and applet
tag- Graphics class – paint component method – Drawing graphics on panels – Drawing strings , lines, Rectangles,
and Ovals, Polygons , Polylines, FontMetrics class.
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOK
th
1. Y.Daniel Liang “ Introduction to Java Programming” 7 Edition, Pearson Education,2013
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. P.J.Deitel & H.M.Deitel, “Java: How to Program Java 2”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition, 2011.
2. Herbert Schildt, “Java The Complete Reference“,Tata McgrawHill, Eight Edition, 2011.
3. E.BalaGurusamy, “Programming with java A Primer”, Tata McGraw, Hill Education, Fourth Edition, 2009
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://mark.random-article.com/weber/java/schedule.html
2. http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/index.html
3. http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/ -
4. http://horstmann.com/corejava
5. www.deitel.com
6. http://www.kodejava.org/
7. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/java
218
L T P C
15ITA04 PERL
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To teach how to do programs in Perl

 To study the basics of Perl syntax and constructs
 To introduce list, arrays and hashes implementation in Perl
 To read and write subroutines and data files
 To parse and manipulate text with Perl regular expressions
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Devise Perl programs using scalar data and control structures

 Develop simple programs in Perl using lists, arrays and hashing
 Implement Perl Input Output programming
 Apply and match regular expressions using Perl
 Validate data using regular expressions
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
 C Programming
UNIT I SCALAR DATA 9
Perl programming introduction– Simple Perl program – Scalar data: Numbers – Strings – Variables – Operators–
Output with print – Getting user input – - The undefined value – Defined functions control structure - if – elseif - while
– unless – until – for control – loop control – conditional operator – logical operator
UNIT II LIST, ARRAYS AND HASHES 9
Array elements – indices – List literals – Assignment – Interpolating arrays into strings – For each control structure –
Scalar and list context – Hash – Hash Element Access – Hash Assignment – Hash Functions – Use of Hash - %Env
Hash
UNIT III SUB ROUTINES AND IO 9
Sub routines definition– invoking sub routines – return variables – arguments – private variables – variable length
parameter list – lexical variables – non-scalar return values – persistent private variables – Standard input output –
formatted output – opening and using file handle
UNIT IV REGULAR EXPRESSION 9
Regular expression definition – using simple patterns – character classes – matching with regular expression –
anchors – match variables - precedence
UNIT V PROCESSING REGULAR EXPRESSION 9
Substitution – split operator – join operator - list context – powerful regular expression – Perl Modules – finding
modules – installing modules – using modules – strings and sorting
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Tom Christiansen, Randal L. Schwartz, Larry Wall, “Learning Perl”, O'Reilly Media, Sixth Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Tom Christiansen, brian d foy, Larry Wall, Jon Orwant “Learning Perl”, O'Reilly Media, Fourth Edition, 2012.
2. Harvey M. Deitel, Paul J. Deitel, Tem R. Nieto, D. C. McPhie, “Perl How to Program”, Prentice Hall, First
edition, 2001.
219
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/perl/
2. https://www.perl.org
3. http://www.cs.cf.ac.uk/Dave/PERL/
L T P C
15ITA05 FUZZY SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems

 To choose various fuzzy inference systems and approximate reasoning for decision making
 To understand the impact of fuzzy system for group decision making
 To understand how to evaluate the criteria in structured situations
 To learn to hybrid fuzzy with decision making methods
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Identify the decision making problems in fuzzy environments

 Identify the suitable FIS for decision making
 Implement fuzzy concepts for multi-person decision making
 Solve complex problems using multi-criteria decision making
 Integrate fuzzy with decision making methods for ranking
NIL
Introduction – The Logic of Decisions, Behavioral Decision Theory and Decision Technology – Optimization –
Outranking – Evaluation – Basics of Fuzzy Set Theory – Individual Decision Making in Fuzzy Environments
UNIT II DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS 9
Knowledge Based Vs Data based Systems – Linguistic Variables – Fuzzy logic – Approximate Reasoning – An
Interactive Decision Support System – Fuzzy and Semi Fuzzy Multi Objective Problems – Expert Systems and Fuzzy
Sets
UNIT III MULTI-PERSON DECISION MAKING IN FUZZY ENVIRONMENTS 9
Basic Models – Fuzzy Games – Fuzzy Team Theory – Fuzzy Group Decision Making – Fuzzy Mathematical
Programming - Fuzzy Linear and Non Linear Programming – Fuzzy Multi Stage Programming
UNIT IV MULTI CRITERIA DECISION MAKING IN STRUCTURED SITUATIONS 9
Fuzzy Multi Criteria Programming – Multi Attribute Decision Making – Fuzzy Outranking – Operators and
Membership functions in Decision Models
UNIT V DECISION MAKING WITH FUZZY INFORMATION 9
Fuzzy Synthetic Evaluation – Fuzzy Ordering – Non Transitive Ranking – Preference and Consensus – Multiobjective
Decision Making – Fuzzy Bayesian Decision Method – Decision Making under Fuzzy States and Fuzzy Actions
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hans J.Zimmermann, “Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems”, International Series in
Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987
220
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Timothy J.Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2012
2. S. N. Sivanandam & S. N. Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, Wiley - India, 2007.
3. S. Rajasekaran & G.A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithm: Synthesis and
Applications” Prentice Hall of India ,2003
WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.uic.edu/classes/idsc/ids422/lect2.ppt
2. www.clei.org/cleiej/papers/v13i3p4.pdf
3. www.math.ucdenver.edu/~wlodwick/m4-5779/lecture3fuzzylogic.ppt
L T P C
15ITA06 GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To explore the basic Primitives and attributes in OpenGL

 To study the geometric objects and transformations
 To Understand the various lighting and shading effects
 To gain a proficiency with OpenGL by applying Modeling techniques, curves and surfaces
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply basic Primitives and Attributes for 2D transformations

 Work with 3D transformations using OpenGL
 Implement Lighting and shading effects
 Apply various Modeling Techniques
 Apply various Curves and Surfaces for different objects
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
 C Programming
UNIT I GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING 9
Introduction-Sierpinski Gasket-Programming 2D Applications-OpenGL Application Programming Interface-Primitives

and Attributes-Color-Viewing-Control Functions-Gasket program-Polygons and Recursions-3D Gasket-Adding
Interaction-Menus
UNIT II GEOMETRIC OBJECTS AND TRANSFORMATIONS 9
Scalars points and Vectors-3D primitives-Coordinate systems and Frames-Frames in open GL-Modeling a colored
cube-Affine Transformations-Translation - Rotation and scaling-Transformation in homogeneous coordinates-
Transformation matrices in OpenGL-spinning of the cube-Interface to 3D applications- quaternion-classical and
computer viewing-parallel, Perspective Projections with OpenGL-Hidden surface Removal
UNIT III LIGHTING AND SHADING 9
Light and Matter-Light sources-The Phong Reflection Model-computation of vectors-Polygonal Shading-specifying

Light Parameters-Implementing a Lighting Model-Shading of the sphere Model-Per Fragment Lighting-Vertices to
fragments-Clipping-Line Segment Clipping-Polygon Clipping-Clipping in 3D-Rasterization-Bresenhams Algorithm-
Polygon Rasterization-Hidden Surface Removal
221
UNIT IV MODELING AND HIERARCHY 9
Symbols and Instances-Hierarchical Models-A Robot Arm-Trees and Traversal-Animation –Graphical objects-Scene
Graphs-Open Scene Graphs-Graphics and Internet-Procedural Methods-Algorithmic Models-Newtonion Particles-
Constraints-A Simple Particle System-Language Based Models-Recursive Methods and fractals-Procedural Noise
UNIT V CURVES AND SURFACES 9
Representation of curves and surfaces-Design Criteria-Parametric cubic Polynomial Curves-Interpolation-Hermite

curves and surfaces-Bezier curves and surfaces-Cubic B Splines-General B Splines-Rendering curves and surfaces-
Utah teapot-Advanced Rendering-Parallel-volume-Direct Volume-Image Based Rendering
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Edward Angel ,Dave Shreiner ,”Interactive Computer Graphics: A Top-Down Approach with Shader-Based
OpenGL” ,Sixth Edition,2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sumanta Guha Computer Graphics Through OpenGL: From Theory to Experiments, CRC Press, Second
Edition, 2014
2. Tom McReynolds, David Blythe ,”Advanced Graphics Programming Using OpenGL”Morgan
Kauffmann,2005
3. Clayton Walnum,” 3-D graphics programming with OpenGL,” Que, 1995
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://learnopengl.com/
2. http://www.videotutorialsrock.com/
3. http://www.cs.uccs.edu/~ssemwal/indexGLTutorial.html
4. http://www.opengl-tutorial.org/
5. http://courses.cs.vt.edu/~cs4204/lectures/opengl_basics.pdf
L T P C
15ITA07 PHP PROGRAMMING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce web development with PHP

 To work with various operations in PHP
 To model the design in a web environment
 To develop a webpage with database
 To test and work with a PHP application
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Create simple basic PHP programs

 Create programs using functions and strings
 Explore the usage of arrays and objects
 Implement graphics, security and web techniques in designing
 Implement database connectivity with PHP
222
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
NIL
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PHP 9
PHP – History and Evolution – Installation – Language Basics – Lexical Structure – Data types – Variables –
Expression & Operators – Flow Control statements – embedding PHP in web pages
UNIT II FUNCTIONS & STRINGS 9
Calling a function – Defining a function – Variable scope – function parameters – return values – variable functions –
Strings – Quoting string constants – Printing string – cleaning strings – encoding and escaping – comparing strings –
manipulating and searching strings -
UNIT III ARRAYS & OBJECTS 9
Indexed versus Associative Arrays – Identifying elements of an array – Storing data in arrays – Multidimensional
arrays –Extracting multiple values – Conversion between arrays and variables – Traversing arrays – Sorting –
Working with arrays – Objects – Creation – Accessing Properties and methods – Declaration of class – Introspection
UNIT IV WEB TECHNIQUES, GRAPHICS & SECURITY 9
HTTP basics – Server Information – Processing Forms –Setting Response Headers – Maintaining State – SSL –
Graphics – Embed an image – Create and draw images – Images with text – Dynamic buttons – Color handling –
Security – Cross site scripting – File uploads and Access
UNIT V DATABASE ACCESS & APPLICATION 9
PHP to access a database – Relational databases and SQL – MySQL object interface – Connectivity – Direct file
level manipulation – Application techniques – code libraries – handing output - error reporting and suppression –
performance tuning
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kevin Tatroe, Peter MacIntyre & Rasmus Lerdorf, “Programming PHP”, Creating Dynamic
Web Pages, O'Reilly Media, 3rd Edition, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Steven Holzner ,”PHP: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill Education,2008

2. Timothy Boronczyk , Martin E. Psinas,”PHP and MYSQL: Create - Modify – Reuse”, Wiley India Private
Limited ,2008
3. Matt Doyle,”Beginning PHP 5.3”, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2009
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://php.net/
2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/php/
3. http://www.toves.org/books/php/ch03-first/index.html
4. http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/php
5. http://www.w3schools.com/php/
223
L T P C
15ITA08 ANDROID APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To build your own android application for you mobile devices

 To understand how android application works.
 To utilize the power of background services, thread and notifications
 Secure, tune, package and deploy android applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Use Android SDK for simple applications

 Create Graphical user interfaces for Android application.
 Create Android application for data processing and management
 Create location based services using android
 Test the Android application
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
 Java Programming
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ANDROID 9
Introduction to Android Architecture: Introduction, History, Features and Android Architecture. Android Application
Environment, SDK, Tools: Application Environment and Tools, Android SDK. Programming paradigms and Application
Components Intents, Content providers, Broadcast receivers, Services
UNIT II USER INTERFACE DESIGN 9
User Interface Design Views &View Groups, Views : Button, Text Field, Radio Button, Toggle Button, Checkbox,
Spinner, Image View, Image switcher, Event Handling, Listeners, Layouts : Linear, Relative, List View, Grid View, Table
View, Web View, Adapters. Menus, Action Bars, Notifications : Status, Toasts and Dialogs, Styles and Themes,
Creating Custom Widgets, Focus, Touch Mode, Screen Orientation. Designing for Tablets – Working with tablets:
Developing for the Honeycomb and Ice Cream Sandwich platforms, Manipulating objects with drag and drop, Optimizing
applications for high screen resolution, combining fragments into a multilane UI. Resources, Assets, Localization:
Resources and Assets, Creating Resources, Managing application resources and assets, Resource-Switching in
Android. Localization, Localization Strategies, Testing Localized Applications, Publishing Localized Applications
UNIT III DATA STORAGE 9
Content Providers: Contents provider, Uri, CRUD access, Browser, CallLog, Contacts, Media Store, and Setting. Data
Access and Storage: Shared Preferences, Storage External, Network Connection. SQLite - SQLite Databases
UNIT IV NATIVE CAPABILITIES 9
Camera, Audio, Sensors and Bluetooth: Android Media API: Playing audio/video, Media recording. Sensors - how
sensors work, listening to sensor readings. Bluetooth. Maps & Location: Android Communications: GPS, Working with
Location Manager, Working with Google Maps extensions, Maps via intent and Map Activity, Location based Services.
Location Updates, location-based services (LBS), Location Providers, Selecting a Location Provider, Finding Your
Location, Map - Based Activities, Load maps, Map API key.
UNIT V TESTING 9
Testing: Testing and Commercializing Applications - Basics of Testing, Testing from an IDE (Eclipse), Activity testing,
Service testing, Content provider testing, Test Classes, Debugging using DDMS.
TOTAL: 45 Periods
224
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Reto Meier, “Professional Android 4 Development”, John Wiley and Sons, 2012
2. W. Frank Ableson, RobiSen, Chris King and C. Enrique Ortiz, “Android in Action”, Third Edition, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Wei-Meng Lee, “Android Application Development Cookbook”, John Wiley and Sons, 2013.
2. Grant Allen, “Beginning Android 4, Apress, 2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. W1. https://developer.android.com
2. W2. http://www.androidcentral.com/apps
3. W3. https://www.opensesame.com/c/android-app-development-beginners-training-course
L T P C
15ITA09 PYTHON PROGRAMMING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution, methods, etc.
 Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in python, including defining classes, invoking
methods, using class libraries, etc
 Have the ability to write a program to solve specified problems
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Develop basic programs using fundamental structures.

 Create programs using various collection data types.
 Apply appropriate Python control flow structure.
 Implement user defined python functions.
 Design classes and use them
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
NIL
Python object types – Numeric Type Basics – Numeric Literals –Built in Numeric Tools – Python Expression operators –
Numbers in action – Other numeric types – String Literals – Strings in action – String methods – String formatting
expressions – String formatting method calls – General type categories
UNIT II LISTS AND DICTIONARIES 9
Lists in action – Basic list operations – List Iteration and comprehensions – Indexing, Slicing and Matrixes – Changing
list in place – Dictionaries – Dictionaries in action – Basic dictionary operations – Changing Dictionaries In place –
Dictionary methods – A language table – Dictionary usage notes – Other ways to make dictionary – Tuples – Files –
Python Type Hierarchies
UNIT III STATEMENT AND SYNTAX 9
Introducing Python statements- A Tale of Two ifs – Assignment statements – Expression statements – Print operations –
if statements – Python syntax rules – while loops – for loops – Loop coding techniques – Iterators – List comprehension -
225
UNIT IV FUNCTIONS 9
Coding functions- Scope basics – scope rules – global statement – Scopes and nested functions – Nonlocal statement –
Argument Passing Basics – Special Argument Matching modes – function design concepts- Recursive functions –
function objects – Anonymous functions – mapping functions
UNIT V CLASSES AND OOP 9
Class coding basics – Class Statement – Methods – Inheritance – Attribute tree construction – specializing Inherited
methods – Class Interface Techniques – Abstract super classes -Namespaces –simple names – Attribute names –
Namespace dictionaries – Operator overloading – Designing with classes
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mark Lutz , “Learning Python” , Fifth Edition, O,Reilly, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jason Cannon, “Python Programming for Beginners” O,Reilly, 2010

2. David Beazley , Brain K Jones “Python CookBook” Third edition,2013
3. CHUN, WESLEY J ”Core Python Programming”, Pearson Education 2012
4. GUTTAG, JOHN V ”Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python”, PHI Learning Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2014
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/python/
2. http://www.learnpython.org/
3. http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/python
4. http://www.pyschools.com/
5. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cpPG0bKHYKc&noredirect=1
6. http://www.python-course.eu/python3_course.php
15ITA10 DECISION MAKING METHODS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the logic of MCDM Methods

 To learn how to do pairwise comparison
 To learn to do normalization of attributes
 To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems
 To understand various MCDM methods to choose the best alternative
226
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Explore various MCDM methods for decision making

 Apply quantification methods for decision making problems
 Evaluate using relative weights for the attributes in order of relative importance
 Apply fuzzy with MCDM methods for decision making
 Evaluate the results of fuzzy with MCDM to choose the best alternative
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
NIL
Multi- Criteria Decision Making – A General Overview – Classification of MCDM Methods – WSM – WPM – AHP –
Revised AHP – TOPSIS
UNIT II QUANTIFICATION 9
Qualitative data for MCDM problems – Scales for Quantifying Pair wise Comparisons – Evaluating different scales –
Simulation – Analysis of the Computational Results
UNIT III EVALUATION OF WEIGHTS 9
Deriving Relative Weights – Sensitivity Analysis – Evaluation of methods – Process a decision matrix – Ranking
abnormalities
UNIT IV FUZZY MULTI- CRITERIA DECISION MAKING 9
Fuzzy Operations – Ranking of Fuzzy Numbers - Fuzzy WSM method – Fuzzy WPM method – Fuzzy AHP method –
Fuzzy Revised AHP method – Fuzzy TOPSIS method
UNIT V FUZZY EVALUATION CRITERIA 9
Testing the methods – First Evaluative Criterion – Second Evaluative Criterion - Computational Experiments - Analysis
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Evangelos Triantaphyllou, “Multi-criteria Decision Making Methods: A Comparative Study”, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, Springer 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Witold Pedrycz, Petr Ekel, Roberta Parreiras, “Fuzzy Multicriteria Decision-Making: Models, Methods and
Applications” , Wiley 2010
2. Hans J.Zimmermann, “Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems”, International Series in
Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987
3. Timothy J.Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2012
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.ccse.kfupm.edu.sa/.../Multi-Criteria%20Decision%20Making.ppt
2. www.ccse.kfupm.edu.sa/~duffuaa/download/Courses/.../TOPSIS.ppt
3. https://www.uic.edu/classes/idsc/ids422/ahp.ppt
227
Offered by Bio-Tech Department
15BTA01 BASIC CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understand the basics of cellular structure and function.

 Gain knowledge about the genetic basis of life.
 Understand the regulation of gene expression at transcript and protein level.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course students will be able to
 Know the basic structure and function of cell and its organelles and its significance for proper functioning
of the cell.
 Be aware of the nature of the genetic materials, mechanism of replication and expression.
 Be able to appreciate and analyse the basic differences between the cellular organization and
regulation of genes between eukaryotes and prokaryotes.
Basic understanding of Biological Sciences.
UNIT I CELL STRUCTURE 9
Structural Organization: Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cell - Cell wall: Primary and Secondary structure model and
function - Plasma membrane: Channels, pumps and receptors - Plasmodesmata - Cell organelles: structure and
functions - Ultra structure and semi autonomous nature of chloroplast and mitochondria.
UNIT II CELLULAR ORGANELLES 9
Structure and function of Organelles: Nucleus, ER, golgi complex, ribosome, lysosome, chromosome-
Lampbrush, polytene - Microscopy – light microscope, compound microscope, electron microscope, dark field
microscope, phase contrast microscope - Cell cycle and cell division.
UNIT III GENETIC MATERIAL 9
Identification of DNA as genetic material – Watson and Crick model of DNA - Structure of DNA and RNA - DNA
replication: Semi conservative Nature of replication - DNA polymerases in prokaryotes- the processes of DNA
replication- Replication in eukaryotes - Mitochondrial DNA replication.
UNIT IV GENE EXPRESSION 9
Transcription – RNA polymerase, sigma factors - Difference between prokaryotic and eukaryotic transcription -
Regulation of gene expression - Operon concept.
UNIT V THE GENETIC CODE AND PROTEIN SYNTHESIS 9
Genetic code - Codons - Anticodons - Wobble hypothesis - Protein synthesis- the stages of protein synthesis -
the process of translation in prokaryotes, factors involved in translation - the triplet nature of genetic code - an
overview of comparisons with eukaryotic translation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
228
TEXTBOOKS:
1. De Robertis, E.D.P. and Robertis, E.M.C., “Cell and Molecular Biology”. Lippincott William & Wilkins, NY, 8th
Edition, 2010.
2. Freifelder, D. “Molecular Biology”. Narosa Publishing House, 2nd Edition, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Benjamin L., “Gene VII” Oxford University Press: 2000.
2. Watson J. D., Hopkins N. H., Roberts J. W., Steitz J. A., Weiner A. M., “Molecular biology of the Gene”, The
Benjamin/Cumming Publishing Company Inc., 4th Edition 1992.
3. Snyder L & Wendy W., “Molecular Genetics of Bacteria”, ASM press, Washington DC, 2nd Edition, 2003.
15BTA02 BASIC MICROBIOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 History of microbiology and techniques used in microbiology.
 Characteristic features of prokaryotes, eukaryotes and viruses.
 Impact of microbes on environment, health and disease.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the diversity of microbes.
 Have knowledge of culturing and controlling the microbes.
 Become familiarized with the significance of microbes in daily life.
Basic understanding of Biological sciences
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROBIOLOGY 9
History & Development of microbiology - Microscopy: Simple, Compound Microscopy - Staining: Principle and
technique of simple & differential staining, (Gram, Acid-fast & Endospore staining).
UNIT II STRUCTURE OF MICROORGANISMS 9
Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes - Virus; Bacteria: Bacterial morphology & subcellular structures (General
morphology of bacteria, shapes & sizes) - Slime layer & capsule, Cell wall structure of gram positive and gram
negative cells - General account of Ribosome, Flagella & Fimbriae - Chromatin materials, plasmids and
episomes - Endospore: Detailed study of endospore structure & its formation - Basis of resistance.
UNIT III BACTERIAL GROWTH AND NUTRITION 9
Cultivation of microbes: Growth rate and generation time - Nutritional types of microbes - Culturing bacteria
Media, Sterilization – Physical and chemical sterilizing agents – Principle, Mode of action and application -
culturing techniques.
229
UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL MICROBIOLOGY 9
Role of microorganisms in biogeochemical cycles (N, P and C cycles) – Biodegradation of xenobiotics

(pesticides) – Microbes in waste treatment: solid and liquid wastes – sewage treatment (Primary, secondary &
tertiary treatments) – COD & BOD – pollution indicating microbes – Biofertilizers.
UNIT V MICROBES IN HEALTH AND DISEASE 9
Human Normal Microflora: Skin, stomach, Small Intestine, Large Intestine, Genitourinary tract - Relationship
between normal microbiota and the host - Principles of Infectious Diseases: Epidemiology, Infectious Disease
cycle - Pathogen transmission - control of epidemics – Case study, disease caused by viruses, bacteria, fungi
and protists, food borne and water borne diseases - an overview.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Pelczar M.J., Chan E.C.S., Krein N.R., “Microbiology”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 5th Edition, 2008.
2. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein D.A., “Microbiology”, Wm. C. Brown Publishers, 9th Edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Black, J.G., Black, L.J. “Microbiology-Principles and Explorations”, Wiley 9th Edition, 2014.
th
2. Murray R., “Manual of Clinical Microbiology: Illustrations”, American Society for Microbiology, 9 Edition,
2007.
15BTA03 BASIC BIOCHEMISTRY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart basic knowledge of chemistry of biomolecules.
 To understand the structure, function and metabolism of carbohydrates, proteins and lipids.
 To learn the biochemistry of the genetic material.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the chemical nature of biologically significant molecules.
 Correlate the function and significance of the biomolecules with their chemical structure.
 Appreciate the chemical nature of biological processes.
Basic understanding of Biological sciences.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIOMOLECULES 9
Water and Life – pH and Buffers - Law of Thermodynamics: Entropy and enthalpy - Chemical bonds in
biochemistry-molecular structures, Biomolecules and their functional groups - Biochemical evolution.
UNIT II CARBOHYDRATES 9
Structure of monosaccharides, sterioisomerism and optical isomerism of sugars - Reactions of aldehydes and
230
ketone groups - Ring structure and anomeric forms – mutarotation - Structure, occurrence and biological
importance oligosaccharides and polysaccharides - Carbohydrate metabolism: glycolysis, gluconeogenesis -
TCA cycle.
UNIT III PROTEINS 9
Structure and Function - Primary, Secondary, Tertiary and Quaternary structures - Enzymes and their
classifications - General properties of enzymes (pH, Temperature, Substrate concentrations) - 3-D structure of
proteins - amino acid sequencing - Metabolism of amino acids - Metabolism of aromatic amino acids – Inborn
errors of metabolism.
UNIT IV LIPIDS 9
Definition and classification - Fatty acids: Introduction, classification, nomenclature, structure and properties of
saturated and unsaturated fatty acids - Essential fatty acids - Triacylglycerols: nomenclature, physical properties,
chemical properties and characterization of fats - hydrolysis, saponification - rancidity of fats - Biological
significance of fats.
UNIT V NUCLEIC ACIDS 9
Chemical nature of nucleic acids - Double helical structure - Nucleic acid denaturation - Classes of nucleic acids-
Metabolism of nucleic acids - Synthesis of purines and pyrimidines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Nelson, D.L., M.M. Cox, “Lehninger’s Principles of Biochemistry”, W.H.Freeman & Co., 6th Edition, 2012.
2. Stryer L., “Biochemistry”, W.H.Freeman & Co., 7th Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Voet D., Prat W.C., Voet J., “Principles of Biochemistry”, John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition 2012.
2. Wilson K., Walker J., “Principles and Techniques of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology”, Cambridge
University Press, 7th Edition, 2010.
15BTA04 BASIC IMMUNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart knowledge about the organization of immune system.

 To familiarize students with basic components in innate immunity.
 To introduce students to the critical role of adaptive immune system and vaccination concepts.
 To familiarize students with immune system disorders.
 To make students understand the importance of transplantation and immunotherapy.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Able to understand the various types of cells and organs involved in immune system.
 Able to illustrate the various barriers of innate immunity and importance of complement system.
 Able to understand the various concepts and molecules of adaptive immunity and methods involved in
vaccine designing.
231
 Able to analyze the reason behind the various autoimmune disorders.
 Able to apply the concepts of immunology immunotherapy of infectious diseases and transplantation.
Basic knowledge in microbiology, genetics, and cell biology.
UNIT I ORGANIZATION OF IMMUNE SYSTEM 9
History - Hematopoiesis - Primary & Secondary lymphoid organs - Myeloid cells, Lymphoid cells, Dendritic cells
and Natural killer cells.
UNIT II INNATE IMMUNITY 9
Innate immunity: Anatomical, Physiological, Phagocytic and Inflammatory barriers - The complement system:
Overview - Induced innate responses to infections.
UNIT III THE ADAPTIVE IMMUNE AND INFECTION 9
Cell-Mediated Immune response: T cell mediated response, Humoral Immune Response - Antibodies: Structure
of Immunoglobulins, Immunoglobulin subtype - T cell receptor - Cytokines: functions, Infectious agents and how
they cause disease: Bacterial (Tuberculosis), viral (Influenza) and parasitic infection (helminthes) - vaccines:
history, principle of vaccination - Conventional and recombinant vaccines.
UNIT IV IMMUNE DISORDERS 9
Inherited immunodeficiency diseases: SCID, DiGeorge’s syndrome, X-linked agammaglobulinemia - Acquired

Immune Deficiency Syndrome: AIDS - Hypersensitivities: Type I, II, III and IV - Autoimmune responses: Graves
disease, Rheumatoid Arthritis, Diabetes Mellitus Type I, II - Myesthenia gravis.
UNIT V TRANSPLANTATION AND IMMUNOTHERAPY 9
Tissue typing and matching transplantation: Heart, Liver, Kidney – Immunosuppression - Transplant rejection -
Immunotherapy: Infections, Cancer.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Kuby J., “Immunology”, WH Freeman & Co., 6th Edition, 2000.

2. Roitt I., Brostoff M., “Immunology”, Mosby Publication, 8th Edition, 2012.
3. Immunobiology by Janeway , Travers, Walport, Sclomchik, Garland Science; 7th edition, 2007.
4. Abbas, K.A., Litchman, A.H., Pober, J.S., “Cellular and Molecular Immunology”, W.B. Saunders Co.,
th
Pennsylvania, 7 Edition, 2011.
5. William E.P., “Fundamental Immunology”, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 7th Edition, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ashim K.C., “Immunology and Immunotechnology”, Oxford University Press, 1st Edition, 2006.
2. Christine D., “Clinical Immunology and Serology: A laboratory Perspective”; F.A. Davis Co., 3rd revised
Edition, 2009.
232
15BTA05 CHEMICALS IN ENVIRONMENT AND PUBLIC HEALTH L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Define the major sources and types of environmental agents and discuss the transport and fate of these
agents in the environment.
 Identify the carriers or vectors that promote the transfer of these agents from the environment to the
human.
 To understand the procedures and requirement for hazardous waste management and gain the
knowledge on the policies, legislations.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the relationship between environment and human health.
 Able to understand the impact of hazardous waste on environment and human health.
 Acquire the knowledge about the Environmental Management Policies and Practices.
Environmental Science, Physics, Chemistry.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT AND HEALTH 9
Human impact on the environment - Environment-human interaction - Environmental impact on humans - Indoor
and outdoor air - Water & Soil pollution - Exposure, dose and Response - Food and water-borne disease.
UNIT II IMPACT OF INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS AND HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Non Hazardous wastes - Hazardous wastes: Metals, chemical, drugs, leather, pulp, electroplating, dye, rubber -
Hazardous wastes on environment and human heath: case studies (chemical accumulation in plants - Cadmium
in rice, Hexachlorobenzene in seed grains : Cancer, neurological disorder, acute lung diseases, behavioural and
mental effects - Carbamate pesticide in watermelons: Gastrointestinal, skeletal, muscle, autonomic and central
nervous system effects, , Lead in paint) - Food adulterants and their impact on human health.
UNIT III IMPACT OF BIOMEDICAL WASTES 9
Characteristics & sources – BMW: Segregation, collection, transportation, disposal - Liquid BMW - Radioactive
waste - Metals / Chemicals / Drug waste - Modern technology for handling BMW Monitoring & controlling of cross
infection - Health and Environmental effect: case studies.
UNIT IV IMPACT OF NUCLEAR WASTES 9
Sources - Types of Nuclear waste - Nuclear power plants and fuel production Waste generation from nuclear
power plants - Disposal options, Defining risk and environmental risk - Methods of risk assessment - Measures
and health effects: case studies.
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT POLICIES AND PRACTICES 9
Environment and pollution - definition as per Environmental law - General powers of Central and state
Government under EPA - Important Notification in EPA 1986 - Constitution of Pollution Control Boards - Powers,
functions, Accounts, Audit etc. - Equitable remedies for pollution control - Solid waste management – Hazardous
Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998, Biomedical Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
233
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rodricks J.V., “Calculated Risks- The Toxicity and Human Health Risks of Chemicals in Our Environment”,
Cambridge University press, 2nd Edition, 2007.
2. Lippmann M., “Environmental toxicants: Human exposures and their health effects”, New York: Van
Nostrand Reinhold, 1992.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Philp, R. B., “Environmental hazards and human health”, Boca Raton: Lewis Publishers, 1995
2. Eckenfelder Jr. W .W., “Industrial Water Pollution Control”, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New Delhi, 2000.
3. Michel, Mckinney, Robert, Logan, “Environmental Science – Systems & Solutions”, Jones & Barlett
Publishers, Canada, 2007.
15BTA06 BIOLOGICAL WASTE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Hazardous wastes and its effects.
 Disposal of biological wastes.
 Safe handling and management of biological wastes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 To understand about hazardous wastes, its origin and effects on public health.
 To impart knowledge about sources of biohazardous wastes, risks associated and regulatory aspects of
health care wastes.
 To understand the methods of treatment, disposal and management of biological wastes.
Environmental Science, Physics, Chemistry.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Hazardous waste - Classifications of hazardous waste and its sources - Effects on public health and
environment.
UNIT II BIO HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Biological, Biomedical and Healthcare wastes – Sources - Bio hazardous wastes classification - Risks associated
with bio hazardous waste - Need for control.
UNIT III LEGISLATIVE, REGULATORY AND POLICY ASPECTS OF HEALTH- 9

CARE WASTE
National policies and its five guiding principles - Available guidance – World health organization (WHO), The
International Solid Waste Association (ISWA) and its policy document.
234
UNIT IV BIOLOGICAL WASTE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL 9
Segregation, storage and transport of healthcare and biological wastes - Treatment and disposal method
healthcare waste - Disposal of biological and sharp wastes - Health and safety practices for health-care
personnel and waste workers.
UNIT V MANAGEMENT OF BIO HAZARDOUS WASTES 9
Healthcare waste - Management planning - Infectious waste management plans - Healthcare waste minimization,
reuse and recycling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Blackman W. C., “Basic Hazardous Waste Management”, CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2001.
2. Henry J. G., Heinke G. W., “Environmental Science and Engineering”, Pretice Hall of India, 2nd Edition,
2004.
3. Cheremisinoff, N. P., Cheremisinoff P. N., “Hazardous Materials and Waste Management: A Guide For The
Professional Hazards Manager”, Noyes Publications, 1995.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Panda H., “The Complete Book on Biological Waste Treatment and their Utilization”, NIIR Project
Consultancy Services, 2013.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Safe Management of Wastes from Health-Care Activities, 2nd Edition, WHO, 2014.
2. Biomedical waste (Management and Handling) Rules, Ministry of Environment & Forests, 1998.
15BTA07 NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the knowledge in basics of Nanobiotechnology.
 Understand the application of nanomaterials in biotechnology and acquire the knowledge about the
DNA, proteins, amino acids, drug delivery, biomedicine etc.,
 To make the students understand about the functional principles of bionanotechnology.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Able to understand physicochemical properties of nanomaterials and the unique changes that happen at
nanoscale.
 Able to understand nanoscale view of the natural biomolecular processes, synthesis, modification, and
characterization of nanomaterials.
 Able to understand the application of nanomaterials to biological problems including nanomedicine.
235
UNIT I NANOSCALE AND NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY 9
Introduction to Nanoscience and Nanotechnology - Milestones in Nanotechnology - Overview of

Nanobiotechnology and Nanoscale processes - Physicochemical properties of materials in Nanoscales - Lessons
from Nature on making nanodevices.
UNIT II NANOMATERIALS 9
Types and synthesis of Nanomaterials: Quantum dots, Nanoparticles, Nanocrystals, Dendrimers, Buckyballs,
Nanotubes - Gas, liquid, and solid phase synthesis of Nanomaterials - Lithography techniques (Photolithography,
Dip-pen and Electron beam lithography) - Thin film deposition – Electrospinning - Bio-synthesis of nanomaterials.
UNIT III PROPERTIES AND MEASUREMENT OF NANOMATERIALS 9
Optical Properties: Absorption, Fluorescence, and Resonance - Methods for the measurement of Nanomaterials -
Microscopy measurements: SEM, TEM, AFM and STM - Confocal and TIRF imaging.
UNIT IV PROTEIN AND DNA BASED NANOSTRUCTURES 9
Protein based nanostructures: building blocks and templates – Proteins as transducers and amplifiers of
biomolecular recognition events – Nanobioelectronic devices and polymer nanocontainers – Microbial production
of inorganic nanoparticles –Magnetosomes .DNA based nanostructures – Topographic and Electrostatic
properties of DNA and proteins – Hybrid conjugates of gold nanoparticles – DNA oligomers – Use of DNA
molecules in nanomechanics and Computing.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
Nanoparticles as carrier for genetic material – Nanotechnology in agriculture – Nanomedicine - Drug delivery -
DNA computing - Molecular design using biological selection - Harnessing molecular motors - Artificial life -
Hybrid materials – Biosensors - Future of Bionanotechnology - Health and environmental impacts of
nanotechnology.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Christof M. Niemeyer and Chad A. Mirkin, “Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives”,
Wiley VCH, 1st Edition, 2004.
2. Oded Shoseyov and Ilan Levy “NanoBiotechnology: BioInspired Devices and Materials of the Future”,
Humana Press; 1st Edition 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sandra J Rosenthal and David W. Wright, “NanoBiotechnology Protocols (Methods in Molecular Biology)”,
Humana Press; 1st Edition, 2005.
st
2. Clarke. A.R. and Eberhardt C. N. (Editors), “Microscopy Techniques for Material Science”, CRC Press. 1
Edition, 2002.
236
15BTA08 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The basic architecture of human body.
 Organization of human organ systems.
 Physiological significance of the human organ system.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand basic human anatomy.
 Know the functions of different organs and their significance.
 Implement the knowledge for up-keeping good health.
UNIT I GENERAL ANATOMY OF THE BODY 9
Introduction to basic concepts of: Body planes, Tissues (Types, origin & function) organs.
UNIT II BLOOD 9
Composition of blood – Haemopoesis - Structure and function of hemoglobin - Haemostasis (all types of clotting
mechanisms) - Blood groups and introduction to basic concepts of transfusion.
UNIT III NERVE PHYSIOLOGY 9
Origin of resting membrane potential and action potential - Electrophysiology of ion channels - Structure and
function of neuron - Conduction of nerve impulse in a neuron - Synapse, its types and synaptic transmission -
Neurotransmitters, types and functions.
UNIT IV MUSCULAR SYSTEM AND ENDOCRINOLOGY 9
Types of muscles - Functional anatomy of muscular system - Concepts of degeneration and regeneration of
muscle - Neuromuscular transmission - Muscle excitation and contraction - Types of contraction and its
properties - General mechanism of hormone action - Glands and their hormone, structure, function, regulation.
UNIT V CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM 9
Structure and function of heart - Cardiac cycle - Basic concepts of electrocardiogram (ECG) - Circulatory system
and hemodynamic - Lymph and lymphatic circulation - Blood pressure (causes and factors affecting it).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Stuart I. F H., “Human Physiology” McGraw- Hill, 13 Edition, 2012.
2. Guyton and Hall, “Text book of Medical Physiology”, W B Saunders and Company, 13th Edition, 2015
.
237
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gerad J. T., Sandra R. G., “Principles of Anatomy and Physiology - Control systems of human body, Vol-3”,
Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, 2006.
2. Barett K.E., Barman S.M., Boitans S., Brook H., “Ganong’s Review of Medical physiology”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 23rd Edition (Lange basic science), 2009.
Offered by MBA Department

15BAA01 ESSENTIALS OF FINANCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop an understanding of business related finance.
 To have an understanding of finance in order to contribute to the organization’s success.
 To improve the financial skills in order to make critical business decisions involving budgets, cost savings
and growth strategies.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
 understand financial terms
 interpret financial statements
 make decision on budgeting and investment
 communicate with financial experts
UNIT I Introduction to Finance 9
Role for Finance for Individual and Organization – Goals and Functions of Finance - Time Value of Money –
Significance
UNIT II Financial Planning and Decisions 9
Financial Planning – Decisions – Investment Decision – Financing Decision - Dividend Decision - Evaluation of
Investment Projects and Financing – Working Capital
UNIT III Funds Management 9
Funds Mobilization – Sources – Internal and external
UNIT IV Financial Statements 9
Financial Statements - Balance Sheet – PL account - Cash/Fund Flow - Analysis
UNIT V Overview of Indian Financial Markets 9
Financial System – Bank and Financial Institutions – Capital Market - Money Market
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. I. M. Pandey, “Financial Management”, (10 ed.), Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2013.
238
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. Prasanna Chandra, “Financial Management”, (7 ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
th
2. Khan M Y and Jain P K, “Financial Management”, (6 ed.), McGraw Hill, 2013.
L T P C
15BAA02 ESSENTIALS OF MARKETING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of Marketing Management as a functional area of an organisation.
 To understand the basic elements that makes up the marketing function.
 To understanding the functions of a marketing department.
 To understand the importance of marketing to an organisation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to:

 Describe a Marketing Department and the functions of a marketing department.
 Choose and understand the needs of the customers.
 Combine the four Ps of marketing to design a marketing model
 Have a basic ideas on how a market segmented and customers are targeted.
 Have a basic understanding on the elements of the marketing mix
UNIT I Understanding Marketing Management – an overview 9
Introduction, Marketing department functions, Selling vs Marketing, Marketing concepts (Marketers and
Prospects, Needs, Wants, and Demands, Value and Satisfaction), Basics of Market segmentation, Target
markets and Positioning.
UNIT II The Marketing mix element – Product 9
Introduction, Characteristics of the product life cycle and their marketing implications, Facets of the PLC, New
product development, The market diffusion process, Organizing for new product development
UNIT III The Marketing mix element – Price 9
Introduction, Price and the marketing mix, Pricing objectives, Factors affecting pricing decisions, Setting a price,
Pricing industrial goods, Pricing and information technology
UNIT IV The Marketing mix element – Promotion 9
Communications contact techniques (Promotion mix) - Advertising, Direct marketing, Sales promotion, Personal
selling, Sponsorship, Publicity
UNIT V The Marketing mix element – Place: channels of distribution 9
Introduction, Intermediaries in channels of distribution - Sales agents, Distributors, Wholesalers, Retailers, Franchising,
Internet marketing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Marilyn A. Stone, John Desmond, “Fundamentals of Marketing” (Special Indian Edition), Routledge, Taylor
& Francis Group, 2014.
239
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. William J. Stanton, Michael J. Etzel, Bruce J. Walter, “Fundamentals of Marketing”, (10 ed.), TMH, 1994.
th
2. Philip Kotler, “Marketing Management: A South Asian Perspective”, (14 ed.), Pearson India, 2012.
L T P C
15BAA03 ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the participant understand the role of HR Department in an organization
 To know the various functional areas of HRM
 To understand the recent developments in HR
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Students will understand the basic concepts in HRM
 Students will be aware of human resource requirement for an organization
 Students will be aware of the ways for developing the skills and knowledge of the employees
 Students will be able to understand the motivation model in an organization
 Students will be aware of present development in HR
UNIT I Introduction 9
Introduction to HRM – Meaning, Importance and Objectives, History of Managing Human Resources,
Environment of HR. Functions and Roles of HR Manager
UNIT II Procurement of Human Resources 9
Job Analysis – Meaning, Process and Methods, Human Resource Planning – Importance, Process, HR Demand
and Supply Forecasting Techniques. Recruitment – Importance, Recruitment Sources, Selection – Process
Socialization / Induction – Importance and Types
UNIT III Development / Training 9
Training – Purpose, Process – Need Identification, On-the-Job Methods and Off-the-Job Methods. Executive
Development Programmes – Difference from training. Performance Appraisal – Process, Techniques – MBO and
360 Degree Feedback. Job Changes - Promotion, Demotion and Transfer
UNIT IV Compensation and Motivation 9
Job Evaluation – Meaning, Process, Compensation Plan – Deciding factors & Framing Process. Human Needs –
Motivation Theories – Maslow’s Need theory and Herzberg’s two factor theory, Applications – Rewards and
Reinforcement. Grievances – Causes and Redressal methods. Disciplinary Action – Nature and Types
UNIT V Maintenance and Separation 9
The Factories Act, 1948 – Health, Safety and Welfare Provisions. The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders)
Act, 1946 – Framing Standing Order. Separation – Retirement, Layoff, Out-placement & Discharge. Latest trends
in HRM - HRIS – Meaning and Implementation Process. E-HRM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
st
1. Arun Monappa, “Managing Human Resources”, (1 ed.), Trinity Press Publications, 2014.
th
2. Dessler, “Human Resource Management”, (12 ed.), Pearson Education Limited, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. Aswathappa K., “Human Resource Management”, (7 ed.), 2013, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
th
2. Decenzo and Robbins, “Human Resource Management”, (10 ed.), Wiley, 2010.
3. Mamoria C.B & Mamoria S., “Personnel Management”, Himalaya Publishing Co., 2010.
nd
4. Eugence Mckenna & Nic Beach, “Human Resource Mgmt”, (2 ed.), Pearson Education Ltd, 2008.
th
5. Wayne Cascio, “Managing Human Resource”, (9 ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
th
6. Ivancevich, “Human Resource Management”, (12 ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
240
241

Civil PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Civil PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Civil PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS)

B.E CIVIL ENGINEERING

Sl.No. Description Page No.

1. Regulations: Mepco - R2015 1

5. Syllabus - III Semester 63

9. Syllabus - VII Semester 102

10. Syllabus - VIII Semester 147

11. Core Elective – I (V Semester) 107

12. Core Elective – II (VI Semester) 115

13. Core Elective – III (VII Semester) 124

14. Core Elective – IV (VII Semester) 131

15. Core Elective – V (VII Semester) 139

16. Core Elective – VI (VIII Semester) 147

Syllabus Page No.

Sl.No. Course Offering Department Value

1. Civil Engineering - 249 393 434

2. Electrical and Electronics Engineering 154 276 395 435

3. Electronics and Communication Engineering 167 291 398 440

4. Computer Science Engineering 180 316 404 445

5. Mechanical Engineering 194 331 408 446

6. Information and Technology 223 353 420 452

7. Bio – Technology 236 366 - 459

8. Mathematics - 379 428 -

10. Physics - 387 - -

11. Chemistry - 390 - -

12. Master of Business Administration - - - -

Institute Vision Institute Mission

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

1. PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATURE

In these Regulations, unless the context otherwise requires:

VI). “Head of the Institution” means the Principal of the campus.

VII). “Chairperson, BoS” means Chairperson of Board of Studies of each faculty.

VIII). “Head of the Department” means Head of the Department concerned.

XII). “University” means Anna University, Chennai.

XIII). LES means Lateral Entry Scheme.

 The Higher Secondary Examination of (10 + 2) Curriculum (Regular Academic Stream)

 The Diploma Examination in Engineering conducted by the State Board of Technical

 An Examination of any University or Authority, accepted by the Syndicate of the Anna

 Any other examination as notified by the Government of Tamil Nadu.

4. STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMMES

1. Humanities and Social Sciences (HS), including Management

2. Basic Sciences (BS) including Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry, Biology

3. Engineering Sciences (ES), including Materials, Workshop, Drawing, Basics of

4. Core Courses (CC) - Relevant to the chosen specialization/branch

8. Project Work, Seminar and/or Internship in reputed organization/Industry.

4.2. Procedure for the enrollment for the OPEL / ALEL:

4.4 Each course is normally assigned a certain number of credits with

 1 credit for 2 periods of laboratory or practical courses.

5. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

6. REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPLETION OF A SEMESTER

The responsibilities for the Faculty Advisor shall be:

 To monitor the academic performance of the students including attendance and to

• Solving the problems experienced by students in the classroom and in the

• Informing the student representatives, the details of Regulations regarding weightage

9. COURSE COMMITTEE FOR COMMON COURSES

10. PROCEDURES FOR AWARDING MARKS FOR INTERNAL ASSESSMENT (IA)

10.1 Internal Assessment for Theory Courses

(a) Internal tests (75% credence)

(b) Assignment (15% credence)